IDU 610620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) - (V100R003 - 06)

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
V100R003
IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web
LCT)
Issue 06
Date 2010-05-25
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 06 (2010-05-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
About This Document
Purpose
This document uses examples to describe the entire process of the initial configuration of the
OptiX RTN 600 that adopts the IDU 610/620 by using the Web LCT. It can help the readers to
easily grasp the method for configuring the OptiX RTN 600 and thus to complete all the actual
configuration tasks.
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX RTN 600 V100R003
OptiX iManager T2000 V200R007C03

Intended Audience
The intended audiences of this document are:
l Installation/Commissioning engineers
l Data configuration engineers
Before reading this document, you should be familiar with the following information:
l Radio communication basics, especially the basics of network planning
l Basic functions and slots that are configured to house the boards of the OptiX RTN 600
l Basic operations of the Web LCT
IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) About This Document
iii
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,
which if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level
of risk, which if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,
which if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
degradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a
problem or save time.

Provides additional information to emphasize
or supplement important points of the main
text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in
boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.
Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in
Courier New.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
About This Document
IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT)
iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, windows, and dialog titles are in
boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For
example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Mouse Operation
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Action Description
Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.
Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without
moving the pointer.
Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain
position.

Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made to previous issues.
Updates in Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Sixth release.
The descriptions of the parameters used for configuring the Hybrid/AM attribute, and
configuring the LAG protection are optimized.
Fifth formal release.
Known defects are fixed.
The configuration of the 1588 clock overhead byte is described.
Fourth formal release.
Known defects are fixed as required.
The descriptions for the parameters such as Maximum Transmit Power (dBm) and Receive
Power (dBm) are added.
IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) About This Document
v
Third formal release.
Second formal release.
Initial formal release.
About This Document
vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii
1 Configuration Preparations......................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Preparing Documents and Tools.....................................................................................................................1-2
1.1.1 Preparing Documents.............................................................................................................................1-2
1.1.2 Preparing the Tools................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Selecting the Configuration Mode..................................................................................................................1-2
1.3 Checking Configuration Conditions................................................................................................................1-3
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave..........................2-1
2.1 Configuration Flow.........................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Configuration Example...................................................................................................................................2-5
2.2.1 Networking Diagram..............................................................................................................................2-5
2.2.2 Service Planning.....................................................................................................................................2-6
2.2.3 Configuring NE1..................................................................................................................................2-15
2.2.4 Configuring NE2..................................................................................................................................2-20
2.2.5 Configuring NE3..................................................................................................................................2-27
2.2.6 Configuring NE4 .................................................................................................................................2-32
2.2.7 Configuring NE5..................................................................................................................................2-35
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave..............................3-1
3.1 Configuration Flow.........................................................................................................................................3-3
3.1.1 Configuring Point-to-Point EPL Services..............................................................................................3-3
3.1.2 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL Services...........................................................................................3-4
3.1.3 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services..................................................................................3-5
3.1.4 Configuring QinQ-Based EVPL Services .............................................................................................3-5
3.1.5 Configuring 802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services.............................................................................3-5
3.1.6 Configuring 802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services..........................................................................3-6
3.1.7 Configuring 802.1ad Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services........................................................................3-7
3.2 Configuration Example (Point-to-Point EPL Services)..................................................................................3-7
3.2.3 Configuring NE1..................................................................................................................................3-10
3.2.4 Configuring NE2..................................................................................................................................3-14
3.3 Configuration Example (PORT-Shared EVPL Services).............................................................................3-14
IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) Contents
vii
3.3.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................3-14
3.3.2 Service Planning...................................................................................................................................3-15
3.3.3 Configuring NE1..................................................................................................................................3-18
3.3.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3...................................................................................................................3-23
3.4 Configuration Example (VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services)....................................................................3-23
3.4.3 Configuring NE1..................................................................................................................................3-27
3.4.4 Configuring NE2..................................................................................................................................3-31
3.5 Configuration Example (802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services)...............................................................3-31
3.5.3 Configuring NE1..................................................................................................................................3-35
3.6 Configuration Example (802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services)............................................................3-40
3.6.3 Configuring NE1..................................................................................................................................3-45
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave.....................................................4-1
4.1 Configuration Flows........................................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Configuration Flow (Microwave Services)............................................................................................4-2
4.1.2 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)......................................4-4
4.1.3 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board)........................................4-6
4.2 Configuration Example...................................................................................................................................4-7
4.2.2 Service Planning (Microwave Services)................................................................................................4-9
4.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)........................................4-14
4.2.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board)..........................................4-18
4.2.5 Configuring NE1 (Microwave Services)..............................................................................................4-20
4.2.6 Configuring NE1 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)........................................4-24
4.2.7 Configuring NE2 (Microwave Services)..............................................................................................4-34
4.2.8 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)........................................4-41
4.2.9 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board).........................................4-50
4.2.10 Configuring NE3................................................................................................................................4-51
5 Configuring Microwave Services by Using the Quick Configuration Wizard..............5-1
5.1 Purpose............................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.2 Using the Quick Configuration Wizard..........................................................................................................5-3
6 Configuring the Services and Functions of Auxiliary Interfaces.....................................6-1
6.1 Configuration Example (Synchronous Data Services)....................................................................................6-2
Contents
viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
6.1.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................6-3
6.2 Configuration Example (Asynchronous Data Services)................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................6-7
6.3 Configuration Example (External Alarms).....................................................................................................6-9
6.3.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................6-10
7 Checking the Configuration....................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Checking the NE Configuration......................................................................................................................7-2
7.2 Checking the Radio Link.................................................................................................................................7-5
8 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data..................................................................8-1
8.1 Task Collection (Configuring SDH/PDH Services)........................................................................................8-2
8.2 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services)...........................................................................................8-7
9 Configuration Task Collection................................................................................................9-1
9.1 Managing NEs.................................................................................................................................................9-3
9.1.1 Creating an NE (Searching for the NE)..................................................................................................9-3
9.1.2 Creating an NE Manually.......................................................................................................................9-4
9.1.3 Logging In to an NE...............................................................................................................................9-6
9.1.4 Modifying the NE ID............................................................................................................................. 9-8
9.1.5 Modifying the IP Address of an NE.....................................................................................................9-10
9.1.6 Configuring Logical Boards.................................................................................................................9-11
9.1.7 Synchronizing the NE Time.................................................................................................................9-12
9.1.8 Localizing the NE Time.......................................................................................................................9-16
9.2 Configuring Radio Links...............................................................................................................................9-18
9.2.1 Creating IF 1+1 Protection...................................................................................................................9-19
9.2.2 Creating an XPIC Workgroup..............................................................................................................9-22
9.2.3 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link........................................................................9-26
9.2.4 Creating an N+1 Protection Group.......................................................................................................9-31
9.2.5 Creating REGs......................................................................................................................................9-33
9.2.6 Configuring the Hybrid/AM Attribute.................................................................................................9-35
9.2.7 Configuring the ATPC Function..........................................................................................................9-37
9.3 Configuring MSP..........................................................................................................................................9-39
9.3.1 Configuring the Ring MSP...................................................................................................................9-39
9.3.2 Creating Linear MSP............................................................................................................................9-42
9.4 Configuring SDH/PDH Services (NE Configuration)..................................................................................9-46
9.4.1 Numbering Schemes for SDH Timeslots ............................................................................................9-46
9.4.2 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services .....................................................................9-48
9.4.3 Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP Services.................................................................................9-51
ix
9.4.4 Setting the Automatic Switching Conditions of SNCP Services.........................................................9-55
9.4.5 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a Service.......................................................................................9-57
9.4.6 Converting Normal Services into SNCP Services...............................................................................9-57
9.4.7 Converting SNCP Services into Normal Services...............................................................................9-61
9.5 Configuring the Clock...................................................................................................................................9-61
9.5.1 Clock Synchronization Scheme...........................................................................................................9-62
9.5.2 Configuring the Clock Sources............................................................................................................9-67
9.5.3 Configuring Protection for Clock Sources ..........................................................................................9-69
9.5.4 Modifying the Parameters of the External Clock Output.....................................................................9-72
9.5.5 Customizing the Clock Parameters......................................................................................................9-74
9.6 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces....................................................................................9-74
9.6.1 Configuring the Orderwire...................................................................................................................9-75
9.6.2 Configuring Synchronous Data Services.............................................................................................9-78
9.6.3 Configuring Asynchronous Data Services...........................................................................................9-80
9.6.4 Configuring External Alarms...............................................................................................................9-81
9.7 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports ..............................................................................................9-84
9.7.1 Configuring the Parameters of SDH Interfaces ...................................................................................9-85
9.7.2 Configuring the Parameters of PDH Interfaces ...................................................................................9-86
9.7.3 Setting the Parameters of IF Ports........................................................................................................9-89
9.7.4 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports...................................................................................................9-93
9.8 Configuring Overhead Bytes.........................................................................................................................9-96
9.8.1 Configuring the IEEE 1588 Overhead.................................................................................................9-96
9.8.2 Configuring RSOHs.............................................................................................................................9-97
9.8.3 Configuring VC-4 POHs......................................................................................................................9-98
9.8.4 Configuring VC-3 POHs....................................................................................................................9-102
9.8.5 Configuring VC-12 POHs..................................................................................................................9-104
9.9 Adjusting the Alarm Management Function...............................................................................................9-106
9.10 Enabling/Disabling the Monitoring of the NE Performance.....................................................................9-107
9.11 Configuring Ethernet Ports........................................................................................................................9-108
9.11.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports................................................................................................9-109
9.11.2 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board........................................................................9-115
9.11.3 Modifying the Type Field of Jumbo Frames....................................................................................9-123
9.11.4 Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the VCTRUNK Bandwidth....................................................9-124
9.12 Creating Ethernet Services........................................................................................................................9-125
9.12.1 Creating Ethernet Line Service........................................................................................................9-126
9.12.2 Creating the Ethernet LAN Service..................................................................................................9-131
9.12.3 Modifying the Mounted Port of a Bridge.........................................................................................9-136
9.12.4 Creating the VLAN Filter Table......................................................................................................9-138
9.12.5 Deleting an Ethernet Private Line Service.......................................................................................9-140
9.12.6 Deleting an Ethernet LAN Service...................................................................................................9-140
9.13 Configuring the Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services.........................................................................9-141
9.13.1 Creating Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services...........................................................................9-142
Contents
x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
9.13.2 Deleting the Cross-Connections of an Ethernet Service..................................................................9-142
9.14 Configuring the QoS.................................................................................................................................9-142
9.14.1 Creating a Flow................................................................................................................................9-143
9.14.2 Creating the CAR.............................................................................................................................9-146
9.14.3 Creating the CoS..............................................................................................................................9-149
9.14.4 Binding the CAR/CoS......................................................................................................................9-151
9.14.5 Configuring the Traffic Shaping......................................................................................................9-152
9.14.6 Configuring the CoS of the IFH2 Board..........................................................................................9-154
9.14.7 Modifying CAR Parameters.............................................................................................................9-155
9.14.8 Modifying CoS Parameters..............................................................................................................9-156
9.15 Creating a LAG.........................................................................................................................................9-157
9.16 LPT Configuration....................................................................................................................................9-165
9.17 Configuring the Layer 2 Switching Feature..............................................................................................9-169
9.17.1 Creating the Entry of a MAC Address Table Manually ..................................................................9-170
9.17.2 Modifying the Aging Time of the MAC Address Table Entry........................................................9-172
9.17.3 Configuring the Spanning Tree Protocol ........................................................................................9-173
9.17.4 Configuring the IGMP Snooping Protocol.......................................................................................9-177
9.17.5 Modifying the Aging Time of the Multicast Table Item..................................................................9-179
9.17.6 Configuring the Broadcast Packet Suppression Function................................................................9-180
9.18 Configuring the Service Access of NEs....................................................................................................9-181
9.18.1 Configuring the LCT Access to NEs................................................................................................9-181
9.18.2 Configuring the Ethernet Access to an NE......................................................................................9-182
9.18.3 Configuring the Serial Port Access to an NE...................................................................................9-183
A Glossary..................................................................................................................................... A-1
A.1 0-9..................................................................................................................................................................A-2
A.2 A-E................................................................................................................................................................A-2
A.3 F-J..................................................................................................................................................................A-7
A.4 K-O..............................................................................................................................................................A-10
A.5 P-T...............................................................................................................................................................A-12
A.6 U-Z..............................................................................................................................................................A-16
xi
Figures
Figure 2-1 Networking diagram...........................................................................................................................2-6
Figure 2-2 Planning the radio link........................................................................................................................2-7
Figure 2-3 IDU board configuration (NE1)..........................................................................................................2-8
Figure 2-8 Timeslot allocation diagram.............................................................................................................2-12
Figure 2-9 Clock Synchronization Scheme........................................................................................................2-14
Figure 3-2 IDU board configuration ...................................................................................................................3-8
Figure 3-3 Configuring Ethernet services............................................................................................................3-9
Figure 3-4 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services...........................................................................................3-10
Figure 3-5 Networking diagram.........................................................................................................................3-15
Figure 3-6 IDU board configuration (NE1)........................................................................................................3-15
Figure 3-7 IDU board configuration (NE2 and NE3)........................................................................................3-15
Figure 3-8 Configuring Ethernet services..........................................................................................................3-16
Figure 3-9 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services...........................................................................................3-17
Figure 3-10 Networking diagram.......................................................................................................................3-24
Figure 3-11 IDU board configuration (NE1 and NE2)......................................................................................3-24
Figure 3-12 Configuring Ethernet services........................................................................................................3-25
Figure 3-13 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services.........................................................................................3-26
Figure 3-15 IDU board configuration (NE1)......................................................................................................3-33
Figure 3-20 IDU board configuration (NE1)......................................................................................................3-41
IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) Figures
xiii
Figure 4-2 Link planning diagram .....................................................................................................................4-10
Figure 4-3 Board layout of the IDU (NE1)........................................................................................................4-11
Figure 4-6 Timeslot allocation diagram.............................................................................................................4-13
Figure 4-7 Clock synchronization scheme.........................................................................................................4-13
Figure 4-8 Configuration information of Ethernet parameters...........................................................................4-15
Figure 4-9 Configuration diagram of the Ethernet services between NE2 and NE3......................................... 4-19
Figure 6-2 Timeslot allocation of synchronous data services..............................................................................6-3
Figure 6-4 Timeslot allocation diagram ..............................................................................................................6-6
Figure 9-1 Numbering VC-12 timeslots by order..............................................................................................9-47
Figure 9-2 Numbering VC-12 timeslots in the interleaved scheme ..................................................................9-47
Figure 9-3 Clock synchronization scheme for a chain network.........................................................................9-63
Figure 9-4 Clock synchronization scheme for a tree network............................................................................9-64
Figure 9-5 Clock synchronization scheme for a ring network (the entire ring network line is an SDH line)
.............................................................................................................................................................................9-65
Figure 9-6 Clock synchronization scheme for a ring network (not the entire ring network line is an SDH line)
.............................................................................................................................................................................9-66
Figure 9-7 Clock synchronization scheme for networking with convergence at tributary ports....................... 9-67
Figures
xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Tables
Table 1-1 Configuration mode.............................................................................................................................1-2
Table 2-1 Flow for configuring SDH/PDH services based on the SDH/PDH microwave..................................2-2
Table 2-2 Service requirements............................................................................................................................2-6
Table 2-3 Planning information of the radio link.................................................................................................2-7
Table 2-4 Attributes of the IF 1+1 protection ......................................................................................................2-9
Table 2-5 Information of IF ports (NE1 and NE2).............................................................................................2-10
Table 2-6 Information of IF ports (NE3, NE4, and NE5)..................................................................................2-10
Table 2-7 Information of ODU ports (NE1 and NE2)........................................................................................2-11
Table 2-8 Information of ODU ports (NE3, NE4, and NE5).............................................................................2-11
Table 2-9 Clock information..............................................................................................................................2-14
Table 2-10 Orderwire information.....................................................................................................................2-14
Table 3-1 Flow for configuring point-to-point EPL services by using Ethernet switching boards......................3-3
Table 3-2 Flow for configuring PORT-shared EVPL services............................................................................3-4
Table 3-3 Flow for configuring VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services...................................................................3-5
Table 3-4 Flow for configuring 802.1d bridge-based EPLAN services...............................................................3-6
Table 3-5 Flow for configuring 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services............................................................3-6
Table 3-6 Parameters of external Ethernet ports..................................................................................................3-9
Table 3-7 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports...................................................................................................3-9
Table 3-8 Parameters of external Ethernet ports................................................................................................3-16
Table 3-9 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports.................................................................................................3-16
Table 3-10 Parameters of EPL services..............................................................................................................3-17
Table 3-11 Parameters of external Ethernet ports..............................................................................................3-25
Table 3-12 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports...............................................................................................3-25
Table 3-13 Parameters of EPL services..............................................................................................................3-26
Table 3-16 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services..............................................................................................3-34
Table 3-19 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services..............................................................................................3-44
Table 4-1 Configuring services based on the Hybrid microwave........................................................................4-2
Table 4-2 Flow for configuring the Ethernet services accessed through the EMS6 board..................................4-5
Table 4-3 Flow for configuring the Ethernet services accessed through the IFH2 board....................................4-7
IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) Tables
xv
Table 4-4 Link capacity......................................................................................................................................4-10
Table 4-5 Information for planning a radio link.................................................................................................4-10
Table 4-6 Attributes of the IF 1+1 protection.....................................................................................................4-12
Table 4-7 Clock information.............................................................................................................................. 4-14
Table 4-8 Orderwire information....................................................................................................................... 4-14
Table 4-9 Parameters of external ports of the EMS6 board............................................................................... 4-15
Table 4-10 Parameters of external ports of the IFH2 board...............................................................................4-15
Table 4-11 Parameters of Ethernet private line services (NE1).........................................................................4-16
Table 4-12 Parameters of Ethernet private line services (NE2).........................................................................4-16
Table 4-13 Flow configuration...........................................................................................................................4-17
Table 4-14 Parameters of the CAR
a
...................................................................................................................4-17
Table 4-15 Parameters of the CoS......................................................................................................................4-18
Table 4-16 Parameters of the link aggregation group........................................................................................ 4-18
Table 4-17 Parameters of external Ethernet ports.............................................................................................. 4-19
Table 4-18 Parameters of the CoS of the IFH2 board (NE2).............................................................................4-19
Table 4-19 Parameters of Ethernet services (NE3)............................................................................................ 4-19
Table 5-1 Purpose of the quick configuration......................................................................................................5-2
Table 6-1 Configuration of the synchronous data port.........................................................................................6-3
Table 6-2 Configuration of the asynchronous data services.................................................................................6-6
Table 6-3 Configuration of the external alarms..................................................................................................6-10
Table 7-1 NE status checklist...............................................................................................................................7-2
Table 7-2 Software version checklist...................................................................................................................7-3
Table 7-3 Clock checklist.....................................................................................................................................7-3
Table 7-4 1+1 protection checklist.......................................................................................................................7-3
Table 7-5 Cross-connection and SNCP checklist.................................................................................................7-4
Table 7-6 Alarm and abnormal event checklist....................................................................................................7-4
Table 7-7 ECC routing checklist..........................................................................................................................7-4
Table 7-8 XPIC checklist.....................................................................................................................................7-5
Table 7-9 N+1 protection checklist......................................................................................................................7-5
Table 7-10 IF 1+1 protection checklist.................................................................................................................7-6
Table 7-11 Hybrid/AM attribute checklist...........................................................................................................7-6
Table 7-12 IF configuration checklist..................................................................................................................7-7
Table 7-13 ODU configuration checklist.............................................................................................................7-7
Table 8-1 Task collection (NE attributes)............................................................................................................8-2
Table 8-2 Task collection (radio link)..................................................................................................................8-3
Table 8-3 Task collection (services).....................................................................................................................8-5
Table 8-4 Task collection (clock).........................................................................................................................8-6
Table 8-5 Task collection (orderwire)..................................................................................................................8-7
Table 8-6 Task collection (Ethernet services transmitted on the SDH microwave).............................................8-7
Table 8-7 Task collection (Ethernet services transmitted on the Hybrid microwave).........................................8-9
Table 9-1 Parameters of the standard NTP server..............................................................................................9-15
Table 9-2 Parameters of the access control rights..............................................................................................9-15
Tables
xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Table 9-3 Parameters of the standard NTP key management.............................................................................9-16
Table 9-4 Navigation path for customizing the clock parameters......................................................................9-74
Table 9-5 Common alarm management functions...........................................................................................9-106
Table 9-6 Methods used by ports to process data frames.................................................................................9-115
Table 9-7 Methods used by ports to process data frames.................................................................................9-122
Table 9-8 Parameter of the Point-to-Point LPT................................................................................................9-167
Table 9-9 Parameter of the Point-to-Multipoint LPT.......................................................................................9-168
IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) Tables
xvii
1 Configuration Preparations
About This Chapter
Before configuring the NE data, you must make the required preparations.
The preparations to be made before the configuration are as follows:
1.1 Preparing Documents and Tools
The relevant documents and tools must be available to ensure the proper configuration of data.
1.2 Selecting the Configuration Mode
You can select the proper configuration mode according to the actual configuration scenarios.
1.3 Checking Configuration Conditions
Before the configuration, check whether the configuration conditions meet the requirements.
IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) 1 Configuration Preparations
1-1
1.1 Preparing Documents and Tools
The relevant documents and tools must be available to ensure the proper configuration of data.
1.1.1 Preparing Documents
The documents required for configuring the OptiX RTN 600 include the network planning
documents and configuration guides.
1.1.2 Preparing the Tools
A computer that is properly configured with the NMS software must be available.
1.1.1 Preparing Documents
The documents required for configuring the OptiX RTN 600 include the network planning
documents and configuration guides.
l Network planning documents, such as the XXX Network Planning
l Configuration guides
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Commissioning Guide
OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide
1.1.2 Preparing the Tools
A computer that is properly configured with the NMS software must be available.
NOTE
For information about the software and hardware required for installing the NMS and the installation
method, see the OptiX iManager T2000 Web LCT User Guide.
1.2 Selecting the Configuration Mode
You can select the proper configuration mode according to the actual configuration scenarios.
Table 1-1 Configuration mode
Configuration Scenario Reference
Applicable Phase Service Type
Initial phase SDH/PDH services based on
the SDH/PDH microwave
2 Configuring SDH/PDH
Services Based on the SDH/
PDH Microwave
Ethernet services based on the
SDH/PDH microwave
3 Configuring Ethernet
Services Based on the SDH/
PDH Microwave
Services based on the Hybrid
microwave
4 Configuring Services Based
on the Hybrid Microwave
1 Configuration Preparations
1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Configuration Scenario Reference
Applicable Phase Service Type
1. The NE must be configured
with the SDH/PDH
microwave services only in
one direction.
2. The RF system must be
configured with the 1+1
protection or the 1+0 non-
protection.
3. The service boards of the NE
must contain only one E1
interface board.
5 Configuring Microwave
Services by Using the Quick
Configuration Wizard
a
Initial phase,
commissioning phase,
and operating phase
Services and functions of the
auxiliary interfaces
6 Configuring the Services and
Functions of Auxiliary
Interfaces
Commissioning phase
and operating phase
Adding and modifying the
configuration data
8 Adding and Modifying the
Configuration Data

NOTE
a: In the case of quick configuration, the microwave services must meet the three prerequisites listed in the
"Service Type" column. Otherwise, only partial configurations are complete.
1.3 Checking Configuration Conditions
Before the configuration, check whether the configuration conditions meet the requirements.
l To configure a gateway NE, ensure that the following requirements are met:
The NE must be powered on properly.
The NE must be connected to the computer that is installed with the NMS.
The network communication between the NMS and the NE must be normal.
l To configure a non-gateway NE, ensure that the following requirements are met:
The NE must be powered on properly.
The gateway NE to which this NE belongs must be connected to the computer on which
the NMS is installed.
The ECC communication between this NE and the gateway NE must be normal.
The network communication between the NMS and the gateway NE must be normal.
IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) 1 Configuration Preparations
1-3
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on
the SDH/PDH Microwave
About This Chapter
The IDU 610 and IDU 620 have the built-in ADMs. Hence, you need to create the cross-
connections when you configure the SDH/PDH services based on the SDH/PDH microwave.
2.1 Configuration Flow
The configuration flow includes the procedure for configuring the SDH/PDH services and the
procedures for configuring the basic NE information, such as the NE attributes and radio links.
2.2 Configuration Example
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and complete the
entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to SDH/PDH service
requirements.
2 Configuring SDH/PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH
Microwave
2-1
The configuration flow includes the procedure for configuring the SDH/PDH services and the
procedures for configuring the basic NE information, such as the NE attributes and radio links.
Table 2-1 Flow for configuring SDH/PDH services based on the SDH/PDH microwave
Step Description Remarks
1 Managing NEs Creating an NE Required.
Logging in to an NE Required.
Modifying the NE ID Required.
Modifying the IP address of an
NE
Optional.
Configuring logical boards Required.
Synchronizing the NE time Required.
2 Configuring
radio links
Configuring the IF 1+1
protection
Required when the 1+1
HSB/FD/SD protection is
configured.
For details about the 1+1
HSB/FD/SD, see the
OptiX RTN 600 Radio
Transmission System
Feature Description.
Creating an XPIC workgroup Required when the XPIC
is configured.
For details about the
XPIC, see the OptiX RTN
600 Radio Transmission
System Feature
Description.
Configuring the IF/ODU
information of a radio link
Required.
Configuring the ATPC attributes Required when you set the
ATPC threshold
manually.
ATPC, see the OptiX RTN
System Feature
Description.
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Configuring an N+1 protection Required when you
configure a 2+1
protection.
Required when you
configure a 3+1
protection.
For details about the N+1
protection, see the OptiX
RTN 600 Radio
Transmission System
Creating REGs Required when you
configure a 3+1
protection on a slave NE.
3 Configuring the
MSP
Configuring the ring MSP Required when you
configure the two-fiber
bidirectional MSP ring.
For details about the two-
fiber bidirectional MSP
ring, see the OptiX RTN
System Feature
Description.
Configuring the linear MSP Required when you
configure the 1+1 or 1:N
linear MSP.
For details about the linear
MSP, see the OptiX RTN
System Feature
Description.
4 Creating the
cross-
connections of
services
Creating the cross-connections of
point-to-point services
Required when non-
SNCP services are
configured.
SNCP services
Required when you
configure the SNCP.
SNCP, see the OptiX RTN
System Feature
Description.
5 Configuring the
clock
Configuring the clock source Required (except when
only the internal clock
source is used).
Microwave
2-3
Configuring protection for the
clock sources
Required when the SSM
or extended SSM clock
protection is configured.
Modifying the parameters of the
external clock output
Required when you set the
external clock output to
the 2 MHz mode or set the
threshold.
Customizing the clock
parameters
Optional.
6 Configuring the
orderwire
Configuring the orderwire Required.
7 Setting the
parameters of
various
interfaces
Setting the parameters of SDH
interfaces
Optional.
Setting the parameters of PDH
interfaces
Required when you
configure the T3 services.
Setting the parameters of IF
interfaces
Required when you
disable the XPIC or
activate the WS service.
XPIC, see the OptiX RTN
System Feature
Description.
Setting the interface parameters
of the ODU
Optional.
8 Configuring the
overhead bytes
Configuring the RSOHs Required when the
J0_MM alarm is
generated on the local or
remote equipment.
Configuring the VC-4 POHs Required when the TIM or
SLM alarm is generated
on the local or remote
equipment.
Configuring the VC-3 POHs
9 Customizing the
alarm
management
scheme
Customizing the alarm
management scheme
Optional.

Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to SDH/PDH service
requirements.
2.2.1 Networking Diagram
The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. In the following example,
the networking diagram shows the NE networking mode and service requirements.
2.2.2 Service Planning
According to the service requirements and the equipment specifications that are shown in the
networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the services of the NEs. In
the following example, the service planning covers all the parameter information required for
configuring the NEs.
2.2.3 Configuring NE1
This topic describes how to configure the data of NE1 based on the parameters of the service
planning, by using the NMS.
This topic describes how to configure the microwave service data of NE2 based on the parameters
of the service planning, by using the NMS.
NE5 is the OptiX RTN 600 that adopts the IDU 605. Therefore, the configuration of NE5 is not
contained in this manual.
Figure 2-1 shows a tree network. Basic information of this network is as follows:
l NE1, NE2, and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 that is configured with IDU 620.
l NE4 is the OptiX RTN 600 that is configured with IDU 610.
l NE5 is the OptiX RTN 600 that is configured with IDU 605 1B.
l The E1 services need to be converged from each NE to the STM-1 optical line board at the
client side. Table 2-2 lists the service requirements.
Microwave
2-5
Figure 2-1 Networking diagram
SDH
OptiX RTN 600
(IDU 620)
NE1
OptiX RTN 600
(IDU 620)
NE2
OptiX RTN 600
(IDU 610)
NE4
NE3
OptiX RTN 600
(IDU 620)
NE5
OptiX RTN 600
(IDU 605 1B)

Table 2-2 Service requirements
Source Sink
NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE5
STM-1 optical line
board at the client
side
8xE1 8xE1 8xE1 20xE1 2xE1

In the following example, the engineering planning covers all the information required for
configuring NE1NE5.
NE Attributes
Parameter NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE5
Equipment
Type
IDU 620 IDU 620 IDU 620 IDU 610 IDU 605
NE ID 101 102 103 104 105
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Extended ID 9 (the same
as the default
value)
9 (the same
as the default
value)
9 (the same
as the default
value)
9 (the same
as the default
value)
9 (the same
as the default
value)
NE IP 129.9.0.101 129.9.0.102 129.9.0.103 129.9.0.104 129.9.0.105

Planning the Radio Link
All the ODUs adopted by the OptiX RTN 600 on the tree network work at subband A of the 15
GHz frequency band with the T/R spacing of 420 MHz, thus decreasing the types of the required
spare parts.
Figure 2-2 Planning the radio link
NE1
(IDU 620)
NE3
(IDU 620)
NE5
(IDU 605)
NE2
(IDU 620)
NE4
(IDU 610)
14930 MHz
14510 MHz
14952 MHz
14532 MHz
14967MHz
14547MHz
14930 MHz
14510 MHz
Tx Hi
Tx Low
Tx Hi
Tx Hi
Tx Low
Tx Low
Tx Hi
Tx Low
V-polarization
V-polarization
H-polarization
V-polarization

Table 2-3 Planning information of the radio link
Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4
TX High NE1 NE3 NE4 NE3
TX Low NE2 NE2 NE2 NE5
Transmit Frequency
of TX High Station
(MHz)
14930 14952 14967 14930
Microwave
2-7
Parameter Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4
Transmit Frequency
of TX High Station
(MHz)
14510 14532 14547 14510
T/R Spacing (MHz) 420 420 420 420
Radio Work Mode STM-1, 28MHz,
128QAM
16E1, 14MHz,
16QAM
22E1, 14MHz,
32QAM
2E1, 3.5MHz,
QPSK
Link Protection
Mode
1+1 1+0 1+0 1+0
Polarization
Direction
a
V (vertical
polarization)
H ((horizontal
polarization)
V (vertical
polarization)
V (vertical
polarization)
NOTE
a: Information other than the polarization direction, which is not related to the link planning is not provided in this section.

Board Configuration Information
Figure 2-3 IDU board configuration (NE1)
FAN
Slot 20
EXT Slot7
EXT Slot5
PXC Slot3
PXC Slot1
EXT Slot8
EXT Slot6
EXT Slot4
SCC Slot2
IF1A
IF1A
PO1 PXC
PXC SCC
FAN
SL1

FAN
Slot 20
EXT Slot7
EXT Slot5
PXC Slot3
PXC Slot1
EXT Slot8
EXT Slot6
EXT Slot4
SCC Slot2
IF1A
IF1A
PO1 PXC
PXC SCC
FAN
IF1A
IF1A

FAN
Slot 20
EXT Slot7
EXT Slot5
PXC Slot3
PXC Slot1
EXT Slot8
EXT Slot6
EXT Slot4
SCC Slot2
IF0A
IF1A
PO1 PXC
PXC SCC
FAN
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)

IF1A Slot4
SCC Slot2 PXC Slot1
PD1 Slot3

PF1 EOW SCC PW
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 8
IF0

NOTE
The ODU that is connected to the IF board in slot n occupies logical slot 10+n. The logical slot of the ODU is
not displayed in the board configuration diagram. In the case of the IDU 620, n ranges from 5 to 8. In the case
of the IDU 610, n is fixed to 4. In the case of the IDU 605, n can be 7 or 8.
Attributes of the IF 1+1 Protection
Table 2-4 Attributes of the IF 1+1 protection
Parameter NE1 NE2
Protection Group ID 1 1
Protection Type HSB (default value) HSB (default value)
Working Slot Slot 5 Slot 5
Protection Slot Slot 7 Slot 7
Revertive Mode Revertive (default value) Revertive (default value)
WTR Time 600s (default value) 600s (default value)
Enable Reverse Switching Enabled (default value) Enabled (default value)

Microwave
2-9
Information of IF Ports
Table 2-5 Information of IF ports (NE1 and NE2)
Parameter NE1 NE2
5-IF1A (7-IF1A) 5-IF1A (7-IF1A) 6-IF1A 8-IF1A
IF
Attri
butes
Radio Work
Mode
Work Mode: 7
Service Capacity:
STM-1
Signal Bandwidth:
28 MHz
Modulation:
128QAM
Work Mode: 7
Service Capacity:
STM-1
Signal Bandwidth:
28 MHz
Modulation:
128QAM
Work Mode: 6
Service Capacity:
16xE1
Signal Bandwidth:
14 MHz
Modulation:
16QAM
Work Mode: 10
Service Capacity:
22xE1
Signal Bandwidth:
14 MHz
Modulation:
32QAM
Radio Link ID 101 101 102 103
Wayside Enable
Status
Enabled Enabled Not supported Not supported
Wayside Input
Board
Slot 1 Slot 1 - -
ATP
C
Enable Status Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Table 2-6 Information of IF ports (NE3, NE4, and NE5)
Parameter NE3 NE4 NE5
5-IF1A 7-IF0A 5-IF1A 8-IF0
IF
Attri
butes
Radio Work
Mode
Work Mode: 6
Service Capacity:
16xE1
Signal Bandwidth:
14 MHz
Modulation:
16QAM
Work Mode: 18
Service Capacity:
2xE1
Signal Bandwidth:
3.5 MHz
Modulation:
QPSK
Work Mode: 10
Service Capacity:
22xE1
Signal Bandwidth:
14 MHz
Modulation:
32QAM
Work Mode: 18
Service Capacity:
2xE1
Signal Bandwidth:
3.5 MHz
Modulation:
QPSK
Radio Link ID 102 104 103 104
Wayside Enable
Status
Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported
Wayside Input
Board
- - - -
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
5-IF1A 7-IF0A 5-IF1A 8-IF0
ATP
C
Enable Status Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status

Information of ODU Ports
Table 2-7 Information of ODU ports (NE1 and NE2)
Parameter NE1 NE2
15-ODU (17-
ODU)
15-ODU (17-
ODU)
16-ODU 18-ODU
Radio
Frequency
Properties
Transmission
Frequency
(MHz)
14930 14510 14532 14547
T/R Spacing
(MHz)
420 420 420 420
Power
Attributes
Transmit Power
(dBm)
10 10 10 10
Equipment
Attributes (The
equipment
attributes can be
planned but
cannot be set.)
Station Type TX High TX Low TX Low TX Low

NOTE
Note: The attributes of the main and standby ODUs on NE1 and NE2 are the same.
Table 2-8 Information of ODU ports (NE3, NE4, and NE5)
15-ODU 17-ODU 15-ODU 18-ODU
Radio
Frequency
Properties
Transmission
Frequency
(MHz)
14952 14930 14967 14510
Microwave
2-11
15-ODU 17-ODU 15-ODU 18-ODU
T/R Spacing
(MHz)
420 420 420 420
Power
Attributes
Transmit Power
(dBm)
10 10 10 10
Equipment
Attributes (The
equipment
attributes can be
planned but
cannot be set.)
Station Type TX High TX High TX High TX Low

Timeslot Allocation Information
Figure 2-8 Timeslot allocation diagram
Timeslot
NE2
Station
NE3 NE5 NE1
VC12: 9-16
Links-1: NE1 - NE2 - NE3 -NE5
5-IF1A 5-IF1A 6-IF1A 5-IF1A 7-IF0A 8-IF0
VC12: 17-24
VC12:25-26
6-SL1
4-SL1
4-SL1
4-PO1:1-8
4-PO1:1-8
VC12:1-8
VC12:9-10 VC12:1-2
4-PF1:1-2
Add/Drop
Foward
VC4-1
Timeslot
NE2
Station
NE4 NE1
Links-2: NE1 - NE2 - NE4
5-IF1A 5-IF1A 8-IF1A 5-IF1A
VC12: 27-46
4-SL1 4-PD1:1-20
VC12: 1-20
VC4-1
6-SL1
Timeslot
Station
NE1
NE1
VC4-1
6-SL1
4-PO1:1-8
VC12: 9-16
VC12: 17-24
VC12:25-26
VC12: 1-8
VC12: 27-46
NOTE
On the radio links of NE3, NE4, and NE5, the E1 signals are directly mapped into the timeslots
corresponding to the PDH radio frames. Figure 2-8 considers VC-12 timeslots as an example to illustrate
how the timeslots are allocated.
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)

Figure 2-8 shows the timeslot allocation for the services between the NEs.
l E1 services of NE1:
The services are added to/dropped from ports 18 of the PO1 board in slot 4 on NE1.
The E1 services occupy VC-12 timeslots 18 on the optical line of the SL1 board in
slot 6 on NE1.
The services occupy VC-12 timeslots 916 on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot
5 on NE1 and on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE2.
The services are passed through between the IF1A board in slot 5 and the SL1 board in
slot 6 on NE1.
The services occupy VC-12 timeslots 18 on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 6
on NE2 and on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 5 on NE3.
The services are passed through between the IF1A board in slot 5 and the IF1A board
in slot 6 on NE2.
slot 6 on NE1.
The services are added to/dropped from ports 120 of the PD1 board in slot 4 on NE4.
in slot 8 on NE2.
The services occupy VC-12 timeslots 27-46 on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot
slot 6 on NE1.
The services are added to/dropped from ports 12 of the PF1 board in slot 4 on NE5.
The services occupy VC-12 timeslots 12 on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 7
on NE3 and on the radio link of the IF1A board in slot 8 on NE5.
in slot 7 on NE3.
in slot 6 on NE2.
Microwave
2-13
slot 6 on NE1.
Clock Information
Figure 2-9 Clock Synchronization Scheme
SDH
6-SL1/Internal
NE1
5-IF1A/7-IF1A/
Internal
NE2 NE4
NE3 NE5
Master clock
5-IF1A/Internal
5-IF1A/Internal 8-IF0/Internal

Table 2-9 Clock information
Cl
oc
k
So
ur
ce
First
Clock
Source
6-SL1 5-IF1A 5-IF1A 5-IF1A 8-IF0
Second
Clock
Source
Internal
Clock
Source
7-IF1A Internal
Clock
Source
Internal
Clock
Source
Internal
Clock
Source
Third
Clock
Source
- Internal
Clock
Source
- - -

Orderwire Information
Table 2-10 Orderwire information
Telephone
No.
101 102 103 104 105
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Call Waiting
Time (s)
5 5 5 5 5
Orderwire
Port
5-IF1A-1, 6-
SL1-1
5-IF1A-1, 6-
IF1A-1, 8-
IF1A-1
5-IF1A-1, 7-
SL1-1
5-IF1A-1 8-IF0
Orderwire
Occupied
Bytes
E1 E1 E1 E1 E1

This topic describes how to configure the data of NE1 based on the parameters of the service
Prerequisite
You must be logged in to the NE.
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an NE
user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.
All the required boards must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Modify the NE ID.
Set the parameters as follows:
l New ID: 101
l New Extended ID: 9
Step 2 Modify the IP address of an NE.
l IP: 129.9.0.101
Step 3 Configure IF 1+1 protection.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration
from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab.
3. Click New.
Then, the Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed. Click OK.
Microwave
2-15
Parameter Value Range Description
Protection
Group ID
1 If Protection Group ID is set to 1, it indicates the
first protection group of the NE.
Working Mode HSB In the 1+1 HSB protection mode, the equipment
provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF
board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio
link to realize the protection.
Revertive Mode Revertive l When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE
that is in the switching state releases the switching
and enables the former working channel to return
to the normal state after the WTR time (when the
former working channel is restored to normal)
expires.
l In this example, this parameter adopts the default
value.
WTR Time(s) 600 l After the working path is restored to normal and
the normal state lasts for 600s, the switching
restoration occurs.
value.
Enable Reverse
Switching
Enable l When the reverse switching conditions are met,
the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the
source end.
value.
Working Board 5-IF1A-1 In the 1+1 HSB mode, the IF boards can be installed
in slots 58. It is recommended that you install two
IF boards in a pair in slots 5 and 7 (the IF board in
slot 5 is the main board) or in slots 6 and 8 (the IF
board in slot 6 is the main board).
Protection Board 7-IF1A-1

Step 4 Configure the IF/ODU information of a radio link.
2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
3. Set the information about the 5-IF1A and 15-ODU on the radio link. After setting the
information about the 5-IF1A or 15-ODU on the radio link, click Apply.
Work Mode 7,STM-1,28MH
z,128QAM
-
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Link ID 101 l As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter
is used to prevent incorrect connection of radio
links between sites.
l In this example, the radio link ID is 101.
ATPC Enable
Status
Enabled This parameter indicates whether the ATPC
function is enabled. The ATPC function ensures
that the transmit power of the transmitter
automatically traces the changes of the receive
level at the receive end, within the ATPC
controlled range.
TX Frequency
(MHz)
14930.0 The transmit frequency needs to be set according
to the service planning.
T/R Spacing
(MHz)
420.0 In this example, the spacing between the transmit
frequency and receive frequency of the ODU is
420 MHz.
TX Power
(dBm)
10.0 The transmit power needs to be set according to
the service planning.
TX Status unmute l When TX Status is set to unmute, the ODU
receives and transmits microwave signals
normally.
l In this example, this parameter adopts the
default value.

Step 5 Configure the ATPC attributes.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the 5-IF1A and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from
the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
ATPC Enable Status Enabled This parameter indicates whether the ATPC
function is enabled. The ATPC function
ensures that the transmit power of the
transmitter automatically traces the changes of
the receive level at the receive end, within the
ATPC controlled range.
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Enabled When the function is enabled, the manually set
ATPC upper and lower thresholds are invalid.
The equipment automatically uses the preset
ATPC upper and lower thresholds based on the
working mode of the IF board.

Step 6 Create the cross-connections of point-to-point services.
Microwave
2-17
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Cross-Connection
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click New. The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters.
Then, click OK.
l Configure the cross-connections of the add/drop services as follows.
Level VC12 l In this example, VC-12 data services are
bound.
l This parameter indicates the level of the
cross-connections.
Direction Bidirectional l When Direction is set to Bidirectional,
create the cross-connections from the service
source to the service sink and from the
service sink to the service source.
default value.
Source 6-SL1 In this example, the 6-SL1 is the service source.
Source
Timeslot
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)
1-8 In this example, the timeslots to which the
service source corresponds are timeslots 1-8.
Sink 4-PO1 In this example, the 4-PO1 is the service sink.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)
service sink corresponds are timeslots 1-8.

l Configure the cross-connections of the pass-through services as follows.
bound.
cross-connections.
default value.
Source 5-IF1A In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service
source.
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Source
Timeslot
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)
Sink 6-SL1 In this example, the 6-SL1 is the service sink.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

Step 7 Configure the orderwire.
l Phone 1: 101
l Orderwire Port: 5-IF1A-1, 6-SL1-1
Step 8 Configure the clock source.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Clock > Clock Source
Priority from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed. Select the clock sources.
Then, click OK.
Clock Source 6-SL1-1 In this example, the 6-SL1-1 is the clock source.

3. Select a clock source and click or to adjust the priority level of this
clock source. Set Clock Source and Clock Source Priority Sequence(1 is the highest).
Then, click Apply.
Clock
Source
6-SL1-1 Internal
Clock Source
In this example, the 6-SL1-1 and
internal clock source are set as the
available clock sources.
Clock
Source
Priority
Sequence(1
is the
highest)
1 2 l This parameter specifies the priority
level of a clock source.
l The priority level of the 6-SL1-1
clock source is 1 and the priority level
of the internal clock source is 2.

----End
Microwave
2-19
Prerequisite
Procedure
l New ID: 102
l IP: 129.9.0.102
3. Click New.
Protection
Group ID
expires.
value.
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
restoration occurs.
value.
Enable Reverse
Switching
source end.
value.
Working Board 5-IF1A-1 In the 1+1 HSB mode, the IF boards can be installed
Protection Board 7-IF1A-1

3. Set the information about the 5-IF1A and 15-ODU on the first radio link, the information
about the 6-IF1A and 16-ODU on the second radio link, and the information about the 8-
IF1A and 18-ODU on the third radio link. Then, click Apply.
l Set the parameters of the 5-IF1A and 15-ODU as follows.
Work Mode 7,STM-1,28MH
z,128QAM
-
Link ID 101 l As the identifier of a radio link, this
parameter is used to prevent incorrect
connection of radio links between sites.
ATPC Enable
Status
controlled range.
TX Frequency
(MHz)
14510.0 The transmit frequency needs to be set
according to the service planning.
Microwave
2-21
T/R Spacing
(MHz)
420.0 In this example, the spacing between the
transmit frequency and receive frequency of the
ODU is 420 MHz.
TX Power
(dBm)
normally.
default value.

Work Mode 6,16E1,14MHz,
16QAM
-
ATPC Enable
Status
controlled range.
TX Frequency
(MHz)
T/R Spacing
(MHz)
ODU is 420 MHz.
TX Power
(dBm)
normally.
default value.

Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Work Mode 10,22E1,14MH
z,32QAM
-
ATPC Enable
Status
controlled range.
TX Frequency
(MHz)
T/R Spacing
(MHz)
ODU is 420 MHz.
TX Power
(dBm)
normally.
default value.

the Function Tree.
ATPC Enable
Status
transmitter automatically traces the changes
of the receive level at the receive end, within
the ATPC controlled range.
ATPC
Automatic
Threshold
Enable Status
Enabled When the function is enabled, the manually
set ATPC upper and lower thresholds are
invalid. The equipment automatically uses
the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds
based on the working mode of the IF board.
Microwave
2-23

3. Repeat Step 5.1 to Step 5.2 to set the ATPC parameters of the 6-IF1A and 8-IF1A to the
same values. Click Apply.
ATPC Enable
Status
ATPC
Automatic
Threshold
Enable Status

Then, click OK.
bound.
cross-connections.
default value.
source.
Source
Timeslot
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)
service sink corresponds are timeslots 18.

l Configure the cross-connections of the services that pass through NE3 as follows.
bound.
cross-connections.
default value.
source.
Source
Timeslot
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)
Sink 6-IF1A In this example, the 6-IF1A is the service sink.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

bound.
cross-connections.
default value.
Microwave
2-25
source.
Source
Timeslot
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

l Phone 1: 102
l Orderwire Port: 5-IF1A-1, 6-IF1A-1, 8-IF1A-1
Then, click OK.
Clock Source 5-IF1A-1 In this example, the 5-IF1A-1 is the clock source.
7-IF1A-1 In this example, the 7-IF1A-1 is the clock source.

Then, click Apply.
Paramet
er
Value Range Description
Clock
Source
5-IF1A-1 7-IF1A-1 Internal
Clock
Source
In this example, the 5-IF1A-1, 7-
IF1A-1, and internal clock source
are set as the available clock
sources.
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Paramet
er
Clock
Source
Priority
Sequence
(1 is the
highest)
1 2 3 l This parameter specifies the
priority level of a clock source.
l The priority level of the 5-
IF1A-1 clock source is 1. The
priority level of the 7-IF1A-1
clock source is 2. The priority
level of the internal clock
source is 3.

----End
Prerequisite
Procedure
l New ID: 103
l IP: 129.9.0.103
3. Set the information about the 5-IF1A and 15-ODU on one radio link and the information
about the 7-IF0A and 17-UDU on the other radio link. Then, click Apply.
Microwave
2-27
Work Mode 6,16E1,14MHz,
16QAM
-
ATPC Enable
Status
controlled range.
TX Frequency
(MHz)
T/R Spacing
(MHz)
ODU is 420 MHz.
TX Power
(dBm)
normally.
default value.

Work Mode 18,2E1,3.5MHz
,QPSK
-
ATPC Enable
Status
controlled range.
TX Frequency
(MHz)
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
T/R Spacing
(MHz)
ODU is 420 MHz.
TX Power
(dBm)
normally.
default value.

the Function Tree.
ATPC Enable
Status
ATPC
Automatic
Threshold
Enable Status

3. Repeat Step 4.1 to Step 4.2 to set the ATPC parameters of the 7-IF0A to the same values.
Click Apply.
ATPC Enable
Status
ATPC
Automatic
Threshold
Enable Status
Microwave
2-29

1. In the NE Explorer, select NE3 and then choose Configuration > Clock > Cross-
Connection Configuration from the Function Tree.
Then, click OK.
bound.
cross-connections.
default value.
source.
Source
Timeslot
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

bound.
cross-connections.
default value.
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
source.
Source
Timeslot
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)
service source corresponds are timeslots 9 and
10.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)
service sink corresponds are timeslots 1 and 2.

l Phone 1: 103
l Orderwire Port: 5-IF1A-1, 7-IF0A-1
Then, click OK.
Clock Source 5-IF1A-1 In this example, the 5-IF1A-1 is the clock source.

Then, click Apply.
Clock
Source
5-IF1A-1 Internal
Clock Source
In this example, the 5-IF1A-1 and
internal clock source are set as the clock
sources.
Clock
Source
Priority
Sequence(1
is the
highest)
l The priority level of the 5-IF1A-1

----End
Microwave
2-31
Prerequisite
Procedure
l New ID: 104
l IP: 129.9.0.104
Step 3 Configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link
3. Set the information about the 4-IF1A and 14-ODU on the radio link. Then, click Apply.
Work Mode 10,22E1,14MHz
,32QAM
-
ATPC Enable
Status
controlled range.
TX Frequency
(MHz)
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
T/R Spacing
(MHz)
420 MHz.
TX Power
(dBm)
normally.
default value.

the Function Tree.
ATPC Enable
Status
ATPC
Automatic
Threshold
Enable Status

1. In the NE Explorer, select NE4 and then choose Configuration > Cross- Connection
2. Click New. Then, the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. Configure the cross-
connections of the add/drop services. Click OK.
bound.
l This parameter indicates the level of the cross-
connections.
Microwave
2-33
Direction Bidirectional l When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create
the cross-connections from the service source
to the service sink and from the service sink to
the service source.
default value.
Source 4-IF1A In this example, the 4-IF1A is the service source.
Source
Timeslot Range
(e.g.1,3-6)
1-20 In this example, the timeslots to which the service
source corresponds are timeslots 120.
Sink 3-PD1 In this example, the 3-PD1 is the service sink.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)
sink corresponds are timeslots 120.

l Phone 1: 104
l Orderwire Port: 4-IF1A-1
Then, click OK.
Clock Source 4-IF1A-1 In this example, the 4-IF1A-1 is selected as the
clock source.

Then, click Apply.
Clock
Source
4-IF1A-1 Internal
Clock Source
In this example, the 4-IF1A-1 and
internal clock source are selected as the
clock sources.
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Clock
Source
Priority
Sequence(1
is the
highest)
l The priority level of the 4-IF1A-1

----End
NE5 is the OptiX RTN 600 that adopts the IDU 605. Therefore, the configuration of NE5 is not
contained in this manual.
For details, refer to the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System IDU 605 Configuration
Guide.
Microwave
2-35
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the
SDH/PDH Microwave
About This Chapter
In the case of the SDH/PDH microwave, Ethernet services are transmitted in a mode that is
similar to transmitting the Ethernet services over the SDH. Hence, you need to configure the
mapping relation between the Ethernet services and VCTRUNKs, the paths bound with the
VCTRUNKs, and the cross-connections of transmission lines.
This topic describes the configuration processes related to the Ethernet services. Before you
configure Ethernet services according to the configuration flow, complete the basic NE
configurations according to the flow for configuring SDH/PDH services based on the SDH/PDH
microwave (including the configuration of the NE management and radio links).
3.2 Configuration Example (Point-to-Point EPL Services)
entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the point-to-point EPL
service requirements.
3.3 Configuration Example (PORT-Shared EVPL Services)
entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the PORT-shared EVPL
3.4 Configuration Example (VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services)
entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the VCTRUNK-shared
EVPL service requirements.
3.5 Configuration Example (802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services)
entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the requirements for the
802.1d bridge-based EPLAN services.
3.6 Configuration Example (802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services)
3 Configuring Ethernet Services Based on the SDH/PDH
Microwave
3-1
802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services.
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
This topic describes the configuration processes related to the Ethernet services. Before you
configure Ethernet services according to the configuration flow, complete the basic NE
configurations according to the flow for configuring SDH/PDH services based on the SDH/PDH
microwave (including the configuration of the NE management and radio links).
3.1.1 Configuring Point-to-Point EPL Services
Point-to-point EPL services are Ethernet transparent transmission services. The point-to-point
EPL services are simple, and feature transparent transmission and dedicated bandwidth.
3.1.2 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL Services
The PORT-shared EVPL services are the EVPL services where the services in each VLAN of
an Ethernet port are assigned with a dedicated bandwidth. In the case of the PORT-shared EVPL
services, the client equipment needs to send data frames with VLAN tags.
3.1.3 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services
The VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services can meet the requirements of bandwidth-shared point-
to-point virtual private line services for different users.
3.1.4 Configuring QinQ-Based EVPL Services
The QinQ-based EVPL services can carry two layers of VLAN tags.
3.1.5 Configuring 802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services
A bridge is the functional unit that is used to connect two or more LANs. The services of different
802.1d bridges are isolated from each other, but the services in different VLANs of the same
802.1d bridge are not isolated from each other. The 802.1d bridge is applicable to EPLAN
services.
3.1.6 Configuring 802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services
A bridge is a functional unit that is used to connect two or more LANs. The services of different
802.1q bridges are isolated from each other and the services in different VLANs of the same
802.1q bridge are isolated from each other. The 802.1q bridge is applicable to EVPLAN services.
3.1.7 Configuring 802.1ad Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services
The 802.1ad bridge-based EVPLAN services can use two layers of VLAN tags.
3.1.1 Configuring Point-to-Point EPL Services
Point-to-point EPL services are Ethernet transparent transmission services. The point-to-point
EPL services are simple, and feature transparent transmission and dedicated bandwidth.
Ethernet transparent transmission boards or Ethernet switching boards can be used to configure
point-to-point EPL services.
Table 3-1 Flow for configuring point-to-point EPL services by using Ethernet switching boards
Procedur
e
Operation Remarks
1 Configuring external Ethernet ports Required
2 Configuring internal Ethernet ports Required
Microwave
3-3
Procedur
e
Operation Remarks
3 Creating EPL services l Required when the Ethernet
switching boards are used
l Not required when the Ethernet
transparent transmission boards are
used
4 Creating cross-connections of
Ethernet services
Required

3.1.2 Configuring PORT-Shared EVPL Services
The PORT-shared EVPL services are the EVPL services where the services in each VLAN of
an Ethernet port are assigned with a dedicated bandwidth. In the case of the PORT-shared EVPL
services, the client equipment needs to send data frames with VLAN tags.
Ethernet switching boards are required for configuring the PORT-shared EVPL services.
Table 3-2 Flow for configuring PORT-shared EVPL services
Step Operation Remarks
1 Configuring external Ethernet ports Required.
2 Configure internal Ethernet ports Required.
3 Creating Ethernet private line services Required.
4 Creating the cross-connections of Ethernet services Required.
5 Configuring the QoS Optional.
For details
about the
QoS, see the
OptiX RTN
600 Radio
Transmissio
n System
Feature
Description.

NOTE
Configuring the QoS involves creating the flow, configuring the CAR, configuring the CoS, binding the
CAR and CoS, and configuring the traffic shaping. For details about the QoS, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio
Transmission System Feature Description.
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
3.1.3 Configuring VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services
The VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services can meet the requirements of bandwidth-shared point-
to-point virtual private line services for different users.
Ethernet switching boards are required for configuring VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services.
Table 3-3 Flow for configuring VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services
3 Creating Ethernet private line services Required.
For details
about the
QoS, see the
OptiX RTN
600 Radio
Transmissio
n System
Feature
Description.

NOTE
Configuring the QoS involves creating the flow, configuring the CAR, configuring the CoS, binding the
CAR and CoS, and configuring the traffic shaping. For details about the QoS, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio
3.1.4 Configuring QinQ-Based EVPL Services
The QinQ-based EVPL services can carry two layers of VLAN tags.
For the method of configuring QinQ-based EVPL services, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio
3.1.5 Configuring 802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services
A bridge is the functional unit that is used to connect two or more LANs. The services of different
802.1d bridges are isolated from each other, but the services in different VLANs of the same
802.1d bridge are not isolated from each other. The 802.1d bridge is applicable to EPLAN
services.
Ethernet switching boards are required for configuring the 802.1d bridge-based EPLAN
services.
Microwave
3-5
Table 3-4 Flow for configuring 802.1d bridge-based EPLAN services
3 Creating Ethernet LAN services Required.
4 Modifying the mounted port of a bridge Required
when you
need to set
the port to
the Spoke
port.
6 Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature Optional.

NOTE
l Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature involves setting the MAC address table manually,
configuring the spanning tree protocol, and modifying the aging time in the multicast table. For details
about the Layer 2 switching feature, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature
Description.
l Configuring the QoS involves creating the flow, configuring the CAR, configuring the CoS, binding
the CAR and CoS, and configuring the traffic shaping. For details about the QoS, see the OptiX RTN
600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
3.1.6 Configuring 802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services
A bridge is a functional unit that is used to connect two or more LANs. The services of different
802.1q bridges are isolated from each other and the services in different VLANs of the same
802.1q bridge are isolated from each other. The 802.1q bridge is applicable to EVPLAN services.
Ethernet switching boards are required for configuring the 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN
services.
Table 3-5 Flow for configuring 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services
3 Creating Ethernet LAN services Required.
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
4 Modifying the mounted port of a bridge Required
when you
need to set
the port to
the Spoke
port.
5 Creating the VLAN filtering table Required.
7 Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature Optional.

NOTE
l Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature involves setting the MAC address table manually,
configuring the spanning tree protocol, and modifying the aging time in the multicast table. For details
about the Layer 2 switching feature, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature
Description.
3.1.7 Configuring 802.1ad Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services
The 802.1ad bridge-based EVPLAN services can use two layers of VLAN tags.
The 802.1ad bridge-based EVPLAN services are implemented based on the QinQ technology.
For details, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
3.2 Configuration Example (Point-to-Point EPL Services)
entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the point-to-point EPL
networking diagram, the network planning department can plan all the parameters that are
required for configuring the new Ethernet services of the NEs.
You can configure the Ethernet transparent transmission services of NE1 based on the parameters
Microwave
3-7
You can configure the point-to-point Ethernet private line services of NE2 based on the
parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
As shown in Figure 3-1, NE1 and NE2 adopt the OptiX RTN 600 NEs configured with the IDU
620. The new service requirements are as follows:
l The two branches of User A that are located at NE1 and NE2 need communicate with each
other over Ethernet. A 10 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.
l The two branches of User B that are located at NE1 and NE2 need communicate with each
other over Ethernet. A 20 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.
l The service of User A need be isolated from the service of User B.
l The Ethernet equipment of User A and User B provide 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports
of which the working mode is auto-negotiation, and does not support VLAN.
NE 1 NE2
User A1 User A2
User B1
User B2

In the following example, NE1 and NE2 can use Ethernet transparent transmission boards to
create point-to-point EPL services.
Slot 8 on NE1/NE2 houses the EFT4 board.
Figure 3-2 IDU board configuration
FAN
Slot 20
EXT Slot7
EXT Slot5
PXC Slot3
PXC Slot1
EXT Slot8
EXT Slot6
EXT Slot4
SCC Slot2
IF1A EFT4
IF1A
PH1 PXC
PXC SCC
FAN
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)

Ethernet Parameter Configuration
Figure 3-3 Configuring Ethernet services
PORT1
NE1:8-EFT4
PORT2
VCTRUNK1
VC4-2:VC12:1-5
VCTRUNK2
VC4-2:VC12:6-15
SDH
User A1
User B1
VCTRUNK1
VC4-2:VC12:1-5
PORT1
NE2:8-EFT4
User A2
VCTRUNK2
VC4-2:VC12:6-15
PORT2
User B2

Table 3-6 Parameters of external Ethernet ports
Parameter NE1 NE2
Board 8-EFT4 8-EFT4
Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2
Enabled/
Disabled
Working Mode Auto-
Negotiation
Auto-
Negotiation
Auto-
Negotiation
Auto-
Negotiation
Maximum
Frame Length
1522 1522 1522 1522
Flow Control Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

Table 3-7 Parameters of internal Ethernet ports
Parameter NE1 NE2
Board 8-EFT4 8-EFT4
Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2
Encapsulation
Mapping
Protocol
GFP GFP GFP GFP
LCAS Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Bound Path VC4-2:
VC12-1
VC12-5
VC4-2:
VC12-6
VC12-15
VC4-2:
VC12-1
VC12-5
VC4-2:
VC12-6
VC12-15

Microwave
3-9
Figure 3-4 Timeslot allocation of Ethernet services
Add/Drop
Timeslot
NE2
Station
NE1
VC12:17-21
1#VC4
5-IF1A-1 5-IF1A1-1
8-EFT4
VC4-2:1-5
8-EFT4
VC4-2:1-5
VC12:22-31
8-EFT4
VC4-2:6-15
8-EFT4
VC4-2:6-15

l The EPL service of User A is as follows:
Occupies VC-12 timeslots 1721 of the first VC-4 on the radio link between NE1 and
NE2.
Uses VC-12 timeslots 15 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE1 and
VC-12 timeslots 15 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/
drop services.
l The EPL service of User B is as follows:
NE2.
Uses VC-12 timeslots 615 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE1 and
drop services.
You can configure the Ethernet transparent transmission services of NE1 based on the parameters
Prerequisite
The EFT4 board must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the EFT4 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External
Port.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Port PORT1 PORT2 l The basic attributes of PORT1 and
PORT2 need to be set.
l The services of user A1 use PORT1
and the services of user B1 use
PORT2.
Enabled/
Disabled
Enabled In the case of the port that accesses
services, set this parameter to Enabled.
Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation The Ethernet equipment of users work
in auto-negotiation mode. Hence, the
Working Mode of the external ports
should be set to Auto-Negotiation.

Step 2 Configure Ethernet internal ports.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the EFT4 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select Internal
Port. Set the parameters of VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.
2. Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port.
a. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab.
b. Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters. After setting the parameters, click
Apply.
Paramete
r
Port VCTRUN
K1
VCTRU
NK2
l The mapping protocol needs to be set for
VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.
l In this example, Mapping Protocol is set to
GFP.
Mapping
Protocol
GFP

3. Configure the LCAS function of the VCTRUNKs.
a. Click the LCAS tab.
b. Set Enabling LCAS and other LCAS parameters. After setting the parameters, click
Apply.
Paramete
r
Port VCTRU
NK1
VCTRUN
K2
Enabling LCAS needs to be set for VCTRUNK1
and VCTRUNK2.
Microwave
3-11
Paramete
r
Enabling
LCAS
Enabled l In this example, the LCAS function is enabled.
l The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number
of virtual containers for mapping required
services to meet the bandwidth requirements
of the application. As a result, the bandwidth
utilization ratio is improved.

4. Set the VC paths to be bound with the VCTRUNKs.
a. Click the Bound Path tab.
b. Click Configuration. Then, the Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.
c. In Configurable Ports, select VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2 as the ports to be
configured.
d. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Service Direction of the bound paths. After
setting the parameters, click OK. Then, click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed.
Paramete
r
Configura
ble Ports
VCTRUN
K1
VCTRUN
K2
In this example, VCTRUNK1 and
VCTRUNK2 need to be bound with VC paths.
Level VC12 In this example, the bound path is at the VC-12
level.
Service
Direction
Bidirectional l If Service Direction is set to
Bidirectional, the services from the service
service sink to the service source are created.
default value.

Step 3 Create the cross-connections of Ethernet services.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration >
Cross-Connection Configuration from the Function Tree.
Then, click OK.
l Set the parameters of the cross-connections of VCTRUNK1 as follows.
Level VC12 In this example, the cross-connection is at
the VC-12 level.
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Direction Bidirectional l If Direction is set to Bidirectional, the
services from the service source to the
service sink and from the service sink to
the service source are created.
l In this example, this parameter adopts
the default value.
source.
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,36)
service source corresponds are timeslots
17-21.
Sink 8-EFT4 In this example, the 8-EFT4 is the service
sink.
Sink VC4 VC4-2 In this example, the service sink is located
in VC4-2.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,36)

Level VC12 In this example, the cross-connection is at
the VC-12 level.
service sink and from the service sink to
the service source are created.
l In this example, this parameter adopts
the default value.
source.
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,36)
service source corresponds are timeslots
22-31.
Sink 8-EFT4 In this example, the 8-EFT4 is the service
sink.
Sink VC4 VC4-2 In this example, the service sink is located
in VC4-2.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,36)
service sink corresponds are timeslots
6-15.
Microwave
3-13

----End
You can configure the point-to-point Ethernet private line services of NE2 based on the
The procedures for configuring NE2 are the same as the procedures for configuring NE1. For
details, see 3.2.3 Configuring NE1.
3.3 Configuration Example (PORT-Shared EVPL Services)
entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the PORT-shared EVPL
You can configure the PORT-shared Ethernet private line services of NE1 based on the
3.3.4 Configuring NE2 and NE3
You can configure the Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 based on the parameters of the service
As shown in Figure 3-5, NE1, NE2, and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs that are configured
with the IDU 620. 16xE1 services exist between NE1, NE2, and NE3. The new service
requirements are as follows:
l The headquarters C1 of User C are located at NE1 and the two branches of User C (C2 and
C3) are located at NE2 and NE3. The services between C1 and C2 are transmitted in the
VLAN of which the VLAN ID ranges from 100 to 110. The services between C1 and C3
are transmitted in the VLAN of which the VLAN ID ranges from 200 to 210.
l The services of C2 are isolated from the services of C3. The services of C2 and C3 require
a 20 Mbit/s bandwidth respectively.
l The Ethernet equipment of C1, C2, and C3 provide 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports of
which the working mode is auto-negotiation, and supports VLAN.
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
NE 1
NE2
VLAN100-110
VLAN200-210
NE3
User C1
User C2
User C3

In the following example, NE1 needs to use Ethernet switching boards to create PORT-shared
EVPL services. NE2 and NE3 can use Ethernet transparent transmission boards to create PORT-
shared EVPL services.
Slot 8 of NE1 houses the EMS6 board. Slot 8 on NE2/NE3 houses the EFT4 board.
FAN
Slot 20
EXT Slot7
EXT Slot5
PXC Slot3
PXC Slot1
EXT Slot8
EXT Slot6
EXT Slot4
SCC Slot2
IF1A EMS6
IF1A
PD1 PXC
PXC SCC
FAN

Figure 3-7 IDU board configuration (NE2 and NE3)
FAN
Slot 20
EXT Slot7
EXT Slot5
PXC Slot3
PXC Slot1
EXT Slot8
EXT Slot6
EXT Slot4
SCC Slot2
EFT4
IF1A
PH1 PXC
PXC SCC
FAN

Microwave
3-15
PORT1
NE1:8-EMS6
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VC4-2:VC12:11-20
VCTRUNK1
VC4-2:VC12:1-10
PORT1
NE2:8-EFT4
SDH
User C1
User C2
VC4-2:VC12:1-10
VCTRUNK1
VC4-2:VC12:1-10
PORT1
NE3:8-EFT4
User C3

Board 8-EMS6 8-EFT4 8-EFT4
Port PORT1 PORT1 PORT1
Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Working Mode Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation
Maximum Frame
Length
1522 1522 1522
Flow Control Disabled Disabled Disabled
TAG Tag Aware - -
Entry Detection Enabled - -

Encapsulation
Mapping
Protocol
GFP GFP GFP GFP
Enabling LCAS Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
TAG Tag Aware Tag Aware - -
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Entry Detection Enabled Enabled - -
Bound Path VC4-2:
VC12-1
VC12-10
VC4-2:
VC12-11
VC12-20
VC4-2:
VC12-1
VC12-10
VC4-2:
VC12-1
VC12-10

Table 3-10 Parameters of EPL services
Parameter NE1
Private Line Service 1 Private Line Service 2
Board 8-EMS
Service Type EPL
Direction Bidirectional
Source Port PORT1 PORT1
Source C-VLAN (e.g. 1,36) 100-110 200-210
Sink Port VCRTUNK1 VCTRUNK2
Sink C-VLAN (e.g. 1,36) 100-110 200-210

Add/Drop
Timeslot
NE1
Station
NE2
1#VC4
5-IF1A-1 5-IF1A1-1
NE3
7-IF1A1-1 5-IF1A1-1
VC12:17-26
8-EMS6
VC4-2:1-10
VC12:17-26
8-EFT4
VC4-2:1-10
8-EMS6
VC4-2:11-20
8-EFT4
VC4-2:1-10

l The EVPL service from C1 to C2 is as follows:
NE2.
Uses VC-12 timeslots 110 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and
drop services.
l The EVPL service from C1 to C3 is as follows:
Microwave
3-17
NE3.
Uses VC-12 timeslots 1120 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1
and VC-12 timeslots 120 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE3 to
add/drop services.
You can configure the PORT-shared Ethernet private line services of NE1 based on the
Prerequisite
The EMS6 board must be added.
Procedure
1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Port.
Port PORT1 l Set the basic attributes of PORT1.
l The services of user C1 use PORT1.
Enabled/
Disabled
Enabled In the case of the port that accesses services, set
this parameter to Enabled.
Working Mode Auto-
Negotiation
The Ethernet equipment of users work in auto-
negotiation mode. Hence, the Working Mode of
the external ports should be set to Auto-
Negotiation.

3. Click the TAG Attributes tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Port PORT1 l The tag attributes of PORT1 need to be set.
l The services of user C1 use PORT1.
TAG Tag Aware l If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the packets that
carry VLAN tags are received.
l If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the packets that
do not carry VLAN tags are discarded.
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Entry Detection Enabled In this example, the incoming packets from the
port need to be checked according to the tag
attributes.

Port. Set the parameters of VCTRUNK1 and VCTRUNK2.
Apply.
Paramete
r
Port VCTRUN
K1
VCTRU
NK2
l The encapsulation protocol needs to be set for
GFP.
Mapping
Protocol
GFP

Apply.
Paramete
r
Port VCTRU
NK1
VCTRUN
K2
and VCTRUNK2.
Enabling
LCAS

Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 TAG Attributes need to be set for
Microwave
3-19
TAG Tag Aware l If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the
packets that carry VLAN tags are
received.
l If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the
packets that do not carry VLAN tags
are discarded.
Entry
Detection
Enabled In this example, the incoming packets
from the port need to be checked
according to the tag attributes.

c. In Configurable Ports, select VCTRUNK1 as the port to be configured.
d. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths. After setting
the parameters, click OK. Then, click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed.
Paramete
r
Configura
ble Ports
VCTRUN
K1
VCTRUN
K2
level.
Service
Direction
service sink to the service source are
created.
default value.

Step 3 Create Ethernet private line services.
Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the
parameters, click OK.
l Set the parameters of the Ethernet private line services on PORT1 and VCTRUNK1 as
follows.
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Service Direction Bidirectional l If Service Direction is set to
Bidirectional, the services from the
service source to the service sink and from
the service sink to the service source are
created.
default value.
Source Port PORT1 In this example, PORT1 is the service source
port.
Source C-VLAN
(e.g. 1,3-6)
100-110 The services whose VLAN IDs range from
100 to 110 are the source services.
Sink Port VCTRUNK1 In this example, the VCTRUNK1 is the
service sink port.
Sink C-VLAN
(e.g. 1,3-6)
100 to 110 are the sink services.

follows.
created.
default value.
port.
Source C-VLAN
(e.g. 1,3-6)
200 to 210 are the source services.
Sink Port VCTRUNK2 In this example, the VCTRUNK2 is the
service sink port.
Sink C-VLAN
(e.g. 1,3-6)
200 to 210 are the sink services.

Then, click OK.
Microwave
3-21
Level VC12 In this example, the cross-connection is at the
VC-12 level.
default value.
source.
Source
Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3
6)
Sink 8-EMS6 In this example, the 8-EMS6 is the service sink.
Sink VC4 VC4-2 In this example, the service sink is located in
VC4-2.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3
6)

VC-12 level.
default value.
source.
Source
Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3
6)
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
VC4-2.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3
6)
service sink corresponds are timeslots 1120.

----End
The Ethernet services of NE2 and NE3 are point-to-point EPL services, and therefore should be
configured according to the configuration example of point-to-point EPL services. For details,
see 3.2.3 Configuring NE1.
3.4 Configuration Example (VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL
Services)
entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the VCTRUNK-shared
EVPL service requirements.
You can configure the VCTRUNK-shared Ethernet private line services of NE1 based on the
As shown in Figure 3-10, NE1 and NE2 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs configured with the IDU
620. 16xE1 services exist between NE1 and NE2. The new service requirements are as follows:
Microwave
3-23
l The two branches of User D are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with
each other.
l The two branches of User E are located at NE1 and NE2, and need to communicate with
each other.
l The services of User D need to be isolated from the services of User E. The traffic of User
D and User E, however, is supplementary to each other, and thus can share the 20 Mbit/s
bandwidth.
l The Ethernet equipment of User D and User E provide 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports
User D1
12
User D2
User E1
User E2
NE 1 NE2

In the following example, NE1 and NE2 need to use Ethernet switching boards to create
VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services.
Slot 8 on NE1/NE2 houses the EMS6 board.
FAN
Slot 20
EXT Slot7
EXT Slot5
PXC Slot3
PXC Slot1
EXT Slot8
EXT Slot6
EXT Slot4
SCC Slot2
EMS6
IF1A
PH1 PXC
PXC SCC
FAN

Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
PORT1
NE1:8-EMS6
VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
VC4-2:VC12:1-10
PORT1
NE2:8-EMS6
SDH
User D1
EPL1
VC4-2:VC12:1-10
EPL2
EPL1
EPL2
PORT2
User E1
User D2
PORT2
User E2

Parameter NE1 NE2
Board 8-EMS6 8-EMS6
Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2
Enabled/
Disabled
Working Mode Auto-
Negotiation
Auto-
Negotiation
Auto-
Negotiation
Auto-
Negotiation
Maximum
Frame Length
1522 1522 1522 1522
TAG Access Access Access Access
Entry Detection Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Default VLAN
ID
100 200 100 200
VLAN Priority 0 0 0 0

Parameter NE1 NE2
Board 8-EMS6 8-EMS6
Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
Encapsulation Mapping
Protocol
GFP GFP
Enabling LCAS Enabled Enabled
Microwave
3-25
Parameter NE1 NE2
TAG Tag Aware Tag Aware
Entry Detection Enabled Enabled
Bound Path VC4-2: VC12-1VC12-10 VC4-2: VC12-1VC12-10

Table 3-13 Parameters of EPL services
Parameter NE1 NE2
EPL Service 1 EPL Service 2 EPL Service 1 EPL Service 2
Board 8-EMS 8-EMS
Service Type EPL EPL
Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional
Source Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2
Source C-
VLAN (e.g.
1,36)
100 200 100 200
Sink Port VCRTUNK1 VCRTUNK1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2
Sink C-VLAN
(e.g. 1,36)
100 200 100 200

Add/Drop
Timeslot
NE2
Station
NE1
VC12:17-26
1#VC4
5-IF1A-1
5-IF1A1-1
8-EMS6
VC4-2:1-10
8-EMS6
VC4-2:1-10

l The VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services of User D and User E occupy VC-12 timeslots 17
26 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE2.
l VC-12 timeslots 110 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE1 and VC-12
timeslots 110 in the second VC-4 of the EMS6 board in slot 8 of NE2 are used to add/
drop the services.
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Prerequisite
Procedure
Port.
l The services of user D1 use PORT1
and the services of user E1 use
PORT2.
Enabled/
Disabled
Working
Mode

Port PORT1 PORT2 l The tag attributes of PORT1 and
l The services of user D1 use PORT1
and the services of user E1 use
PORT2.
TAG Access If TAG is set to Access:
l The packets that carry VLAN tags are
discarded.
l The packets that do not carry VLAN
tags are tagged with Default VLAN
ID and are then received.
Microwave
3-27
Default
VLAN ID
100 200 l In this example, Default VLAN ID
is set to 100 for PORT1.
l In this example, Default VLAN ID
Entry
Detection

Port.
Apply.
Parameter Value
Range
Description
Port VCTRUNK
1
l The encapsulation protocol of VCTRUNK1 needs to
be set.
l In this example, Mapping Protocol is set to GPF.
Mapping
Protocol
GFP

3. Configure the LCAS function of the VCTRUNK.
Apply.
Parameter Value
Range
Description
Port VCTRUN
K1
In this example, Enabling LCAS needs to be set for
VCTRUNK1.
Enabling
LCAS
l The LCAS can dynamically adjust the number of virtual
containers for mapping required services to meet the
bandwidth requirements of the application. As a result,
the bandwidth utilization ratio is improved.

Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Port VCTRUNK1 The tag attributes of VCTRUNK1 need to be set.
TAG Tag Aware l If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the packets that
carry VLAN tags are received.
l If TAG is set to Tag Aware, the packets that
do not carry VLAN tags are discarded.
Entry Detection Enabled In this example, the incoming packets from the
attributes.

c. In Configurable Ports, select VCTRUNK1 as the port to be bound.
Paramete
r
Configura
ble Ports
VCTRUNK1 In this example, VCTRUNK1 needs to be
bound with VC paths.
level.
Service
Direction
created.
default value.

Step 3 Create Ethernet private line services.
2. Click New. The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the
follows.
Microwave
3-29
created.
default value.
port.
Source C-VLAN
(e.g. 1,3-6)
100 The service that has the VLAN ID of 100 is
the source service.
Sink Port VCTRUNK1 In this example, VCTRUNK1 is the service
sink port.
Sink C-VLAN
(e.g. 1,3-6)
the sink service.

follows.
created.
default value.
port.
Source C-VLAN
(e.g. 1,3-6)
the source service.
Sink Port VCTRUNK1 In this example, VCTRUNK1 is the service
sink port.
Sink C-VLAN
(e.g. 1,3-6)
the sink service.

2. Click New.
Then, the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. Click OK.
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Level VC12 In this example, the cross-connection is at the VC-12
level.
Direction Bidirectional l When Direction is set to Bidirectional, create the
cross-connections from the service source to the
service sink and from the service sink to the
service source.
value.
Source 5-IF1A In this example, the 5-IF1A is the service source.
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3
6)
source corresponds are timeslots 17-26.
Sink VC4 VC4-2 In this example, the service sink is located in VC4-2.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3
6)
sink corresponds are timeslots 1-10.

----End
The procedures for configuring NE2 are the same as the procedures for configuring NE1. For
details, see 3.4.3 Configuring NE1.
3.5 Configuration Example (802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN
Services)
802.1d bridge-based EPLAN services.
Microwave
3-31
You can configure the transparent bridge-based Ethernet LAN services of NE1 based on the
l The three branches of User F, which are F1, F2, and F3, are located at NE1, NE2, and NE3.
F1 need communicate with F2 and F3, and thus a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth is required.
Communication is not required between F2 and F3.
l The Ethernet equipment of User F provides 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports, of which
the working mode is auto-negotiation, and supports VLAN. The VLAN ID and the number
of the VLANs are unknown and may be changed.
NE 1
NE3
User F2
User F1
User F3
NE2

In the following example, the 802.1q VB is used to implement EPLAN services of which the
user VLAN is not defined. NE1 needs to be configured with Ethernet switching boards. NE2
and NE3 need to be configured with Ethernet transparent transmission boards.
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
FAN
Slot 20
EXT Slot7
EXT Slot5
PXC Slot3
PXC Slot1
EXT Slot8
EXT Slot6
EXT Slot4
SCC Slot2
IF1A EMS6
IF1A
PD1 PXC
PXC SCC
FAN

FAN
Slot 20
EXT Slot7
EXT Slot5
PXC Slot3
PXC Slot1
EXT Slot8
EXT Slot6
EXT Slot4
SCC Slot2
EFT4
IF1A
PH1 PXC
PXC SCC
FAN

PORT1
NE1:8-EMS6
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VC4-2:VC12:6-10
SDH
User F1
VB1
VC4-2:VC12:1-5
VCTRUNK1
VC4-2:VC12:1-5
PORT1
NE2:8-EFT4
User F2
VCTRUNK1
VC4-2:VC12:1-5
PORT1
NE3:8-EFT4
User F3

Port PORT1 PORT1 PORT1
Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Microwave
3-33
Working Mode Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation
Maximum Frame
Length
1522 1522 1522
Flow Control Disabled Disabled Disabled
Entry Detection Disabled - -

Encapsulation
Mapping
Protocol
GFP GFP GFP GFP
Enabling LCAS Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Entry Detection Disabled Disabled - -
Bound Path VC4-2:
VC12-1
VC12-5
VC4-2:
VC12-6
VC12-10
VC4-2:
VC12-1
VC12-5
VC4-2:
VC12-1
VC12-5

Table 3-16 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services
Parameter Ethernet LAN services of NE1
Board 8-EMS
VB Name VB1
VB Type 802.1d
Bridge Switch Mode IVL/Ingress Filter Enable
VB Mount Port PORT1, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2
Hub/Spoke PORT1 Hub
VCTRUNK1 Spoke
VCTRUNK2 Spoke

Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
8-EMS6
VC4-2:6-15
Add/Drop
Timeslot
NE1
Station
NE2
1#VC4
5-IF1A-1 5-IF1A1-1
NE3
7-IF1A1-1 5-IF1A1-1
VC12:17-21
8-EMS6
VC4-2:1-5
VC12:17-21
8-EFT4
VC4-2:1-5
8-EMS6
VC4-2:6-10
8-EFT4
VC4-2:1-5

l The Ethernet LAN service of User F occupies VC-12 timeslots 1721 in the first VC-4 on
the radio link from NE1 to NE2 and VC-12 timeslots 1721 in the first VC-4 on the radio
link from NE1 to NE3.
timeslots 15 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE2 to add/drop the Ethernet
LAN service from NE1 to NE2.
timeslots 15 in the second VC-4 of the EFT4 board in slot 8 of NE3 to add/drop the Ethernet
LAN service from NE1 to NE3.
You can configure the transparent bridge-based Ethernet LAN services of NE1 based on the
Prerequisite
Procedure
Port.
Port PORT1 l The basic attributes of PORT1 need to be set.
l The services of user F1 use PORT1.
Microwave
3-35
Enabled/
Disabled
Working Mode Auto-
Negotiation
The Ethernet equipment of users work in auto-
negotiation mode. Hence, the Working Mode of
the external ports should be set to Auto-
Negotiation.

Port PORT1 l The tag attributes of PORT1 need to be set.
l The services of user F1 use PORT1.
Entry Detection Disabled If Entry Detection is set to Disabled, the VLAN
IDs of the packets are not checked.

Port. Set the parameters of VCTRCUNK1 and VCTRCUNK2.
Apply.
Paramete
r
Port VCTRUN
K1
VCTRU
NK2
l The encapsulation protocol needs to be set for
GFP.
Mapping
Protocol
GFP

Apply.
Paramete
r
Port VCTRU
NK1
VCTRUN
K2
and VCTRUNK2.
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Paramete
r
Enabling
LCAS

Port VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK2 TAG Attributes need to be set for
Entry
Detection
Disabled If Entry Detection is set to Disabled,
the VLAN IDs of the packets are not
checked.

Paramete
r
Configura
ble Ports
VCTRUN
K1
VCTRUN
K2
level.
Service
Direction
created.
default value.

Step 3 Create Ethernet LAN services.
Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters
as follows.
Microwave
3-37
VB Name VB1 In this example, VB Name is set to VB1.
VB Type 802.1d In this example, an IEEE 802.1d bridge is created.
Bridge Switch
Mode
SVL/Ingress
Filter Disable
(802.1d)
In this example, a transparent bridge is created,
and the VLAN IDs of the packets over each port
need not be checked.

3. Click Configure Mount. The Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed. After
setting the parameters, click OK.
selected
forwarding
ports
PORT1,
VCTRUNK1,
VCTRUNK2
PORT1, VCTRUNK1, and VCTRUNK2 are
connected to the bridge.

4. Click OK.
Step 4 Modify the mounted port of bridge.
2. Select the created bridge. Click the Service Mount tab. After setting the parameters, click
Apply.
Paramet
er
Mount
Port
PORT1 VCTRUN
K1
VCTRUN
K2
l Select PORT1, VCTRUNK1,
and VCTRUNK2 as the mount
ports.
l Only the port that is selected as
Mount Port of a bridge
functions in the packet
forwarding process of the
bridge.
Hub/
Spoke
Hub Spoke Spoke The Spoke ports cannot access
each other. The Hub port and the
Spoke port can access each other.
The Hub ports can access each
other.

Then, click OK.
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
VC-12 level.
default value.
source.
Source
Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3
6)
VC4-2.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3
6)

VC-12 level.
default value.
source.
Source
Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3
6)
Microwave
3-39
VC4-2.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3
6)

----End
The Ethernet service of NE2/NE3 is a point-to-point EPL service, and therefore should be
3.6 Configuration Example (802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN
Services)
802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services.
You can configure the 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services of NE1 based on the parameters
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
l The three branches of User G are located at NE1, NE2, and NE3 respectively, need form
a LAN, and share a 10 Mbit/s bandwidth.
l The three branches of User H are located at NE1, NE2, and NE3 respectively, need form
a LAN, and share a 20 Mbit/s bandwidth.
l The service of User G need be isolated from the service of User H.
l The Ethernet equipment of User G and User H provide 100 Mbit/s Ethernet electrical ports
NE 1
NE3
User G2
User G1
User G3
User H1
User H2
User H3
NE2

In the following example, NE1 needs to use Ethernet switching boards to create Ethernet LAN
services. NE2 and NE3 can use Ethernet transparent transmission boards to create Ethernet LAN
services.
FAN
Slot 20
EXT Slot7
EXT Slot5
PXC Slot3
PXC Slot1
EXT Slot8
EXT Slot6
EXT Slot4
SCC Slot2
IF1A EMS6
IF1A
PD1 PXC
PXC SCC
FAN
Microwave
3-41

FAN
Slot 20
EXT Slot7
EXT Slot5
PXC Slot3
PXC Slot1
EXT Slot8
EXT Slot6
EXT Slot4
SCC Slot2
EFT4
IF1A
PH1 PXC
PXC SCC
FAN

Configuring Ethernet Services
Based on the networking diagram, you can plan the configuration diagram and parameters of
the Ethernet services on the two VLANs that are implemented by using the 802.1q network
bridge.
PORT1
NE1:8-EMS6
VB1
VLAN 100
VLAN 200
PORT2
VCTRUNK1
VC4-2:VC12:1-5
VCTRUNK2
VC4-2:VC12:6-10
VCTRUNK3
VC4-2:VC12:11-20
VCTRUNK4
VC4-2:VC12:21-30
SDH
User G1
User H1
VCTRUNK1
VC4-2:VC12:1-5
PORT1
NE2:8-EFT4
User G2
VCTRUNK2
VC4-2:VC12:6-15
PORT2
User H2
VCTRUNK1
VC4-2:VC12:1-5
PORT1
NE3:8-EFT4
User G3
VCTRUNK2
VC4-2:VC12:6-15
PORT2
User H3

Paramete
r
NE1 NE2 NE3
Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2
Enabled/
Disabled
Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Paramete
r
NE1 NE2 NE3
Working
Mode
Auto-
Negotiatio
n
Auto-
Negotiatio
n
Auto-
Negotiatio
n
Auto-
Negotiatio
n
Auto-
Negotiatio
n
Auto-
Negotiatio
n
Maximum
Frame
Length
1522 1522 1522 1522 1522 1522
Flow
Control
Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
TAG Access Access - - - -
Entry
Detection
Enabled Enabled - - - -
Default
VLAN ID
100 200 - - - -
VLAN
Priority
0 0 - - - -

Param
eter
NE1 NE2 NE3
Port VCTR
UNK1
VCTR
UNK2
VCTR
UNK3
VCTR
UNK4
VCTR
UNK1
VCTR
UNK2
VCTR
UNK1
VCTR
UNK2
Encaps
ulation
Mappin
g
Protoco
l
GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP GFP
Enablin
g
LCAS
Enable
d
Enable
d
Enable
d
Enable
d
Enable
d
Enable
d
Enable
d
Enable
d
TAG Access Access Access Access - - - -
Entry
Detecti
on
Enable
d
Enable
d
Enable
d
Enable
d
- - - -
Microwave
3-43
Param
eter
NE1 NE2 NE3
Default
VLAN
ID
100 100 200 200 - - - -
VLAN
Priority
0 0 0 0 - - - -
Bound
Path
VC4-2:
VC12-
1
VC12-
5
VC4-2:
VC12-
6
VC12-
10
VC4-2:
VC12-
11
VC12-
20
VC4-2:
VC12-
21
VC12-
30
VC4-2:
VC12-
1
VC12-
5
VC4-2:
VC12-
6
VC12-
15
VC4-2:
VC12-
1
VC12-
5
VC4-2:
VC12-
6
VC12-
15

Table 3-19 Parameters of Ethernet LAN services
Parameter Ethernet LAN services of NE1
Board 8-EMS
VB Name VB1
VB Type 802.1q
Bridge Switch Mode IVL/Ingress Filter Enable
Mount Port PORT1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3,
VCTRUNK4
VLAN
Filtering
Table
Filtering
Table
VLAN Filtering Table 1 VLAN Filtering Table 2
VLAN ID 100 200
Forwarding
Port
PORT1, VCTRUNK1,
VCTRUNK2
PORT2, VCTRUNK3,
VCTRUNK4

Add/Drop
Timeslot
NE1
Station
NE2
VC12:17-21
1#VC4
5-IF1A-1 5-IF1A1-1
8-EMS6
VC4-2:1-5
NE3
7-IF1A1-1 5-IF1A1-1
VC12:17-21
8-EFT4
VC4-2:1-5
8-EMS6
VC4-2:6-10
VC12:22-31
8-EMS6
VC4-2:11-20
VC12:22-31
8-EFT4
VC4-2:6-15
8-EMS6
VC4-2:21-30
8-EFT4
VC4-2:6-15
8-EFT4
VC4-2:1-5
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)

l The Ethernet LAN service of User G:
Occupies VC-12 timeslots 1721 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE2
and VC-12 timeslots 1721 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE3.
drop services between NE1 and NE2.
drop services between NE1 and NE3.
l The Ethernet LAN service of User H:
Occupies VC-12 timeslots 2231 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE2
and VC-12 timeslots 2231 in the first VC-4 on the radio link from NE1 to NE3.
add/drop services between NE1 and NE2.
add/drop services between NE1 and NE3.
You can configure the 802.1q bridge-based EVPLAN services of NE1 based on the parameters
Prerequisite
Procedure
Port.
l The services of user G1 use PORT1
and the services of user H1 use
PORT2.
Enabled/
Disabled
Microwave
3-45
Working
Mode

Port PORT1 PORT2 l The tag attributes of PORT1 and
l The services of user G1 use PORT1
and the services of user H1 use
PORT2.
TAG Access l If TAG is set to Access, the packets
that carry VLAN tags are discarded.
l If TAG is set to Access, the packets
that do not carry VLAN tags are
tagged with Default VLAN ID and
are then received.
Default
VLAN ID
100 200 l In this example, Default VLAN ID
l In this example, Default VLAN ID
Entry
Detection

Port.
Apply.
Param
eter
Port VCTRU
NK1
VCTRU
NK2
VCTR
UNK3
VCTRU
NK4
l The encapsulation protocol
needs to be set for
VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2,
VCTRUNK3, and
VCTRUNK4.
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Param
eter
Mappi
ng
Protoc
ol
GFP
l In this example, Mapping
Protocol is set to GFP.

Apply.
Param
eter
Port VCTRU
NK1
VCTRU
NK2
VCTR
UNK3
VCTRU
NK4
Enabling LCAS needs to be set
for VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2,
VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4.
Enabli
ng
LCAS
Enabled l In this example, the LCAS
function is enabled.
l The LCAS can dynamically
adjust the number of virtual
containers for mapping
required services to meet the
bandwidth requirements of
the application. As a result,
the bandwidth utilization ratio
is improved.

Param
eter
Port VCTRU
NK1
VCTRU
NK2
VCTR
UNK3
VCTRU
NK4
TAG Attributes need to be set
for VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2,
VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4.
TAG Access l If TAG is set to Access, the
packets that carry VLAN tags
are discarded.
l If TAG is set to Access, the
packets that do not carry
VLAN tags are tagged with
Default VLAN ID and
VLAN Priority and are then
received.
Microwave
3-47
Param
eter
Entry
Detecti
on
Enabled In this example, the incoming
packets from the port need to be
checked according to the tag
attributes.

Param
eter
Config
urable
Ports
VCTRU
NK1
VCTRU
NK2
VCTR
UNK3
VCTRU
NK4
In this example, VCTRUNK1,
VCTRUNK2, VCTRUNK3, and
VCTRUNK4 are used to bind
VC paths.
Level VC12 In this example, the bound path
is at the VC-12 level.
Service
Directi
on
Bidirectional, the services
from the service source to the
service sink and from the
service sink to the service
source are created.
l In this example, this
parameter adopts the default
value.
Availa
ble
Resour
ces
VC4-2 In this example, VC4-2 is the
available resource.
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Param
eter
Availa
ble
Timesl
ots
VC12-1
to
VC12-5
VC12-6
to
VC12-1
0
VC12-
11 to
VC12-
20
VC12-2
1 to
VC12-3
0
l VCTRUNK1 is bound with
timeslots VC12-1 to VC12-5.
timeslots VC12-6 to
VC12-10.
timeslots VC12-11 to
VC12-20.
timeslots VC12-21 to
VC12-30.

Step 3 Create Ethernet LAN services.
2. Click New. The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters
as follows.
VB Name VB1 In this example, VB Name is set to VB1.
VB Type 802.1q In this example, an IEEE 802.1q bridge is created.
Bridge Switch
Mode
IVL/Ingress
Filter Enable
(802.1q)
If the ingress filter is enabled, the VLAN tags are
checked at the ingress port. If the VLAN ID does
not equal the VLAN ID of the port defined in the
VLAN filtering table, the packet is discarded.

3. Click Configure Mount. The Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed. After
setting the parameters, click OK.
selected
forwarding
ports
PORT1, PORT2,
VCTRUNK1,
VCTRUNK2,
VCTRUNK3,
VCTRUNK4
PORT1, PORT2, VCTRUNK1, VCTRUNK2,
VCTRUNK3, and VCTRUNK4 are connected
to the bridge.

4. Click OK.
Step 4 Create a VLAN filtering table.
2. Select the created bridge. Click the VLAN Filtering tab. After setting the parameters, click
OK.
Microwave
3-49
Set the parameters of VLAN filtering table 1 as follows.
VLAN ID(e.g:
1,3-6)
100 -
selected
forwarding
ports
PORT1,
VCTRUNK1,
VCTRUNK2

Set the parameters of VLAN filtering table 2 as follows.
VLAN ID(e.g:
1,3-6)
200 -
selected
forwarding
ports
PORT2,
VCTRUNK3,
VCTRUNK4

2. Click New. Then, the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. After setting the
VC-12 level.
default value.
source.
Source
Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3
6)
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
VC4-2.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3
6)

VC-12 level.
default value.
source.
Source
Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3
6)
VC4-2.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3
6)

VC-12 level.
default value.
Microwave
3-51
source.
Source
Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3
6)
VC4-2.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3
6)

VC-12 level.
default value.
source.
Source
Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3
6)
VC4-2.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3
6)

----End
Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
The Ethernet service of NE2/NE3 is a point-to-point EPL service, and therefore should be
Microwave
3-53
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid
Microwave
About This Chapter
The Hybrid microwave that the OptiX RTN 600 supports can transmit E1 services and Ethernet
services at the same time. When E1 services are transmitted over the Hybrid microwave, you
need to create the cross-connections. When Ethernet services are transmitted over the Hybrid
microwave, you need not configure the encapsulation and mapping in the VCTRUNKs or the
cross-connections between the VCTRUNKs and line timeslots.
4.1 Configuration Flows
The Hybrid microwave supports the transmission of E1 and Ethernet services. Configuring the
services based on the Hybrid microwave involves configuring the microwave services and
configuring the accessed Ethernet services. The Ethernet services are accessed through the
Ethernet board EMS6 and then transparently transmitted to the Hybrid IF board IFH2, or are
accessed directly through the GE port of the Hybrid IF board IFH2.
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and how to configure
the NE parameters according to the requirements for the services based on the Hybrid
microwave.
IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) 4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
4-1
4.1 Configuration Flows
The Hybrid microwave supports the transmission of E1 and Ethernet services. Configuring the
services based on the Hybrid microwave involves configuring the microwave services and
configuring the accessed Ethernet services. The Ethernet services are accessed through the
Ethernet board EMS6 and then transparently transmitted to the Hybrid IF board IFH2, or are
accessed directly through the GE port of the Hybrid IF board IFH2.
4.1.1 Configuration Flow (Microwave Services)
Configuring microwave services involves configuring the basic information of the OptiX RTN
NE, including the NE attributes and radio links.
4.1.2 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)
The Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board are processed and then
transmitted to the IFH2 board.
4.1.3 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board)
The Ethernet services that are accessed through the IFH2 board are scheduled according the
CoS.
4.1.1 Configuration Flow (Microwave Services)
Configuring microwave services involves configuring the basic information of the OptiX RTN
NE, including the NE attributes and radio links.
Table 4-1 Configuring services based on the Hybrid microwave
1 Managing NEs Creating an NE Required.
Logging in to an NE Required.
Modifying the NE ID Required.
Modifying the IP address of an
NE
Optional.
Configuring logical boards Required.
Synchronizing the NE time Required.
2 Configuring
radio links
Configuring IF 1+1 protection Required when the 1+1
HSB/FD/SD is
configured.
For details about the 1+1
HSB/FD/SD, see the
OptiX RTN 600 Radio
Transmission System
Required.
4 Configuring Services Based on the Hybrid Microwave
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Setting the Hybrid/AM attribute For details about the
Hybrid microwave, see
the OptiX RTN 600 Radio
Transmission System
Setting the ATPC attributes Required when you set the
ATPC threshold
manually.
ATPC, see the OptiX RTN
System Feature
Description.
Setting the parameters of IF
interfaces
Optional when you adjust
the ATPC threshold.
Setting the parameters of ODU
interfaces
Optional.
3 Configuring
MSP
Configuring ring MSP Required when you
configure a two-fiber
bidirectional MSP ring.
For details about the two-
fiber bidirectional MSP
ring, see the OptiX RTN
System Feature
Description.
Configuring linear MSP Required when you
configure the 1+1 or 1:N
linear MSP.
For details about the linear
MSP, see the OptiX RTN
System Feature
Description.
4 Creating the
cross-
connections of
services
point-to-point services
Required when non-
SNCP services are
configured.
SNCP services
Required when you
configure the SNCP.
SNCP, see the OptiX RTN
System Feature
Description.
4-3
5 Configuring the
clock
Configuring the clock source Required (except when
only the internal clock
source is used).
Configuring protection for the
clock source
Required when the SSM
or extended SSM clock
protection is configured.
Changing the parameter values
of the external clock output
Required when you set the
output external clock to
the 2 MHz mode or set the
threshold.
Customizing the clock
parameters
Optional.
6 Configuring the
orderwire
Configuring the orderwire Required.
7 Setting the
parameters of
various
interfaces
Setting the parameters of SDH
interfaces
Optional.
Setting the parameters of PDH
interfaces
Required when you
configure the T3 services.
8 Configuring the
overhead bytes
Configuring the 1588 overhead Required when the Packet
microwave equipment is
installed at the opposite
end.
Configuring the RSOHs Required when the
J0_MM alarm is
generated on the local or
remote equipment.
Configuring the VC-4 POHs Required when the TIM or
SLM alarm is generated
on the local or remote
equipment.
9 Customizing the
alarm
management
scheme
Customizing the alarm
management scheme
Optional.

4.1.2 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the
EMS6 Board)
The Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board are processed and then
transmitted to the IFH2 board.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Table 4-2 Flow for configuring the Ethernet services accessed through the EMS6 board
1 Configuring
the Ethernet
port of the
IFH2 board
Configuring the
external port of an
Ethernet board
Required.
This task is performed to configure the
Ethernet port of the IFH2 board so that the
IFH2 board can interconnect with the EMS6
board through this Ethernet port.
The IFH2 board provides the GE port for
accessing Ethernet services. The procedure
for configuring the Ethernet port of the IFH2
board is similar to the procedure for
configuring the external Ethernet port. The
IFH2 board, however, supports the
configuration of only the basic attributes and
flow control function.
2 Configuring
the Ethernet
services of the
EMS6 board
Configuring the
external port of an
Ethernet board
Required.
l This task is performed to configure the
Ethernet port of the EMS6 board that is
used to access the user services.
l This task is performed to configure the
Ethernet port of the EMS6 board so that the
EMS6 board can interconnect with the
IFH2 board through this Ethernet port.
Creating Ethernet
private line
services
Required when you need to configure
Ethernet private line services.
Creating Ethernet
LAN services
Required when you need to configure
Ethernet LAN services.
Modifying the
mounted port of a
bridge
Required when you need to set Hub/Spoke
Attribute to Spoke, thus isolating the
communication between different ports.
Creating the
VLAN filtering
table
Required when you need to create the 802.1q
bridge.
Configuring the
Layer 2 switching
feature
Optional.
Configuring the
QoS
Optional.
4-5
3 Configuring
the 1+1
protection for
the Ethernet
services in the
Hybrid
microwave
Creating a link
aggregation
group
Required when the Hybrid microwave uses
the IF 1+1 protection.

NOTE
l The procedure for configuring the Ethernet services of the EMS6 board (described in Step 2) is similar
to the procedure for configuring the Ethernet services based on the SDH/PDH microwave. In both the
configuration scenarios, you need not configure the Ethernet cross-connections. The only difference
is that you need to configure the external port during the configuration of the Ethernet services of the
EMS6 board, but you need to configure the internal port (VCTRUNK) during the configuration of the
Ethernet services based on the SDH/PDH microwave.
l The configurations in Step 2 do not include the configuration of QinQ-based EVPL services and the
configuration of 802.1ad bridge-based EVPLAN services. For details about the QinQ, see the OptiX
RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
l Configuring the Layer 2 switching feature involves setting the entries of the MAC address table
manually, configuring the spanning tree protocol, and modifying the aging time in the multicast table.
For details about the Layer 2 switching feature, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
l For details about the link aggregation group, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System
4.1.3 Configuration Flow (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the
IFH2 Board)
The Ethernet services that are accessed through the IFH2 board are scheduled according the
CoS.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Table 4-3 Flow for configuring the Ethernet services accessed through the IFH2 board
1 Configuring the external Ethernet
port of an Ethernet board
Required.
This task is performed to configure the
Ethernet port of the IFH2 board that is used
to access the user services.
The IFH2 board provides the GE port for
accessing Ethernet services. The procedure
for configuring the Ethernet port of the IFH2
board is similar to the procedure for
configuring the external Ethernet port. The
IFH2 board, however, supports the
configuration of only the basic attributes and
flow control function.
2 Configuring the CoS Optional.

NOTE
For details about the CoS, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the service parameters and how to configure
the NE parameters according to the requirements for the services based on the Hybrid
microwave.
4.2.2 Service Planning (Microwave Services)
4.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)
4.2.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board)
4.2.5 Configuring NE1 (Microwave Services)
4-7
You can configure the microwave service data of NE1 based on the parameters of the service
4.2.6 Configuring NE1 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)
You can configure the Ethernet services that are accessed through the EMS6 board of NE1 based
on the parameters of the service planning, by using the NMS.
4.2.8 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the EMS6 Board)
4.2.9 Configuring NE2 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the IFH2 Board)
You can configure the attributes and CoS of the Ethernet ports of the IFH2 board based on the
parameters of the engineering plan so that Ethernet services can be accessed to the IFH2 board
normally, thus meeting the requirement for CoS scheduling.
You can configure the data of NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using
the NMS.
In the network shown in Figure 4-1, NE1 and NE2 use the IDU 620 and NE3 uses the IDU 605.
The service requirements are as follows:
l The Ethernet equipment of user A, user B, and user C provides 100 Mbit/s auto-negotiative
Ethernet electrical interfaces. The Ethernet equipment of user A does not support VLAN
tags. The services of user A are frames that do not carry VLAN tags, namely, untagged
framed. The Ethernet equipment of user B and user C supports VLAN tags. Hence, the
services of user B and user C are frames that carry VLAN tags, namely, tagged frames.
l User A has two branches (user A1 and user A2), which are located at NE1 and NE2. There
are 4xE1 services and Ethernet services between the two branches. The Ethernet services
are Internet services, whose maximum bandwidth is 10 Mbit/s. The bandwidth of the
Internet services can be allocated flexibly. After the user services are accessed, the default
VLAN ID of 300 is added to the services.
l User B has two branches (user B1 and B2), which are located at NE1 and NE2. There are
2xE1 services and Ethernet services between the two branches. One part of the Ethernet
services are voice over IP (VoIP) services, whose maximum bandwidth is 4 Mbit/s. The
transmission of the VoIP services must be stable. The VLAN ID is 100. The other part of
the Ethernet services are Internet services, whose maximum bandwidth is 20 Mbit/s. The
bandwidth of the Internet services can be allocated flexibly. The VLAN ID is 200.
l The radio link between NE1 and NE2 uses the 1+1 HSB configuration.
l User C has two branches, which are located at NE2 and NE3. There are 4xE1 services and
Ethernet services between the two branches. One part of the Ethernet services are VoIP
services, whose maximum bandwidth is 4 Mbit/s. The transmission of the VoIP services
must be stable and the VLAN priority level is 7. The other part of the Ethernet services are
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Internet services, whose maximum bandwidth is 20 Mbit/s. The bandwidth of the Internet
services can be allocated flexibly and the VLAN priority level is 1.
NE2
(IDU 620)
User A1
User A2
User B1
User B2
User C2
User C1
NE3
(IDU 605 1F)
NE1
(IDU 620)

4.2.2 Service Planning (Microwave Services)
The engineering planning information includes all the information that is required for
configuring the microwave services on NE1, NE2, and NE3.
NE Attributes
Equipment Type IDU 620 IDU 620 IDU 605 1F
NE ID 101 102 103
Extended ID 9 (default value) 9 (default value) 9 (default value)
NE IP 129.9.0.101 129.9.0.102 129.9.0.103

Planning a Radio Link
As described in the engineering requirements, there are two Hybrid radio links, which are the
radio link between NE1 and NE2 and the radio link between NE2 and NE3. Figure 4-2 shows
the link planning information.
4-9
Figure 4-2 Link planning diagram
NE1
(IDU 620)
NE3
(IDU 605 1F)
NE2
(IDU 620)
14930 MHz
14510 MHz
14952 MHz
14532 MHz
Tx Hi
Tx Low
Tx Hi
Tx Low
H-polarization
V-polarization

NOTE
NE1, NE2, and NE3 use the ODUs that operate on sub-band A of the 15 GHz frequency band with a T/R
spacing of 420 MHz. Hence, fewer types of spare parts are required.
In addition, the networking diagram shows the capacity information of the two Hybrid radio
links, as listed in Table 4-4.
Table 4-4 Link capacity
Radio Link Number of
E1 Services
Capacity of
E1 Services
(Mbit/s)
Assured
Ethernet Service
Capacity (Mbit/
s)
Maximum
Ethernet Service
Capacity (Mbit/s)
Link between
NE1 and NE2
6 12 4 34
Link between
NE2 and NE3
4 8 4 24

The Hybrid radio link can be planned properly according to the previous information and the
actual engineering requirements. Table 4-5 provides the planning information of the Hybrid
radio link in this example.
Table 4-5 Information for planning a radio link
Parameter Link 1 Link 2
TX High Station NE1 NE3
TX Low Station NE2 NE2
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameter Link 1 Link 2
TX Frequency at the TX High
Station (MHz)
14930 14952
TX Frequency at the TX Low
Station (MHz)
14510 14532
T/R Spacing(MHz) 420 420
TX Power(dBm) 10 (The TX power must be the same
at both ends.)
10 (The TX power must be the same
at both ends.)
Channel Spacing(MHz) 14 14
E1 Capacity of the Hybrid Network 6 4
AM Enable Status Enable Enable
AM Mode Asymmetric Asymmetric
Modulation Mode of the Assured
AM Capacity
QPSK QPSK
Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity
32QAM 32QAM
Radio Link ID 101 102
ATPC Enable Status Disabled Disabled
Link Protection Mode 1+1 HSB 1+0
Polarization Direction
a
H (horizontal polarization) V (vertical polarization)
NOTE
a: The planning information that is not related to the configuration of the IDU (except for the polarization direction) is not provided
in this example.

Board Layout
Figure 4-3 Board layout of the IDU (NE1)
FAN
Slot 20
EXT Slot7
EXT Slot5
PXC Slot3
PXC Slot1
EXT Slot8
EXT Slot6
EXT Slot4
SCC Slot2
IFH2
IFH2
PH1 PXC
PXC SCC
FAN
EMS6

4-11
FAN
Slot 20
EXT Slot7
EXT Slot5
PXC Slot3
PXC Slot1
EXT Slot8
EXT Slot6
EXT Slot4
SCC Slot2
IFH2
IFH2
PH1 PXC
PXC SCC
FAN
EMS6
IFH2

PH1 EOW SCC PW48B
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4
IFH1
Slot 8
EMS4
Slot 5

NOTE
The ODU that is connected to the IF board in slot n occupies logical slot 10+n. The logical slot of the ODU is
not shown in the board layout diagram. In the case of the IDU 620, "n" ranges from five to eight whereas in the
case of the IDU 605, "n" is 7 or 8.
Attributes of the IF 1+1 Protection
Table 4-6 Attributes of the IF 1+1 protection
Parameter NE1 NE2
Protection Group ID 1 1
Protection Type HSB (default value) HSB (default value)
Working Slot Slot 5 Slot 5
Protection Slot Slot 7 Slot 7
Revertive Mode Revertive (default value) Revertive (default value)
WTR Time(s) 600 (default value) 600 (default value)
Enable Reverse Switching Enabled (default value) Enabled (default value)

Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Timeslot Allocation
Timeslot
NE2
Station
NE3 NE1
5-IFH2 5-IFH2 8-IFH2 8-IFH1
4-PH1:1-4
E1: 1-4
Add/Drop
4-PH1:7-10
E1: 1-6
4-PH1:1-6 4-PH1:1-6

As shown in Figure 4-6, the timeslots are allocated for the services between the NEs as follows.
l The timeslot allocation for the E1 services of NE1 is as follows:
The services that are added or dropped over ports 16 of the PH1 board in slot 4 of NE1
occupy the 16 E1 timeslots on the radio link between the IFH2 board in slot 5 of NE1 and
the IFH2 board in slot 5 of NE2.
The services are that added or dropped over ports 16 of the PH1 board in slot 4 of NE2
occupy the 16 E1 timeslots on the radio link between the IFH2 board in slot 5 of NE1
and the IFH2 board in slot 5 of NE2.
The services are that added or dropped over ports 710 of the PH1 board in slot 4 of
NE2 occupy the 14 E1 timeslots on the radio link between the IFH2 board in slot 8 of
NE2 and the IFH1 board in slot 8 of NE3.
The services are that added or dropped over ports 14 of the PH1 board in slot 4 of NE3
occupy the 14 E1 timeslots on the radio link between the IFH2 board in slot 8 of NE2 and
the IFH1 board in slot 8 of NE3.
Clock Information
Figure 4-7 Clock synchronization scheme
External clock
source 1/Internal
clock source
NE1
5-IFH2(SDH-1)/
7-IFH2(SDH-1)/
Internal clock source
NE2
Direction of the main clock
BITS
4-13

Table 4-7 Clock information
Parameter NE1 NE2
Clock
Source
First Clock
Source
5-IFH2(SDH-1) External clock source 1
Second
Clock
Source
7-IFH2(SDH-1) Internal clock source
Third Clock
Source
Internal clock source -

Orderwire Information
Table 4-8 Orderwire information
Telephone No. 101 102 103
Call Waiting Time(s) 5 5 -
Selected Orderwire
Port
5-IFH2-1 5-IFH2-1 -
Orderwire Occupied
Bytes
E1 E1 -

4.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the
EMS6 Board)
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Configuration Information of Ethernet Parameters
Figure 4-8 Configuration information of Ethernet parameters
User
A1
User
B1
PORT1
NE1:
6-EMS6
PORT2
NE1: 5-IFH2
(main)
PORT3
(main)
PORT4
(slave)
LAG
NE1: 7-IFH2
(standby)
NE1:
15-ODU
(main)
Network cable
IF cable
PORT1
PORT1
NE1:
17-ODU
(standby)
NE2:
15-ODU
(main)
NE2:
17-ODU
(standby)
PORT1
PORT1
LAG
PORT3
(main)
PORT4
(slave)
PORT1
PORT2
User
A2
User
B2
NE2: 7-IFH2
(standby)
NE2: 5-IFH2
(main)
NE2:
6-EMS6

Table 4-9 Parameters of external ports of the EMS6 board
Parameter NE1 NE2
Board 6-EMS6 6-EMS6
Port PORT1PORT4 PORT1PORT4
Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled
Working Mode Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation
Maximum Frame Length 1522 1522
Flow Control Disabled Disabled
TAG PORT1: Access (default
VLAN ID: 300)
PORT2PORT4: Tag Aware
PORT1: Access (default
VLAN ID: 300)
PORT2PORT4: Tag Aware
Entry Detection Enabled Enabled

Table 4-10 Parameters of external ports of the IFH2 board
Parameter NE1 NE2
Board 5-IFH2 7-IFH2 5-IFH2 7-IFH2
4-15
Parameter NE1 NE2
Enabled/
Disabled
Working Mode Auto-
Negotiation
Auto-
Negotiation
Auto-
Negotiation
Auto-
Negotiation

Table 4-11 Parameters of Ethernet private line services (NE1)
Parameter NE1
Private Line
Service 1 (User A1)
Private Line
Service 2 (User B1,
VoIP Service)
Private Line
Service 3 (User B1,
Internet Service)
Board 6-EMS
Service Type EPL EPL EPL
Service Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional
Source Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT2
Source C-VLAN
(e.g. 1,3-6)
300 100 200
Sink Port PORT3 PORT3 PORT3
Sink C-VLAN (e.g.
1,3-6)
300 100 200

Table 4-12 Parameters of Ethernet private line services (NE2)
Parameter NE2
Private Line
Service 1 (User A2)
Private Line
Service 2 (User B2,
VoIP Service)
Private Line
Service 3 (User B2,
Internet Service)
Board 6-EMS
Service Type EPL EPL EPL
Service Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional Bidirectional
Source Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT2
Source C-VLAN
(e.g. 1,3-6)
300 100 200
Sink Port PORT3 PORT3 PORT3
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameter NE2
Private Line
Service 1 (User A2)
Private Line
Service 2 (User B2,
VoIP Service)
Private Line
Service 3 (User B2,
Internet Service)
Sink C-VLAN (e.g.
1,3-6)
300 100 200

Configuration Information of the QoS
Table 4-13 Flow configuration
Paramet
er
NE1 NE2
User A1 User B1,
VoIP
Service
User B1,
Internet
Service
User A2 User B2,
VoIP
Service
User B2,
Internet
Service
Board 6-EMS 6-EMS
Flow
Type
PORT
+VLAN
Flow
PORT
+VLAN
Flow
PORT
+VLAN
Flow
PORT
+VLAN
Flow
PORT
+VLAN
Flow
PORT
+VLAN
Flow
Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT2 PORT1 PORT2 PORT2
VLAN
ID
300 100 200 300 100 200
Bound
CAR
1 2 1 2
Bound
CoS
3 1 2 3 1 2

Table 4-14 Parameters of the CAR
a
Parameter NE1 NE2
Board 6-EMS 6-EMS
CAR ID 1 2 1 2
Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Committed Information Rate (kbit/
s)
10240 20480 10240 20480
Committed Burst Size (kbyte) 0 0 0 0
Peak Information Rate (kbit/s) 20480 40960 20480 40960
4-17
Parameter NE1 NE2
Maximum Burst Size (kbyte) 0 0 0 0

NOTE
a: You can limit the Ethernet service rate on a port of the EMS6 board, by performing the corresponding
configuration of the CAR that is bound with the port.
Table 4-15 Parameters of the CoS
Parameter NE1 NE2
Board 6-EMS 6-EMS
CoS ID 1 2 3 1 2 3
CoS Type simple simple simple simple simple simple
CoS Priority 7 3 2 7 3 2

Configuration Information of the Link Aggregation Group
Table 4-16 Parameters of the link aggregation group
Parameter NE1 NE2
Board 6-EMS 6-EMS
LAG No. 1 1
LAG Name LAG_1 LAG_1
LAG Type Manual Manual
Load Sharing Non-Sharing Non-Sharing
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Non-Revertive
Main Port PORT3 PORT3
Selected Slave Ports PORT4 PORT4

4.2.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the
IFH2 Board)
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Figure 4-9 Configuration diagram of the Ethernet services between NE2 and NE3
User
C1
NE2:
8-IFH2
NE2:
18-ODU
PORT1
User
C2
PORT1
NE3:
18-ODU
NE3:
8-IFH1
NE3:
5-EMS4
Network cable
IF cable

Parameter NE2 NE3
Board 8-IFH2 5-EMS4
Port PORT1 PORT1
Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled
Working Mode Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation
Autonegotiation Flow
Control Mode
Enable Symmetric Flow Control Disabled

Table 4-18 Parameters of the CoS of the IFH2 board (NE2)
CoS Parameter CoS Priority
User Priority 7 in the VLAN Tag 3
User Priority 1 in the VLAN Tag 1

Table 4-19 Parameters of Ethernet services (NE3)
Parameter Ethernet LAN Service
Board 5-EMS4
VB Name VB1
VB Type 802.1d
Bridge Switch Mode SVL/Ingress Filter Disable
Mount Port PORT1, IFUP1

4-19
Prerequisite
Procedure
l New ID: 101
l IP: 129.9.0.101
3. Click New.
Protection
Group ID
expires.
value.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
restoration occurs.
value.
Enable Reverse
Switching
source end.
value.
Working Board 5-IFH2-1 In the 1+1 HSB mode, the IF boards can be installed
Protection Board 7-IFH2-1

Step 4 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the 5-IFH2 board and then choose Configuration > Hybrid/
AM Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Hybrid/AM Configuration tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
IF Channel
Bandwidth
14M l In this example, the spacing between radio links
is 14 MHz.
l This parameter needs to be set according to the
values listed in service planning (microwave
services).
E1 Capacity 6 A maximum of 6xE1 services can be transmitted in
Hybrid work mode. The value of this parameter
cannot exceed the maximum number of E1 services
permitted in Modulation Mode of the Assured AM
Capacity.
AM Mode Asymmetric An AM switching in one direction of the radio link
does not cause an AM switching in the other
direction of the radio link.
AM Enable
Status
Enable The radio link uses the corresponding modulation
mode according to the channel conditions.
Modulation
Mode of the
Assured AM
Capacity
QPSK l In this example, the lowest modulation mode that
the AM function supports is QPSK.
l The value of this parameter is determined by the
link capacity and must ensure the reliable
transmission of E1 services.
4-21
Modulation
Mode of the Full
AM Capacity
32QAM l In this example, the highest modulation mode that
the AM function supports is set to 32QAM.
l The value of this parameter is determined by the
link capacity and must ensure that the maximum
capacity of Hybrid microwave services can be
transmitted when the radio link is in good
conditions.

NOTE
The 5-IFH2 and 7-IFH2 boards are configured as a 1+1 HSB protection group. The 5-IFH2 functions as
the main IF board and the 7-IFH2 functions as the standby IF board. The system automatically sets the
relevant parameters of the standby board (7-IFH2). Hence, you need not set the parameters manually.
3. Set the information about the 5-IFH2. Then, click Apply. Set the information about the 15-
ODU on the radio link. Then, click Apply.
ATPC Enable
Status
Disabled -
TX Frequency
(MHz)
T/R Spacing
(MHz)
420 MHz.
TX Power
(dBm)
normally.
default value.

Step 6 Create the cross-connections of services.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
2. Click New. Then, the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed. Configure the cross-
connections of the service. Click OK.
bound.
l This parameter indicates the level of the cross-
connections.
Direction Bidirectional l When this parameter is set to Bidirectional,
source to the service sink and from the service
sink to the service source.
default value.
Source 4-PH1 In this example, the 4-PH1 is the service source.
Source
Timeslot Range
(e.g.1,3-6)
source corresponds are timeslots 1-6.
Sink 5-IFH2 In this example, the 5-IFH2 is the service sink.
Sink Port 1 In this example, port 1 is the service sink port.
VC4-1.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)
sink corresponds are timeslots 1-6.

l Phone 1: 101
l Orderwire Port: 5-IFH2-1
2. Click Create. The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed. After setting the parameters,
click OK.
Clock Source 5-IFH2-1(SDH) In this example, the 5-IFH2-1(SDH) is the clock
source.
4-23
7-IFH2-1(SDH) In this example, the 7-IFH2-1(SDH) is the clock
source.

Then, click Apply.
Paramet
er
Clock
Source
5-IFH2-1
(SDH)
7-IFH2-1
(SDH)
Internal
Clock
Source
In this example, the 5-IFH2-1
(SDH), 7-IFH2-1(SDH), and
internal clock source are set as the
clock sources.
Clock
Source
Priority
Sequence
(1 is the
highest)
1 2 3 l This parameter specifies the
priority level of a clock source.
l The priority level of the 5-
IFH2-1(SDH) clock source is
1. The priority level of the 7-
IFH2-1(SDH) clock source is
2. The priority level of the
internal clock source is 3.

----End
4.2.6 Configuring NE1 (Ethernet Services Accessed Through the
EMS6 Board)
Prerequisite
The IFH2 board must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports of the IFH2 board.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
1. In the NE Explorer, select the IFH2 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Port.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the basic attributes of the port, click Apply.
l The user services use PORT1.
Enabled/
Disabled
Working Mode Auto-
Negotiation
In this example, the port works in auto-
negotiation mode.

3. Click the Flow Control tab. After setting the flow control mode of the port, click Apply.
Port PORT1 l The flow control mode of PORT1 need to be
set.
Non-
Autonegotiatio
n Flow Control
Mode
Disabled l In this example, the non-auto-negotiation flow
control is disabled.
default value.
Autonegotiatio
n Flow Control
Mode
Disabled l In this example, the auto-negotiation flow
default value.

Step 2 Configure Ethernet external ports of the EMS6 board.
Port.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the basic attributes of the ports, click
Apply.
Port PORT1PORT4 l The basic attributes of PORT1, PORT2,
PORT3, and PORT4 need to be set.
l The services of user A1 use PORT1 and the
services of user B1 use PORT2.
l PORT3 and PORT4 form a LAG. PORT3 is
the main port and PORT4 is the slave port.
4-25
Enabled/
Disabled
Working Mode Auto-
Negotiation
negotiation mode.

3. Click the Flow Control tab. After setting the flow control mode of the ports, click
Apply.
Port PORT1PORT4 l The flow control mode of PORT1, PORT2,
Non-
Autonegotiatio
n Flow Control
Mode
default value.
Autonegotiatio
n Flow Control
Mode
default value.

Port PORT1PORT4 l The tag attributes of PORT1, PORT2, PORT3,
and PORT4 need to be set.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
TAG l In this
example,
TAG is set to
Access for
PORT1.
l In this
example,
TAG is set to
Tag Aware
for PORT2
PORT4.
If TAG is set to Access:
discarded.
l The packets that do not carry VLAN tags are
tagged with Default VLAN ID and are then
received.
If TAG is set to Tag Aware:
l The packets that carry VLAN tags are received.
discarded.
Default VLAN
ID
300 In this example, Default VLAN ID is set to 300
for PORT1.
Entry Detection Enabled l In this example, the incoming packets from the
attributes.
default value.

Step 3 Create Ethernet private line services of the EMS6 board.
2. Click New. Then, the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed.
3. Set the attributes of the three Ethernet private line services. Then, click OK.
l Set the parameters of Ethernet private line service 1 as follows.
Service Type EPL When creating the non-QinQ private line
service, set this parameter to EPL.
Service
Direction
Bidirectional l If Direction is set to Bidirectional, the
service source are created.
default value.
port.
Source C-
VLAN(e.g.1,
3-6)
300 The service that has the VLAN ID of 300 is the
source service.
Sink Port PORT3 In this example, PORT3 is the service sink port.
4-27
Sink C-VLAN
(e.g.1, 3-6)
sink service.

Service
Direction
Bidirectional l If Direction is set to Bidirectional, the
default value.
port.
Source C-
VLAN(e.g.1,
3-6)
source service.
Sink C-VLAN
(e.g.1, 3-6)
sink service.

default value.
port.
Source C-
VLAN(e.g.1,
3-6)
source service.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Sink C-VLAN
(e.g.1, 3-6)
sink service.

Step 4 Configure the QoS of the EMS6 board.
1. Create the flow.
a. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board and then choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
b. Click the Flow Configuration tab.
c. Click New. The New Flow dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the three
flows. Then, click OK.
l Set the parameters of the Internet service of user A1 as follows:
Flow Type PORT+VLAN
Flow
When Flow Type is set to PORT+VLAN
Flow, the packets that are from the same port
and have the same VLAN ID are classified as a
type of flow.
Port PORT1 In this example, PORT1 is the source port of the
Ethernet service associated with the flow.
VLAN ID 300 In this example, the source VLAN ID is 300.

l Set the parameters of the VoIP service of user B1 as follows.
Flow Type PORT+VLAN
Flow
type of flow.

l Set the parameters of the Internet service of user B1 as follows.
Flow Type PORT+VLAN
Flow
type of flow.
4-29

2. Create the CAR.
b. Click the CAR Configuration tab.
c. Click New. The New CAR dialog box is displayed. Select the parameters of the two
CARs. Then, click OK.
l Set the parameters of user A1 as follows.
CAR ID 1 In this example, CAR 1 is used to bind the flow
to an associated CAR operation.
Enabled/
Disabled
Enabled In this example, CAR1 is enabled.
Committed
Information
Rate(kbit/s)
10240 l In this example, the CIR is 10240 kbit/s.
l When the rate of the packets is not more than
the CIR, these packets pass the restriction of
the CAR and are forwarded first even in the
case of network congestion.
Committed
Burst Size
(kbyte)
0 In this example, the CBS is 0.
Peak
Information
Rate(kbit/s)
20480 l In this example, the PIR is 20480 kbit/s.
l When the rate of the packets is more than the
PIR, these packets that exceed the rate
restriction are directly discarded. When the
rate of the packets is more than the CIR but
is not more than the PIR, the packets whose
rate is more than the CIR can pass the
restriction of the CAR and are marked
yellow, which enables these packets to be
discarded first in the case of network
congestion.
Maximum
Burst Size
(kbyte)
0 In this example, the MBS is 0.

Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Enabled/
Disabled
Enabled In this example, CAR 2 is enabled.
Committed
Information
Rate(kbit/s)
Committed
Burst Size
(kbyte)
Peak
Information
Rate(kbit/s)
congestion.
Maximum
Burst Size
(kbyte)

3. Create the CoS.
b. Click the CoS Configuration tab.
c. Click New. The New CoS dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the three
CoSs. Then, click OK..
CoS ID 1 In this example, CoS 1 is used to bind the flow
to an associated CoS operation.
CoS Type simple If the CoS Type of a flow is set to simple, all
the packets in this flow are directly scheduled
to a specified egress queue.
4-31
CoS Priority 7 The queue whose CoS priority is 7 is an SP
queue.

l Set the parameters of the Ethernet service of user B1 as follows.
CoS Priority 3 The queues whose priorities are from 0 to 6 are
WRR queues. The weighted proportion of these
WRR queues are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from
priority 0 to priority 6).

l Set the parameters of the Ethernet service of user A1 as follows.

4. Bind the CAR/CoS.
b. Click the Flow Configuration tab. After setting the parameters, click OK.
Paramet
er
Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT2 In this example, PORT1 and
PORT2 are the source ports of the
Ethernet services associated with
the flows.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Paramet
er
Flow
Type
PORT
+VLAN
Flow
PORT
+VLAN
Flow
PORT
+VLAN
Flow
When Flow Type is set to PORT
+VLAN Flow, the packets that
are from the same port and have
the same VLAN ID are classified
as a type of flow.
VLAN ID 300 100 200 The source VLAN IDs of the
ports are 300, 100, and 200.
Bound
CAR
1 - 2 The flow is bound with the
corresponding CAR, according to
the service plan.
Bound
CoS
3 1 2 The flow is bound with the
corresponding CoS, according to
the service plan.

Step 5 Create an LAG of the EMS6 board.
Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the Function
Tree.
2. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
3. Click New. The Create Link Aggregation Group dialog box is displayed. After setting
the parameters, click OK. Then, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.
LAG No. 1 In this example, LAG No. is set to 1.
LAG Name LAG_1 In this example, LAG Name is set to LAG_1.
LAG Type Manual The user creates the LAG manually. The LACP is
not enabled to add or delete a member port. The
member ports may be in the UP or DOWN state. The
equipment determines whether to perform the
aggregation according to the status of the specific
port.
Load Sharing Non-Sharing Only one member link of a link aggregation group
carries traffic and the other member links are in the
Standby state. In this case, a hot backup scheme is
provided.
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive In the case of the LAG that worked with the 1+1 IF
protection, the revertive mode must be set to Non-
Revertive.
Main Port PORT3 In this example, PORT3 is the main port.
Selected Slave
Ports
PORT4 In this example, PORT4 is the slave port.
4-33

----End
Prerequisite
Procedure
l New ID: 102
l IP: 129.9.0.102
3. Click New.
Protection
Group ID
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
expires.
value.
restoration occurs.
value.
Enable Reverse
Switching
source end.
value.
Working Board 5-IFH2-1 In the 1+1 HSB mode, the IF boards can be installed
Protection Board 7-IFH2-1

Step 4 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the 5-IFH2 and then choose Configuration > Hybrid/AM
IF Channel
Bandwidth
14M l In this example, the spacing between radio
links is 14 MHz.
services).
E1 Capacity 6 A maximum of 6xE1 services can be transmitted
in Hybrid work mode. The value of this parameter
cannot exceed the maximum number of E1
services permitted in Modulation Mode of the
Assured AM Capacity.
4-35
AM Mode Asymmetric When this parameter is set to Asymmetric, an
AM switching in one direction of the radio link
AM Enable
Status
Enable The radio link uses the corresponding modulation
mode according to the channel conditions.
Modulation
Mode of the
Assured AM
Capacity
QPSK l In this example, the lowest modulation mode
that the AM function supports is QPSK.
l The value of this parameter is determined by
the link capacity and must ensure the reliable
Modulation
Mode of the
Full AM
Capacity
32QAM l In this example, the highest modulation mode
that the AM function supports is set to 32QAM.
the link capacity and must ensure that the
maximum capacity of Hybrid microwave
services can be transmitted when the radio
links are in good conditions.

NOTE
The 5-IFH2 and 7-IFH2 boards are configured as a 1+1 HSB protection group. The 5-IFH2 functions
as the main IF board and the 7-IFH2 functions as the standby IF board. The system automatically
sets the relevant parameters of the standby board (7-IFH2). Hence, you need not set the parameters
manually.
3. In the NE Explorer, select the 8-IFH2 and then choose Configuration > Hybrid/AM
IF Channel
Bandwidth
14M l In this example, the spacing between radio
links is 14 MHz.
services).
E1 Capacity 4 A maximum of 4xE1 services can be transmitted
in Hybrid work mode. The value of this parameter
cannot exceed the maximum number of E1
services permitted in Modulation Mode of the
Assured AM Capacity.
AM Mode Asymmetric When this parameter is set to Asymmetric, an
AM switching in one direction of the radio link
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
AM Enable
Status
Enable l When this parameter is set to Enable, the radio
link uses the corresponding modulation mode
according to the channel conditions.
default value.
Modulation
Mode of the
Assured AM
Capacity
QPSK l In this example, the lowest modulation mode
that the AM function supports is QPSK.
the link capacity and must ensure the reliable
Modulation
Mode of the
Full AM
Capacity
32QAM In this example, the available highest modulation
mode that the AM function supports is set to
32QAM.
l In this example, the highest modulation mode
that the AM function supports is set to 32QAM.
the link capacity and must ensure that the
maximum capacity of Hybrid microwave
services can be transmitted when the radio
links are in good conditions.

3. Set the information about the 5-IFH2 and 15-ODU on one radio link. Then, click Apply.
Set the information about the 8-IFH2 and 18-ODU on the other radio link. Then, click
Apply.
l Set the parameters of the 5-IFH2 and 15-ODU as follows.
ATPC Enable
Status
Disabled -
TX Frequency
(MHz)
T/R Spacing
(MHz)
ODU is 420 MHz.
4-37
TX Power
(dBm)
normally.
default value.

l Set the parameters of the 8-IFH2 and 18-ODU as follows:
ATPC Enable
Status
Disabled -
TX Frequency
(MHz)
T/R Spacing
(MHz)
ODU is 420 MHz.
TX Power
(dBm)
normally.
default value.

Step 6 Create the cross-connections of services.
Then, click OK.
l Configure the cross-connections of the E1 services of NE1 and NE2 as follows.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
bound.
cross-connections.
default value.
Source
Timeslot
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)
VC4-1.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

l Configure the cross-connections of the E1 services of NE2 and NE3 as follows.
bound.
cross-connections.
default value.
Source
Timeslot
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)
4-39
VC4-1.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.
1,3-6)

l Phone 1: 102
l Orderwire Port: 5-IFH2-1
Then, click OK.
Clock Source External Clock
Source 1
In this example, external clock source 1 is
selected as the clock source.

Then, click Apply.
Clock
Source
External
Clock Source
1
Internal
Clock Source
In this example, external clock source 1
and the internal clock source are
selected as the clock sources.
Clock
Source
Priority
Sequence(1
is the
highest)
l The priority level of external clock
source 1 is 1. The priority level of the
internal clock source is 2.

----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
EMS6 Board)
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Configure Ethernet external ports of the IFH2 board.
Port.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the basic attributes of the port, click Apply.
Enabled/
Disabled
Working Mode Auto-
Negotiation
negotiation mode.

3. Click the Flow Control tab. After setting the flow control mode of the port, click Apply.
Port PORT1 l The flow control mode of PORT1 need to be
set.
Non-
Autonegotiatio
n Flow Control
Mode
default value.
4-41
Autonegotiatio
n Flow Control
Mode
default value.

Step 2 Configure Ethernet external ports of the EMS6 board.
Port.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the basic attributes of the ports, click
Apply.
Port PORT1PORT4 l The basic attributes of PORT1, PORT2,
Enabled/
Disabled
Working Mode Auto-
Negotiation
negotiation mode.

3. Click the Flow Control tab. After setting the flow control mode of the ports, click
Apply.
Port PORT1PORT4 l The flow control mode of PORT1, PORT2,
Non-
Autonegotiatio
n Flow Control
Mode
default value.
Autonegotiatio
n Flow Control
Mode
default value.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)

Port PORT1PORT4 l The tag attributes of PORT1, PORT2, PORT3,
and PORT4 need to be set.
TAG l In this
example,
TAG is set to
Access for
PORT1.
l In this
example,
TAG is set to
Tag Aware
for PORT2
PORT4.
If TAG is set to Access:
discarded.
tagged with Default VLAN ID and are then
received.
If TAG is set to Tag Aware:
l The packets that carry VLAN tags are received.
discarded.
Default VLAN
ID
300 In this example, Default VLAN ID is set to 300
for PORT1.
Entry Detection Enabled l In this example, the incoming packets from the
attributes.
default value.

Step 3 Create Ethernet private line services of the EMS6 board.
2. Click New. Then, the Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed.
3. Set the attributes of the three Ethernet private line services. Then, click OK.
4-43
default value.
port.
Source C-
VLAN(e.g.1,
3-6)
source service.
Sink C-VLAN
(e.g.1, 3-6)
sink service.

default value.
port.
Source C-
VLAN(e.g.1,
3-6)
source service.
Sink C-VLAN
(e.g.1, 3-6)
sink service.

l Set the parameters of Ethernet private line service 3 as follows:
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
default value.
port.
Source C-
VLAN(e.g.1,
3-6)
source service.
Sink C-VLAN
(e.g.1, 3-6)
sink service.

Step 4 Configure the QoS of the EMS6 board.
1. Create the flow.
b. Click the Flow Configuration tab.
c. Click New. The New Flow dialog box is displayed. Select the parameters of the eight
flows. Then, click OK.
l Set the parameters of the Internet service of user A2 as follows:
Flow Type PORT+VLAN
Flow
type of flow.

Flow Type PORT+VLAN
Flow
type of flow.
4-45

Flow Type PORT+VLAN
Flow
Flow, the packets that are from the same port and
have the same VLAN ID are classified as a type
of flow.

2. Create the CAR.
b. Click the CAR Configuration tab.
c. Click New. The New CAR dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the two
CARs. Then, click OK.
l Set the parameters of user A1 as follows.
Enabled/
Disabled
Committed
Information
Rate(kbit/s)
Committed
Burst Size
(kbyte)
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Peak
Information
Rate(kbit/s)
congestion.
Maximum
Burst Size
(kbyte)

Enabled/
Disabled
Committed
Information
Rate(kbit/s)
Committed
Burst Size
(kbyte)
Peak
Information
Rate(kbit/s)
congestion.
Maximum
Burst Size
(kbyte)
4-47

3. Create the CoS.
b. Click the CoS Configuration tab.
c. Click New. The New CoS dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters of the three
CoSs. Then, click OK.
CoS Priority 7 The queue whose CoS priority is 7 is an SP
queue.

l Set the parameters of the Ethernet service of user B2 as follows.

l Set the parameters of the Ethernet service of user A2 as follows.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)

4. Bind the CAR/CoS.
b. Click the Flow Configuration tab. After setting the parameters, click OK.
Paramet
er
Port PORT1 PORT2 PORT2 In this example, PORT1 and
PORT2 are the source ports of the
Ethernet services associated with
the flows.
Flow
Type
PORT
+VLAN
Flow
PORT
+VLAN
Flow
PORT
+VLAN
Flow
When Flow Type is set to PORT
+VLAN Flow, the packets that
are from the same port and have
the same VLAN ID are classified
as a type of flow.
VLAN ID 300 100 200 The source VLAN IDs of the
ports are 300, 100, and 200.
Bound
CAR
1 - 2 The flow is bound with the
corresponding CAR, according to
the service plan.
Bound
CoS
3 1 2 The flow is bound with the
corresponding CoS, according to
the service plan.

Step 5 Create a LAG of the EMS6 board.
Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the Function
Tree.
2. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
3. Click New. The Create Link Aggregation Group dialog box is displayed. After setting
the parameters, click OK. Then, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.
LAG No. 1 In this example, LAG No. is set to 1.
LAG Name LAG_1 In this example, LAG Name is set to LAG_1.
LAG Type Manual The user creates the LAG manually. The LACP is
not enabled to add or delete a member port. The
member ports may be in the UP or DOWN state. The
equipment determines whether to perform the
aggregation according to the status of the specific
port.
4-49
Load Sharing Non-Sharing Only one member link of a link aggregation group
carries traffic and the other member links are in the
Standby state. In this case, a hot backup scheme is
provided.
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive In the case of the LAG that worked with the 1+1 IF
protection, the revertive mode must be set to Non-
Revertive.
Main Port PORT3 In this example, PORT3 is the main port.
Selected Slave
Ports
PORT4 In this example, PORT4 is the slave port.

----End
IFH2 Board)
You can configure the attributes and CoS of the Ethernet ports of the IFH2 board based on the
parameters of the engineering plan so that Ethernet services can be accessed to the IFH2 board
normally, thus meeting the requirement for CoS scheduling.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the Ethernet ports of the IFH2 board.
Port.
2. Set the basic attributes of the ports. Click the Basic Attributes tab. After setting the
parameters, click Apply.
Enabled/
Disabled
Enabled In the case of the port that accesses services, set this
parameter to Enabled.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Working Mode Auto-Negotiation In this example, the port works in auto-negotiation
mode.
Non-
Autonegotiation
Flow Control
Mode
value.
Autonegotiation
Flow Control
Mode
Enable
Symmetric Flow
Control
When this parameter is set to Enable Symmetric
Flow Control, PORT1 transmits and processes
PAUSE frames.

Step 2 Configure the CoS of the IFH2 board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the IFH2 board and then choose Configuration > QoS
2. Click the Flow Configuration tab.
3. Set CoS Parameter and CoS Priority. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
CoS
Parameter
Priority 7 in
the VLAN
Tag
Priority 1 in
the VLAN
Tag
The data flows correspond to Priority 7
in the VLAN Tag and Priority 7 in the
VLAN Tag, respectively.
CoS Priority 3 1 l The data flow of Priority 7 in the
VLAN Tag has the CoS priority of 3.
The data flow of Priority 1 in the
VLAN Tag has the CoS priority of 1.
l This parameter specifies the queue to
which a packet should be scheduled.

----End
You can configure the data of NE3 based on the parameters of the service planning, by using
the NMS.
NE3 is the OptiX RTN 600 NE that uses the IDU 605 1F. The procedure for configuring an NE
that uses the IDU 605 is not provided in this document. For details, see the OptiX RTN 600 Radio
Transmission System IDU 605 Configuration Guide.
4-51
5 Configuring Microwave Services by Using
the Quick Configuration Wizard
About This Chapter
When the IDU 610 or IDU 620 has the SDH/PDH microwave service only in one direction, you
can use the quick configuration wizard to perform the initial service configuration. Hence, the
process of configuring the services on a single microwave NE is simplified.
5.1 Purpose
The quick configuration wizard can be used to set the general parameters that are used in multiple
configuration tasks. Hence, the quick configuration wizard can realize the configuration of all
the basic data at one time.
5.2 Using the Quick Configuration Wizard
The quick configuration wizard helps you to complete the configuration of the basic service data
step by step.
5 Configuring Microwave Services by Using the Quick
5-1
5.1 Purpose
The quick configuration wizard can be used to set the general parameters that are used in multiple
configuration tasks. Hence, the quick configuration wizard can realize the configuration of all
the basic data at one time.
Table 5-1 Purpose of the quick configuration
Integrated
Configuration Task
Configurable Parameter Remarks
Configuring logical boards Adding all the logical boards
that correspond to the
physical boards of the NE
Configuring the IF 1+1

protection
l Protection scheme
l Working board
l Protection board
l This task is optional when
the NE is configured with
two SDH or PDH IF
boards.
l The corresponding user
interface of the Web LCT
is suppressed when the NE
is configured with only one
SDH or PDH IF board.
l Work mode
l Link ID
l TX frequency (kHz)
l T/R spacing (kHz)
l TX power (dBm)
This task is applicable to the
SDH/PDH microwave in one
direction.
Configuring PDH services
(NE configuration)
Cross-connections between
the E1 ports and the SDH/
PDH IF boards
This task is applicable when
the NE is configured with the
SDH/PDH microwave
services only in one direction
and the service boards contain
only one tributary board.
Configuring the clock One of the following
configurations is adopted:
l The clock sources are not
configured. In this case, the
clock works in the free-run
mode.
l Three levels of clock
sources are configured,
that is, there are three
levels of clock sources.
When three levels of clock
sources are configured, you
can set the available clock
sources according to the
actual requirements. In this
case, however, the internal
clock source cannot be
selected.
Configuring the orderwire Orderwire phone number
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Integrated
Configuration Task
Configurable Parameter Remarks
Enabling the NE
performance monitoring
function
Setting the NE performance
monitoring function
This task is performed to
enable the 15-minute and 24-
hour performance monitoring
functions.
Synchronizing the NE time Synchronizing the NE time This task is performed to
synchronize the NEs with the
current time of the NM server.

5.2 Using the Quick Configuration Wizard
The quick configuration wizard helps you to complete the configuration of the basic service data
step by step.
Prerequisite
l The NE must be configured with only the SDH/PDH microwave services in one direction.
l The RF system must be configured with the 1+1 protection or the 1+0 non-protection.
l All the required boards must be installed correctly.
l The service boards of the NE must contain only one E1 interface board.
l The ODU must be installed correctly and the power supply must be normal.
l You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher. That is, you must be an
NE user with "Operation Level" authority or higher.
Background Information
All the basic NE data can be configured at one time by using the quick configuration wizard,
only when all the prerequisites are met. Otherwise, only partial configurations are complete and
hence you need to perform the remaining configurations again.
Precautions
CAUTION
l When the quick configuration wizard is used, the original NE configurations are cleared. As
a result, the services are interrupted.
l All the data configurations that are performed by the quick configuration wizard can be
realized by using the general configuration mode. This topic describes only the parameters
that are set in the quick configuration wizard. For other parameters, see 2 Configuring SDH/
PDH Services Based on the SDH/PDH Microwave.
5-3
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Quick
Step 2 Ensure that the NE equipment meets the requirements specified in the prompt, and click Start
Config.
Step 3 Click Next in the dialog box that is displayed.
Step 4 Ensure that NE Panel is correct and click Next.
Click Next. If two or more IF boards are configured, proceed to Step 5; otherwise proceed to
Step 6.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Step 5 Optional: Set the IF protection parameters, and click Next.
l If Configure Intermediate Frequency 1+1 Protection is selected, proceed to Step 6;
otherwise, proceed to Step 8.
l If Configure Intermediate Frequency 1+1 Protection is not selected, it indicates that multi-
directional radio links need to be configured and that the IF and RF data of the radio link in
each direction must be configured in the general mode.
NOTE
The 18)2E1,3.5MHz,QPSK work mode does not support IF 1+1 protection.
5-5
Step 6 Optional: Configure the IF parameters and RF parameters, and click Next.
NOTE
If Protection Mode is set to FD in Step 5, select the standby board from the IF Board drop-down list >
and then configure Transmission Frequency(KHz) for the standby board.
Step 7 Optional: Select the E1 port and click Next.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
NOTE
The services of the selected port are mapped in sequence from the first VC-12 in the radio frame. For
example, even if the selected ports are 4-PH1-1, 4-PH1-3, 4-PH1-5, and 4-PH1-7, the services are mapped
in sequence from the first VC-12 to the fourth VC-12 in the radio frame.
Step 8 Set the clock parameters and orderwire parameters. Click Next.
Step 9 Click Next.
5-7
Step 10 Ensure that Configure Reports is consistent with the engineering plan, and then click Next.
The Web LCT starts to issue the configurations.
Step 11 Click Finish after all the configurations are delivered.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
----End
5-9
6 Configuring the Services and Functions of
Auxiliary Interfaces
About This Chapter
OptiX RTN 600 provide various auxiliary interfaces to meet the requirements in special
application scenarios. The auxiliary interfaces are mainly used for accessing synchronous data
services, asynchronous data services, and external alarms.
6.1 Configuration Example (Synchronous Data Services)
entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the synchronous data
6.2 Configuration Example (Asynchronous Data Services)
entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the point-to-point
asynchronous data service requirements.
6.3 Configuration Example (External Alarms)
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the parameters of the external alarms and
complete the data configuration according to the external alarm requirements.
6 Configuring the Services and Functions of Auxiliary
Interfaces
6-1
6.1 Configuration Example (Synchronous Data Services)
entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the synchronous data
6.1.3 Configuration Process
You can configure the synchronous data services of each NE based on the parameters of the
service planning, by using the NMS.
As shown in Figure 6-1, NE1, NE2, and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs configured with the
IDU 620. The new service requirements are as follows: the data communication equipment
between NE1 and NE3 must communicate with each other, and the required bandwidth must be
64 kbit/s.
64kbit/s
NE 2
NE 1 NE 3
64kbit/s

Interfaces
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
The SCC boards of NE1 and NE3 need to provide the F1 synchronous data ports. In the case of
the OptiX RTN 600, the SL61SCC VER.C provides the F1 synchronous data port whereas the
SL61SCC VER.B does not provide the F1 synchronous data port.
Configuring the Synchronous Data Port
Table 6-1 Configuration of the synchronous data port
Data Channel 1 6-SL1 5-IF1A 5-IF1A
Data Channel 2 F1 6-SL1 F1

Figure 6-2 Timeslot allocation of synchronous data services
Timeslot
NE2
Station
NE3
NE1
F1 F1
6-SL1-1 5-IF1A-1
2-SCC: F1
5-IF1A-1 6-SL1-1
2-SCC: F1
Add/Frop
Forward

l The F1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 of NE1 and F1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 of
NE3 are used to add/drop the synchronous data services.
l The F1 overhead byte on the SDH line between the SL1 board in slot 6 of NE1 and the SL1
board in slot 6 of NE2 is used to transmit the synchronous data services.
l The F1 overhead byte on the radio link between the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE2 and the
IF1A board in slot 5 of NE3 is used to transmit the synchronous data services.
l The synchronous data services are passed through between the SL1 board in slot 6 and the
IF1A board in slot 5 of NE2.
You can configure the synchronous data services of each NE based on the parameters of the
Prerequisite
l All the required boards must be added.
Interfaces
6-3
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to NE1.
Step 2 Configure the synchronous data services.
1. In the NE Explorer, select NE1 and then choose Configuration > Orderwire from the
Function Tree.
2. Click the F1 Data Port tab.
3. Hold down the Ctrl key and select two data channels from Available Data Channel. Then,
click Apply.
Data Channel 1 6-SL1-1 When the 6-SL1-1 port is selected, the F1 byte in
the SDH frame of this port is used.
Data Channel 2 F1 When the F1 port is selected, the F1 synchronous
data port on the SCC board is used. The F1 port
complies with ITU-T G.703 and the rate is 64 kbit/
s.

Function Tree.
click Apply.
Data Channel 1 6-SL1-1 When the 6-SL1-1 port is selected, the F1 byte in
the SDH frame of this port is used.
Data Channel 2 5-IF1A-1 When the 5-IF1A-1 port is selected, the self-
defined F1 byte in the radio frame of this port is
used.

Function Tree.
click Apply.
Interfaces
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Data Channel 1 5-IF1A-1 When the 5-IF1A-1 port is selected, the self-
defined F1 byte in the radio frame of this port is
used.
Data Channel 2 F1 When the F1 port is selected, the F1 synchronous
data port on the SCC board is used. The F1 port
complies with ITU-T G.703 and the rate is 64 kbit/
s.

----End
6.2 Configuration Example (Asynchronous Data Services)
entire process of configuring the parameters of each NE according to the point-to-point
asynchronous data service requirements.
The timeslot allocation can be planned for the asynchronous data services based on the
networking diagram.
You can configure the asynchronous data services of each NE based on the parameters of the
As shown in Figure 6-3, NE1, NE2, and NE3 are the OptiX RTN 600 NEs configured with the
IDU 620. Asynchronous data services need to be activated between NE1 and NE3. The service
l NE1 must be connected to the monitor server.
l NE3 must be connected to the environment monitor.
l Point-to-point communication must exist between the monitor server and the environment
monitor, through services at the asynchronous data ports.
l The requirements for the environment monitor are as follows:
The level of the port must be RS-232. Logic "1" stands for 5 V to 15 V, and logic "0"
stands for +5 V to +15 V.
When no data is transmitted, the port must be of high RS-232 level (about 9 V).
Interfaces
6-5
NE 2
NE 1 NE 3
RS-232 RS-232

The timeslot allocation can be planned for the asynchronous data services based on the
networking diagram.
Configuration of the Asynchronous Data Services
Table 6-2 Configuration of the asynchronous data services
Overhead Byte SERIAL1 SERIAL1 SERIAL1
Broadcast Data
Source
6-SL1-1 5-IF1A-1 5-IF1A-1
Broadcast Data Sink S1 6-SL1-1 S1

Timeslot
NE2
Station
NE3
NE1
Serial1 Serial1
6-SL1-1 5-IF1A-1
2-SCC: S1
5-IF1A-1 6-SL1-1
2-SCC: S1
Add/Frop
Forward

As shown in the timeslot allocation diagram, the asynchronous data services are as follows:
l The S1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 of NE1 and S1 port on the SCC board in slot 2 of
NE3 are used to add and drop the asynchronous data services.
l The SERIAL1 overhead byte on the SDH optical line between the SL1 board in slot 6 of
NE1 and the SL1 board in slot 6 of NE2 is used to transmit the asynchronous data services.
Interfaces
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
l The self-defined SERIAL byte on the radio link between the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE2
and the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE3 to transmit the asynchronous data services.
l The asynchronous data services are passed through between port 1 of the SL1 board in slot
6 and port 1 of the IF1A board in slot 5 of NE2.
You can configure the asynchronous data services of each NE based on the parameters of the
Prerequisite
l All the required boards must be added.
Procedure
Step 2 Configure the asynchronous data services.
Function Tree.
2. Click the Broadcast Data Port tab. After setting the parameters, click Apply.
Overhead Byte SERIAL1 l In this example, Overhead Byte is set to
SERIAL1.
l In the case of a radio link, a self-defined
SERIAL overhead byte in the radio frame is
used to transmit the asynchronous data
services.
Broadcast Data
Source
6-SL1-1 l In this example, Broadcast Data Source is
set to 6-SL1-1.
l When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/
electrical line port, Overhead Byte of this
port is used.
Selected
Broadcast Data
Sink
S1 l In this example, Broadcast Data Sink is set
to S1.
l When this parameter is set so that it is the same
as Overhead Byte, the asynchronous data
port on the SCC board is used.

Function Tree.
Interfaces
6-7
SERIAL1.
services.
Broadcast Data
Source
6-SL1-1 l In this example, Broadcast Data Source is
set to 6-SL1-1.
l When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/
electrical line port, Overhead Byte of this
port is used.
Selected
Broadcast Data
Sink
5-IF1A-1 l In this example, Selected Broadcast Data
Sink is set to 5-IF1A-1.
l When this parameter is set to IF port, the self-
defined SERIAL byte in the radio frame of
this port is used.

Function Tree.
SERIAL1.
services.
Broadcast Data
Source
5-IF1A-1 l In this example, Broadcast Data Source is
set to 5-IF1A-1.
l When this parameter is set to IF port, the self-
defined SERIAL byte in the radio frame of
this port is used.
Selected
Broadcast Data
Sink
S1 l In this example, Selected Broadcast Data
Sink is set to S1.
l When this parameter is set so that it is the same
as Overhead Byte, the asynchronous data
port on the SCC board is used.
Interfaces
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)

----End
6.3 Configuration Example (External Alarms)
This topic uses an example to describe how to plan the parameters of the external alarms and
complete the data configuration according to the external alarm requirements.
The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. This topic describes the
external alarm requirements.
The engineering design department plans the external alarm setting based on the networking
diagram.
You can configure the external alarm services based on the parameters of the service planning,
by using the NMS.
The networking diagram forms the foundation of service planning. This topic describes the
external alarm requirements.
An OptiX RTN 600 NE must meet the following external alarm requirements:
l Outputs two external alarms, and reports a critical alarm and a major alarm. The alarm
modes are the same, that is, the port enters the "off" state when an alarm is generated.
l Inputs three external alarms. The alarm modes are the same, that is, an alarm is generated
when the port enters the "on" state.
Alarm In1
Alarm In2
Alarm In3
Alarm Out1
Alarm Out2

The engineering design department plans the external alarm setting based on the networking
diagram.
Interfaces
6-9
Table 6-3 Configuration of the external alarms
Port No. Alarm Mode Alarm Trigger Condition
Alarm output port 1 Relay Turns Off/High Level Automatically Triggered by
Critical Alarms
Alarm output port 2 Relay Turns Off/High Level Automatically Triggered by
Major Alarms
Alarm input port 1 Relay Turns On/Low Level -

You can configure the external alarm services based on the parameters of the service planning,
by using the NMS.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Configure external alarms.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the EOW board and then choose Configuration > Environment
Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Configure the input alarm. Select Input Relay from the drop-down list. Click Apply.
Paramet
er
EOW-1 EOW-2 EOW-3
Using
Status
Used In this example, Using Status of
the alarm interface is set to
Used.
Alarm
Mode
Relay Turns On/Low Level The alarm is generated when the
relay is on.

3. Configure the output alarm. Select Output Relay from the drop-down list. Click Apply.
Interfaces
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
EOW-1 EOW-2
Use or Not Used In this example, Use or Not of the alarm
interface is set to Used.
Working
Mode
Automatic Changing the status of the output relay
according to Alarm Trigger
Conditions and Alarm Mode.
Alarm
Trigger
Conditions
Automaticall
y Triggered
by Critical
Alarms
Automaticall
y Triggered
by Major
Alarms
The status of the output relay is changed
automatically according to the preset
value.
Alarm
Mode
Relay Turns Off/High Level The alarm is generated when the relay is
off.

----End
Interfaces
6-11
7 Checking the Configuration
About This Chapter
After the initial configuration is complete, you need to check whether the configuration is correct.
If the configuration is incorrect, you need to analyze the cause and rectify the fault.
7.1 Checking the NE Configuration
The following NE configuration items must be checked: NE status, software version, clock
source, 1+1 protection, SNCP, alarms, abnormal performance events, and ECC routing.
7.2 Checking the Radio Link
The following items of the radio link need be checked: XPIC configuration, N+1 protection, IF
1+1 protection, Hybrid/AM attribute, IF configuration, and ODU configuration.
IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) 7 Checking the Configuration
7-1
7.1 Checking the NE Configuration
The following NE configuration items must be checked: NE status, software version, clock
source, 1+1 protection, SNCP, alarms, abnormal performance events, and ECC routing.
NOTE
l Before you check the NE configuration, you need select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.
l The "operation directory" in the checklist refers to the operation directory in the Function Tree in the
NE Explorer.
Table 7-1 NE status checklist
No
.
Item Operation Directory Criteria
1 NE
attributes
Configuration > NE
Attribute
l The NE ID must comply with the plan,
and the IDs across the entire network
must be unique.
l The gateway NE IP address must be
the same as planned.
2 NE IP Communication >
Communication
Parameter
l The NE IP address must be the same
as planned.
3 NE time Configuration > NE Time
Synchronization
l The time difference between each NE
and the NM system in a network need
be within five minutes.
l The mode for synchronizing the NE
time must comply with the planning.
4 Logical
slot
Report > Board
Information Report > Slot
Information Report
l The physical board and logical board
must be the same.
l The board position is the same as
planned.
l All the boards must be in-service.
5 NE
security
Security > NE User
Management
l Users of different levels must be
configured with different authority
levels.
l Different NE users must be created in
case of multiple NM systems.

Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Table 7-2 Software version checklist
No
.
1 Software
version
Report > Board
Information Report
l The software version must comply
with the networking requirements.
l The software version and BIOS
version must comply with the
corresponding version mapping table.

Table 7-3 Clock checklist
No
.
1 Clock
source
priority
Configuration > Clock >
Clock Source Priority List
l The clock source priority must be the
same as planned.
2 Clock
source
switching
Clock Source Switching
l Parameters in the Clock Source
Switching Parameter tab must be the
same as planned.
l Parameters in the Clock Source
Switching Condition tab must be the
same as planned.
l The switching status in the Clock
Source Switching tab must be the
same as the actual status.
Normally, the current switching
source should be the first clock source.
3 Clock
subnet
Clock Subnet Settings
The clock source ID and the clock subnet
number under Clock Subnet are the same
as planned.

Table 7-4 1+1 protection checklist
No
.
1 Board 1+1
protection
Configuration > Board 1+1
Protection
l The main board and the standby board
must be in the proper state.
l The working board must be in the
same state as the equipment.

7-3
Table 7-5 Cross-connection and SNCP checklist
No
.
1 Cross-
connection
Configuration > Cross-
Connection Configuration
l The SNCP service cross-connection
must be correctly configured.
l Common service cross-connection
must be correctly configured.
2 SNCP
service
control
Configuration > SNCP
Service Control
l Revertive Mod, WTR Time, and
Hold-off Time must be the same as
planned.
l Active Channel and Switching
Request must be normal.

Table 7-6 Alarm and abnormal event checklist
No
.
1 Alarms Alarm > Browse Alarms l There must be rational reasons for the
alarms.
l The causes of the abnormal cases in
the alarm history must be detected.
2 Abnormal
events
Alarm > Browse Abnormal
Events
l There must be rational reasons for all
the abnormal events.

Table 7-7 ECC routing checklist
No
.
1 ECC
routing
Communication > NE
ECC Link Management
l All the NEs must be connected by the
ECC.
l Normally, the ECC should be the
shortest route.
2 Extended
ECC
Configuration > ECC
Management
l The automatic mode should not be
used if the network runs normally.
l No hub or switch should be shared
with third-party equipment to extend
the ECC.

Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
7.2 Checking the Radio Link
The following items of the radio link need be checked: XPIC configuration, N+1 protection, IF
1+1 protection, Hybrid/AM attribute, IF configuration, and ODU configuration.
NOTE
l Before you check the XPIC configuration, N+1 protection, IF 1+1 protection, you need to select an
NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.
l Before you check the configuration of the IF and the ODU, you need select the board to be checked
from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Before you check the Hybrid/AM attribute, and IF/ODU
configuration, you need to select the board to be checked from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.
l The "operation directory" in the checklist refers to the operation directory in the Function Tree in the
NE Explorer.
Table 7-8 XPIC checklist
No
.
1 XPIC
workgroup
Configuration > Link
Configuration > XPIC
l The boards in each polarization
direction must be the same as planned.
l The ID of the link in each polarization
direction must be the same as planned.

Table 7-9 N+1 protection checklist
No
.
1 N+1
protection
Configuration > N+1
Protection
l Each working unit must be the same as
planned.
l Each protection unit must be the same
as planned.
l The switched status of each unit must
be "normal".

7-5
Table 7-10 IF 1+1 protection checklist
No
.
1 IF 1+1
protection
Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection
l The working mode must be the same
as planned.
l The revertive mode must be the same
as planned.
l The WTR time must be the same as
planned.
Normally, the WTR time is 600s.
l The reverse switching enabled
attribute must be the same as planned.

Table 7-11 Hybrid/AM attribute checklist
No
.
1 Hybrid/
AM
attribute
Configuration > Hybrid/
AM Configuration >
Hybrid/AM Configuration
l The IF bandwidth must be the same
as planned.
l The E1 capacity in the Hybrid
microwave must be the same as
planned.
l AM Enable Status must be set
correctly.
l AM Mode must be set correctly.
l Modulation Mode of the Assured
AM Capacity must be the same as
planned.
l Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity must be the same as planned.

Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Table 7-12 IF configuration checklist
No
.
1 IF
attributes
Configuration > IF
Interface > IF Attributes
l The IF working mode must be the
same as planned.
l The radio Link ID must be the same as
planned.
l The wayside service enable status
must be the same as planned.
The wayside service is available only
when the radio working mode is mode
7 (that is, STM-1 mode) and the input/
output of the external clock is in the
bits mode.
2 ATPC
functions
Configuration > IF
Interface > ATPC
Attributes
l The ATPC enable status must be the
same as planned.
l When ATPC is enabled, the ATPC
thresholds and step must be the same
as planned.

Table 7-13 ODU configuration checklist
No
.
1 ODU RF
attributes
Configuration > ODU
Interface > Radio
Frequency Attributes
l The working frequency range,
transmit frequency, and T/R spacing
must be the same as planned.
2 ODU
power
attributes
Configuration > ODU
Interface > Power
Attributes
l The transmit power range and the
actual transmit power must be the
same as planned.
l The actual received power must
comply with the requirement of the
planning.
3 ODU
equipment
informatio
n
Configuration > ODU
Interface > Equipment
Information
l The station type (that is, Tx low or Tx
high) must be the same as planned.
l The frequency band of the ODU must
be the same as planned.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU must be
the same as planned.
7-7
No
.
4 ODU
advanced
attributes
Configuration > ODU
Interface > Advanced
Attributes
l After the NE commissioning is
complete, Configure Transmission
Status should be unmute.
l After the NE commissioning is
complete, Actual Transmission
Status of the ODU that is not
configured with IF 1+1 protection or
the main ODU that is configured with
IF 1+1 protection should be unmute.

Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
8 Adding and Modifying the Configuration
Data
About This Chapter
During the equipment commissioning and operating phases, you need to add certain
configuration and modify certain configuration data according to the actual requirements.
8.1 Task Collection (Configuring SDH/PDH Services)
The task collection for configuring SDH/PDH services includes all the common tasks for
configuring the NE attributes, radio link, services, clock, and orderwire.
8.2 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services)
This task collection includes all the common tasks that are performed for configuring Ethernet
services.
IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) 8 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data
8-1
8.1 Task Collection (Configuring SDH/PDH Services)
The task collection for configuring SDH/PDH services includes all the common tasks for
configuring the NE attributes, radio link, services, clock, and orderwire.
NE Attributes
Table 8-1 Task collection (NE attributes)
Task Application Scenario Configuration Operation Remarks
Creating NEs To implement the
centralized management of
NEs by using the NMS, all
the NEs that need to be
managed must be added into
the NE list.
Creating an NE (searching
for the NE) or creating an NE
manually
l Generally, NEs are
created by searching for
the NE on the NMS.
l The manual NE
creation method is
applicable only when
several NEs need to be
created on a large
microwave network.
Modifying the NE
ID
You need to modify an NE
ID, if the NE ID does not
meet the network planning
requirements, for example, if
the NE ID is the same as
another NE ID.
Modifying the NE ID -
Modifying the IP
address of an NE
You need to modify the IP
address of the gateway NE if
changes occur in the external
DCN between the NMS
server and the gateway NE.
Changing the IP address of
an NE
-
Synchronizing the
NE time
After you conduct the
settings on the NMS, the NE
time is synchronized
automatically and
periodically. You can also
synchronize the NE time
manually if the NE time is
lost due to NE faults.
Synchronizing the NE time To ensure that the NE time
can be synchronized
correctly, the time, time
domain, and DST of the
NMS server must be set
correctly.

8 Adding and Modifying the Configuration Data
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Radio Link
CAUTION
When you add or modify the configurations of a radio link, you need to modify the configurations
of the NE that is located far from the NMS server and then modify the configurations of the NE
that is located near to the NMS server.
Table 8-2 Task collection (radio link)
Changing the radio
work mode of the
SDH/PDH radio
link
You need to modify the radio
work mode of an SDH/PDH
radio link, if the SDH/PDH
radio link does not meet the
service capacity
requirements.
1. Deleting the cross-
connections of services
l Before you change the
radio work mode, you
need to delete all the
services on the IF ports.
l If the IF ports are
configured with
relevant protection, you
need to delete the
protection first.
2. Configuring the IF/ODU
Before you change a radio
work mode, it is
recommended that you
consult the network
planning department to
check whether the radio
link supports the new radio
work mode.
Configuring the
ATPC function
The ATPC function needs to
be enabled for the radio link
or the values of ATPC
parameters need to be
changed.
Configuring the ATPC
function
-
Changing the
transmit power
You can change the transmit
power if the fading margin is
insufficient but the transmit
power can still be increased.
-
Upgrading a 1+0
radio link to a 1+1
HSB/SD/FD radio
link
To improve the reliability of
a 1+0 radio link, you can
upgrade the 1+0 radio link to
a 1+1 HSB/SD/FD radio
link.
1.Configuring IF 1+1
protection
In the case of IF 1+1
protection, the existing IF
board functions as the
main IF board.
Configuring IF 1+1
protection does not
interrupt services.
8-3
2.Configuring the IF/ODU
l Ensure that Actual TX
Status of the standby
ODU is unmute.
l In the case of a 1+1 FD
radio link, you need to
set Transmission
Frequency, T/R
Spacing, and Transmit
Power for the standby
ODU.
Setting the Hybrid/
AM attribute
If the Hybrid/AM attribute
of the existing Hybrid radio
link does not meet the
service requirements, for
example, if the modulation
mode of the assured AM
capacity needs to be changed
to increase the assured
capacity, you need to modify
the Hybrid/AM attribute.
Setting the Hybrid/AM
attribute
l Before you modify the
Hybrid/AM attribute, it
is recommended that
you consult the network
planning department to
check whether the radio
link supports the new
modulation mode of the
assured AM capacity
and modulation mode
of the full AM capacity.
l Changing the
Modulation Mode of
the Assured AM
Capacity or
Modulation Mode of
the Full AM Capacity
does not interrupt
services.
l To change E1 Capacity
of the Hybrid
Network, however, you
need to delete all the E1
services on the IF ports.

Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Services
Table 8-3 Task collection (services)
Adding SDH/PDH
services
More SDH/PDH services
need to be accessed on the
network.
Creating the cross-
connections of point-to-point
services or creating the cross-
connections of SNCP
services
l If the services that need
to be added on the IF
boards require the
support of a license, you
need to apply for the
corresponding license.
l If the services that are
added on the SDH/PDH
IF boards exceed the
maximum capacity
supported by the radio
work mode, you need to
change the radio work
mode.
l If the services that are
added on the SDH/PDH
IF boards exceed the
maximum access
capacity supported by
the Hybrid microwave,
you need to change the
Hybrid/AM attribute.
Deleting SDH/
PDH services
If the line resources are
insufficient, you need to
delete the SDH/PDH
services that are not used to
release the corresponding
resources.
Deleting the cross-
connections of services
-
Upgrading an
unprotected chain
to a linear MSP
chain
You can upgrade an
unprotected chain to a linear
MSP chain to improve the
service reliability.
Configuring linear MSP In the case of linear MSP,
the existing line port
functions as the working
port. Configuring linear
MSP does not interrupt the
existing services.
Upgrading an
unprotected ring to
a two-fiber MSP
ring
You can upgrade an
unprotected ring to a two-
fiber MSP ring to improve
the service reliability.
Configuring ring MSP In the case of ring MSP.
the existing line port
functions as the working
port. Configuring ring
MSP does not interrupt the
existing services.
8-5
Upgrading normal
services to SNCP
services
You can upgrade normal
services to SNCP services to
improve the service
reliability.
Converting normal services
to SNCP services
Only the normal services
in the receive direction are
converted to SNCP
services. Hence, you need
to configure the
unidirectional cross-
connections from the
SNCP services to the
working trail and from the
SNCP services to the
protection trail so that the
normal services both in the
receive direction and in the
transmission direction are
converted to SNCP
services.

Clock
Table 8-4 Task collection (clock)
Configuring the
clock source
When the centralized
management of the OptiX
RTN NEs is implemented by
using the NMS, configure
the clock source for each NE
according to the clock
synchronization scheme.
Configuring the clock source The clock sources must
comply with the network-
wide clock
synchronization scheme.
Hence, all the NEs on the
transport network trace the
same clock.
Configuring
protection for the
clock source
If the transport network is a
ring network or a network
with a more complex
topology, configure the SSM
or extended SSM protocol
according to the
requirements.
Configuring protection for
the clock source
Generally, the
requirements can be met
after the SSM protocol is
configured.

Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Orderwire
Table 8-5 Task collection (orderwire)
Task Application
Scenario
Configuration
Operation
Remarks
Configuring
the orderwire
After the centralized
management of the
OptiX RTN NEs is
implemented by using
the NMS, configure the
orderwire for the NEs.
Configuring the
orderwire
l The orderwire
phone numbers of
all the NEs on the
network must of
the same length. It
is recommended
that the orderwire
phone numbers are
three-digit
numbers.
l Each orderwire
phone number
must be unique
and cannot be set
to "888". It is
recommended that
you allocate the
three-digit
numbers (that start
from "101") as the
orderwire phone
numbers for the
NEs one after
another, according
to the order of NE
IDs.

8.2 Task Collection (Configuring Ethernet Services)
This task collection includes all the common tasks that are performed for configuring Ethernet
services.
Ethernet Services Transmitted on the SDH Microwave
Table 8-6 Task collection (Ethernet services transmitted on the SDH microwave)
Creating Ethernet
services
Create the Ethernet services
according to the service
planning.
Configuring SDH/PDH microwave-
based Ethernet services
-
8-7
Increasing the
line bandwidth of
the Ethernet
services
You need to increase the line
bandwidth for Ethernet
services, if the Ethernet
traffic volume is increased.
1.Creating the cross-connections of
Ethernet services
Create the cross-
connections from
the idle timeslots of
the Ethernet board
to the line timeslots.
Only the idle
timeslots that can
be added to the
VCTRUNKs
occupied by the
Ethernet services
can be cross-
connected to the
line timeslots.
2.Increasing or decreasing the
VCTRUNK bandwidth dynamically
Add the selected
idle timeslots of the
Ethernet board to
the VCTRUNK. If
the LCAS function
is enabled for the
VCTRUNK,
adding the idle
timeslots does not
interrupt the
Ethernet services.
Deleting Ethernet
services
You can delete the Ethernet
resources.
1.Deleting Ethernet private line
services or deleting Ethernet LAN
services
-
2.Increasing or decreasing the
If the VCTRUNK
bandwidth cannot
be used or less
VCTRUNK
bandwidth can be
used after the
services are
deleted, delete
partial or all
timeslots contained
in the VCTRUNK.
3.Deleting the cross-connections of
Ethernet services
Delete the cross-
connections of the
timeslots in the
VCTRUNK that
are released in Step
2, to release the
corresponding line
resources.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
4.Configuring the external ports of
Ethernet boards
If the Ethernet port
cannot be used after
the services are
deleted, set
Enabled/Disabled
to Disabled for the
Ethernet port, thus
preventing the
alarms related to
the port from being
reported.
Decreasing the
line bandwidth of
the Ethernet
services
If the Ethernet traffic volume
is decreased, you can
decrease the line bandwidth
occupied by the Ethernet
services to release the
corresponding line resources.
1.Decreasing or decreasing the
Delete partial
timeslots contained
in the VCTRUNK.
2.Deleting the cross-connections of
Ethernet services
Delete the cross-
connections of the
timeslots in the
VCTRUNK that
are released in Step
2, to release the
corresponding line
resources.

Ethernet Services Transmitted on the Hybrid Microwave
Table 8-7 Task collection (Ethernet services transmitted on the Hybrid microwave)
Creating Ethernet
services
Create the Ethernet services
according to the service
planning.
1. Creating the Ethernet services to
be accessed through the EMS6
board or creating the Ethernet
services to be accessed through the
IFH2 board
-
Delete the
Ethernet services
that are accessed
through the
EMS6 board.
You can delete the Ethernet
resources.
1.Deleting Ethernet private line
services or deleting Ethernet LAN
services
-
2.Changing the values of CAR
parameters or changing the values of
CoS parameters
Change the values
of QoS parameters
to ensure that the
QoS control adapts
to the service
adjustments.
8-9
Adjusting the
QoS
You need to adjust the QoS if
the service type, traffic
volume, or Ethernet capacity
supported by the Hybrid
microwave is changed.
1.Changing the values of CAR
parameters or changing the values of
CoS parameters
Change the values
of QoS parameters
to ensure that the
QoS controls the
situation of the
change.

Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
9 Configuration Task Collection
About This Chapter
The configuration task collection includes all the common configuration tasks.
9.1 Managing NEs
Before you configure the NEs, ensure that all the NEs can be managed properly.
9.2 Configuring Radio Links
Configuring a radio link involves configuring the IF/ODU information of the radio link and the
microwave features such as the XPIC, IF 1+1 protection, IF N+1 protection, and AM.
9.3 Configuring MSP
The MSP includes the ring MSP and linear MSP.
9.4 Configuring SDH/PDH Services (NE Configuration)
The SDH/PDH services are classified into point-to-point services and SNCP services according
to the cross-connection mode.
9.5 Configuring the Clock
This topic describes how to configure the clock. In a digital transmission network, all the
transmission nodes must be synchronized. Otherwise, buffer overflow or exhaustion of the signal
bits generated at the transmission nodes causes sliding damage to the digital flow, thus resulting
in data errors. To ensure time synchronization, configure the clock for each NE. In the case of
a complex network, configure clock protection at the same time.
9.6 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces
This topic describes how to configure the orderwire, synchronous data services, asynchronous
data services, and external alarms.
9.7 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports
This topic describes how to set the parameters of various ports. Normally, the default values of
the parameters are adopted to meet the relevant requirements. In certain cases, however, the
parameters of the ports need to be modified.
9.8 Configuring Overhead Bytes
This topic describes how to configure overhead bytes. Normally, the default values of the
overhead bytes to be received or transmitted are adopted to meet the relevant requirements. In
certain cases, however, the overhead bytes to be received or transmitted need to be modified.
IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) 9 Configuration Task Collection
9-1
9.9 Adjusting the Alarm Management Function
This section describes how to adjust the alarm management function of a board or port according
to the service availability, thus improving the alarm monitoring efficiency.
9.10 Enabling/Disabling the Monitoring of the NE Performance
The NE performance monitoring function is enabled by default. You can disable and then enable
the NE performance monitoring function manually.
9.11 Configuring Ethernet Ports
The Ethernet ports contain the internal Ethernet ports and external Ethernet ports. The external
Ethernet ports are the physical ports that are used to connect the Ethernet equipment. The internal
Ethernet ports (VCTRUNKs) are internal paths that implement Ethernet over SDH.
9.12 Creating Ethernet Services
The IDU 610 supports Ethernet private line services. The IDU 620 supports Ethernet private
line services and Ethernet LAN services.
9.13 Configuring the Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services
In the case of Ethernet over SDH, you need to configure the cross-connections of the Ethernet
services.
9.14 Configuring the QoS
The QoS provides differentiated services. Hence, you can configure the QoS to ensure the quality
of the Ethernet services.
9.15 Creating a LAG
Link aggregation allows all the members in a LAG to share the incoming and outgoing service
loads, thus increasing bandwidth. In addition, the members in the same LAG provide backup to
each other dynamically. This increases the availability of the connection.
9.16 LPT Configuration
When enabling the LPT function for an Ethernet service, you need to configure the LPT port
and the related information.
9.17 Configuring the Layer 2 Switching Feature
You can configure the Layer 2 switching feature for Ethernet LAN services according to the
actual service requirements.
9.18 Configuring the Service Access of NEs
You can ensure the security of a network by setting the service access of the NEs on the network.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
9.1 Managing NEs
Before you configure the NEs, ensure that all the NEs can be managed properly.
9.1.1 Creating an NE (Searching for the NE)
To manage NEs, you must first create NEs on the Web LCT. This topic describes how to create
an NE by searching for the NE, and then adding the NE.
9.1.2 Creating an NE Manually
To manage an NE, you need to create the NE on the NMS first. This topic describes how to
create an NE manually.
9.1.3 Logging In to an NE
After an NE is created, you need to log in to the NE before managing the NE.
9.1.4 Modifying the NE ID
Modify the NE ID according to the engineering plan to ensure that each NE ID is unique. The
modification does not affect services.
9.1.5 Modifying the IP Address of an NE
After modifying the NE ID, you can modify the IP address of an NE based on the engineering
planning. Modifying the IP address of an NE does not affect services, but modifying the IP
address of a gateway NE affects the communication between the Web LCT and the NEs.
9.1.6 Configuring Logical Boards
If the corresponding logical board is not added in the slot layout diagram, add the logical board.
If the added logical board mismatches with the physical board, delete the logical board and add
the correct logical board.
9.1.7 Synchronizing the NE Time
By setting the NE time to be synchronous with the NM time, you can record the exact time when
alarms and performance events occur.
9.1.8 Localizing the NE Time
When the daylight saving time (DST) is used in the area where the NE is located, you need to
localize the NE time to synchronize the NE with the local time.
9.1.1 Creating an NE (Searching for the NE)
To manage NEs, you must first create NEs on the Web LCT. This topic describes how to create
an NE by searching for the NE, and then adding the NE.
Prerequisite
The NE must be connected to the computer that is installed with the Web LCT.
The network communication between the Web LCT and the NE must be normal.
Context
You can create an NE by searching for the NE and the adding the NE on the Web LCT. In
addition, you can create an NE by adding the NE manually. Generally, the NE ID is not known
during the initial NE configuration. Hence, the searching method is used to create an NE in most
cases.
9-3
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE List, click NE Search.
Then, the Search NE dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Optional: Set Domain to 129.9.255.255, and click Search.
NOTE
During the initial configuration, the domain is 129.9.255.255 by default. When the gateway NE IP address
of the searched NE is changed, you need to change the domain.
Step 3 After the Web LCT finds the NEs to be managed, click End Search.
Step 4 Select the NE that needs to be added and click Add NE.
The prompt box is displayed indicating that the NE is successfully added.
Step 5 Click OK.
A new NE is added to the NE list.
Step 6 Click Cancel in the Search NE dialog box.
----End
9.1.2 Creating an NE Manually
To manage an NE, you need to create the NE on the NMS first. This topic describes how to
create an NE manually.
Prerequisite
The NE must access the computer on which the Web LCT is installed.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
The communication between the Web LCT and the NEs must be normal.
The NE ID must be known.
Context
You can create an NE by adding the NE manually. In addition, you can create an NE by searching
for the NE. If the NE ID is not known during the initial NE configuration, you can create the
NE by searching for the NE and adding the NE.
Procedure
Step 1 In NE List, click Add NE.
The Add NE dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Set the parameters in the Add NE dialog box.
Step 3 Click OK.
Then, the NE is added to the NE list successfully.
----End
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
NE ID 149135 - l This parameter indicates the basic NE ID.
When there is no extended ID, the basic
NE IDs should be unique in the networks
that are managed by the same NMS.
l Set this parameter according to the DCN
planning.
Extended ID 1254 9 l Do not change the extended ID when the
number of actual NEs does not exceed the
range permitted by the basic NE ID.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
9-5
Gateway Type IP Gateway, Serial
Port
IP Gateway This parameter specifies the type of the
gateway that is used for the communication
between the Web LCT and the NEs.
IP Address - This parameter is set
to 129.9.0.x when
the NE is delivered
from the factory. "x"
indicates the basic
NE ID that is set
when the NE is
delivered from the
factory.
This parameter specifies the IP address of
the gateway NE to which the NE to be
created belongs. This parameter is displayed
only when Gateway Type is set to IP
Gateway.
Port l 1400 (when
Gateway Type is
set to IP
Gateway)
l COM1COM32
(when Gateway
Type is set to
Serial Port)
l 1400 (when
Gateway Type is
set to IP
Gateway)
l COM1 (when
Gateway Type is
set to Serial
Port)
This parameter specifies the port
corresponding to the gateway NE to which
the NE to be created belongs.
Baud Rate 1200bps, 2400bps,
4800bps, 9600bps,
19200bps,
38400bps,
57600bps,
115200bps
1200bps This parameter specifies the communication
rate between the NE to be created and the
corresponding gateway NE. This parameter
is displayed only when Gateway Type is set
to Serial Port.
User Name - lct This parameter specifies the name of the
user. This parameter can take the default
value in the case of initial login.
Password - - The default password of user lct is
password.

9.1.3 Logging In to an NE
After an NE is created, you need to log in to the NE before managing the NE.
Prerequisite
The network communication between the Web LCT and the NE must be normal.
The NE to be managed must be created in the NE list.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE List, select the target NE and click NE Login.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
TIP
You can select more than one NE at one time.
The IE displays the NE Login dialog box.
Step 2 Enter the User Name and Password. Then, click OK.
l The default User Name is lct.
l The default Password of user lct is password.
NOTE
User lct has the system level authority.
The Login Status of the NE in the NE List changes to Logged In. Alarm Status of the NE is
changed from Unknown to the current alarm status of the NE.
Step 3 Click NE Explorer.
The NE Explorer is displayed.
TIP
To quick start the NE Explorer, double-click the NE to be managed in the NE List.
9-7
TIP
l Check the legend to learn the specific meanings of different colors and symbols in the slot layout
diagram.
l Click to fold/unfold the legend.
----End
Parameters
User Name - lct Indicates the user name of the NE. In the
case of the initial login, you can adopt the
default value.
Password - - The default Password of user lct is
password.
Use same user name
and password to
login
Selected or
deselected
Deselected When this parameter is selected, enter the
User Name and Password to log in to all
the selected NEs.
Use the user name
and password that
was used last time
Selected or
deselected
Deselected When this parameter is selected, enter the
User Name and Password that were used
for the latest login to log into the NE.

9.1.4 Modifying the NE ID
Modify the NE ID according to the engineering plan to ensure that each NE ID is unique. The
modification does not affect services.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Prerequisite
l The user must log in to the NE.
l You must be an NE user with "Maintenance Level" authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > NE
Attribute from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Modify NE ID.
The system displays the Modify NE ID dialog box.
Step 3 Set a new ID for the NE.
Step 4 Click OK.
A dialog box is displayed and click OK.
----End
Parameters
New ID 1 to 49135 - l The new ID refers to the basic ID. When
the extended ID is not used, the basic ID
of an NE within any network that is
managed by an NMS must be unique.
l Set this parameter according to the
planning of the DCN.
New Extended ID 1 to 254 9 l When the number of existing NEs does
not exceed the range represented by the
basic ID, do not modify the extended ID.
default value.

NOTE
The NE ID has 24 bits. The highest eight bits represent the subnet ID (or the extended ID) and the lowest 16
bits represent the basic ID. For example, if the ID of an NE is 0x090001, the subnet ID of the NE is 9 and the
basic ID is 1.
9-9
Postrequisite
After you change the ID of an IDU 610/620 NE, you only need to re-log in to the NE, thus
recovering the communication between the NMS and the NE.
9.1.5 Modifying the IP Address of an NE
After modifying the NE ID, you can modify the IP address of an NE based on the engineering
planning. Modifying the IP address of an NE does not affect services, but modifying the IP
address of a gateway NE affects the communication between the Web LCT and the NEs.
Prerequisite
l The user must log in to the NE.
l You must be an NE user with "Maintenance Level" authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >
Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Set the IP.
Step 3 Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
IP - This parameter is
preset to 129.9.0.x
during the factory
delivery, where "x"
indicates the basic
ID.
l If the NE is planned as the gateway NE,
the NE IP address, subnet mask, and
default gateway must comply with the
requirements for planning the external
DCN.
l If the NE is planned as a non-gateway NE,
the IP addresses of other NEs should be
set according to the NE IDs. In this case,
the IP address should be set to
0x81000000 + NE ID. That is, if the NE
ID is 0x090001, the IP address should be
set to 129.9.0.1.

Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Postrequisite
After the IP address of the NE is changed, you need to log in to the NE again.
9.1.6 Configuring Logical Boards
If the corresponding logical board is not added in the slot layout diagram, add the logical board.
If the added logical board mismatches with the physical board, delete the logical board and add
the correct logical board.
Prerequisite
l All the required boards must be properly installed.
l You must have logged in to the NE.
Context
To facilitate management, the NE software considers the physical boards as one or multiple
logical boards. In the IDU 610/620:
l An SCC physical board is considered as a logical SCC and a logical EOW board. The slot
number of the logical SCC board is 2, and the slot number of the logical EOW is 21.
l Other physical boards of the IDU are considered as the logical boards with the same names.
The slot numbers of the logical boards are the same as the slot numbers of the corresponding
physical boards.
An ODU is considered as an ODU logical board. The ODU logical slot number is 10 plus the
slot number of the IF board connected to the ODU.
The STAT indicator on the physical IDU board will be lit only if the logical IDU board matches
with the physical IDU board.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Slot Layout tab and click Add Logical Boards.
Based on the slot layout, the NE automatically configures the logical boards that are required
but still not be configured for certain physical boards.
Step 2 Optional: Right-click the slots in which boards are to be added, and select Add xxx. "xxx" refers
to the boards to be added.
NOTE
l Add the PXC board before you add the IF boards and service boards.
l Manually adding the logical boards applies to the cases when relevant data need to be configured before the
physical boards are installed.
Step 3 Optional: Right-click the slots in which boards are to be deleted, and select Delete.
Delete the services, clock, orderwire and protections on the boards before you delete the boards.
----End
9-11
9.1.7 Synchronizing the NE Time
By setting the NE time to be synchronous with the NM time, you can record the exact time when
alarms and performance events occur.
Prerequisite
Precautions
In the commissioning phase, you only need synchronize the NE time with the time of the Web
LCT to ensure that the time of the alarms and abnormal events reported on the NE is
approximately correct. After all the NEs are placed under the integrated network management,
re-synchronize the NE time with the synchronization strategy of the network time.
Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the time zone and time on the NM computer are correctly set.
Step 2 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > NE Time
Synchronization from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Set Synchronous Mode.
If ... Then ...
Set Synchronous Mode to NULL, NTP, or
NM
Set the related parameters, and then click
Apply to perform Step 7.
Set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP Set the related parameters, and then click
Apply to perform Step 4 to Step 6.
NOTE
If you only need to synchronize the NE time, and do not change the type of synchronization or parameters. Select
the option about synchronization of the NE, right-click, and choose Synchronize with NM Time.
Step 4 Configure the upper-layer standard NTP server of the NE.
1. Select the Standard NTP Server tab page, and then click Add.
2. After setting the parameters of the standard NTP server, click OK.
NOTE
l If the NE is a gateway NE, set the external NTP server as the standard NTP server.
l If the NE is not a gateway NE, set the gateway NE as the standard NTP server.
Step 5 Optional: Configure the NTP access control rights.
1. Select the Access Control Rights tab page, and then click Add.
2. After setting the parameters of the access control rights, click OK.
Step 6 Optional: Configure the NTP key.
1. Select the Standard NTP Key Management tab page, and then click Add.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
2. After setting the parameters of the NTP key management, click OK.
NOTE
l Configuring the NTP key is required only when the NTP authentication is enabled.
l To pass the NTP authentication, the NTP authentication must be enabled on both the client and the
server, and Key, Password, and Encryption Type of the client must be consistent with those of the
server.
Step 7 Optional: Set Synchronization Starting Time and click Apply.
----End
Parameters
Synchronous Mode NTP, Standard NTP,
NM, NULL
NULL l When this parameter is set to NM, the NE
is synchronized with the Web LCT or
server.
l When this parameter is set to NTP, the
NE is synchronized with the network
time protocol (NTP) server through the
NTP protocol.
l When this parameter is set to Standard
NTP, the NE is synchronized with the
NTP server through the standard NTP
protocol.
Standard NTP
Authentication
Enable, Disable Disable l This parameter is valid only when
Synchronous Mode is set to Standard
NTP.
l When this parameter is set to Enable, the
NTP authentication is required.
Therefore, the key used for the NTP
authentication should be configured.
Server Enabled ECC Server,
Disable
ECC Server l This parameter is valid only when
Synchronization Mode is set to NTP.
l This parameter indicates whether the NE
functions as the ECC server and provides
NTP service for the ECC communication
between this NE and other NEs.
l If this NE can communicate with the NTP
server over IP but the other NEs that
communicate with this NE over ECC
cannot communicate with the NTP server
over IP, set this parameter to ECC
Server. Otherwise, set this parameter to
Disable.
9-13
Client Enabled l ECC Client, IP
Client, Disable
(when Server
Enabled is set to
ECC Server)
l ECC Client, IP
Client(when
Server Enabled
is set to Disable)
ECC Client l This parameter is valid only when
l When this parameter is set to ECC
Client, the NE is synchronized with the
ECC server of the NTP based on the ECC
communication.
l When this parameter is set to IP Client,
the NE is synchronized with the NTP
server based on the IP communication.
l When the NE can implement
communication directly through IP or the
NTP server, set this parameter to IP
Client. When the NE can communicate
with the ECC server of the NTP over
ECC, set this parameter to ECC Client.
l When the NE functions as the ECC server
and there is no NTP server, set this
parameter to Disable.
Synchronous Server - - l This parameter is valid only when
l To modify this parameter, select this
parameter and then right-click.
l When Client Enabled is set to ECC
Client, this parameter indicates the NE
ID of the ECC server.
l When Client Enabled is set to IP
Client, this parameter indicates the IP
address of the higher level NTP server.
Polling Period (min) 21440 120 l This parameter is valid only when
l This parameter indicates the interval
between the requests sent by the NTP
client.
requirements of the NTP server.
The Number of
Sampling
18 8 l This parameter is valid only when
l This parameter indicates the number of
NTP packets that are sent for obtaining
information required for synchronizing
the time at each request.
requirements of the NTP server.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Synchronization
Starting Time
- - l From Synchronization Starting Time
on, synchronization operations are
conducted every Synchronization
Period(days).
l Set the two parameters according to the
network time synchronization strategy.
Synchronization
Period(days)
1300 1

Table 9-1 Parameters of the standard NTP server
Standard NTP
Server Flag
NE ID, NE IP NE ID l When ECC is used to communicate with
the standard NTP server, set the
parameter to NE ID
l When the IP protocol is used to
communicate with the standard NTP
server, set the parameter to NE IP
Standard NTP
Server
- - Sets the ID or IP address of the standard
NTP server.
Standard NTP
Server Key
01024 1 Indicates the NTP protocol key. 0 indicates
that no key is required.
Standard NTP
Version
2, 3 2 Set this parameter according to the settings
for the standard NTP protocol version used
at the peer end.
Used First Yes, No No Sets whether to select this server
preferentially when multiple NTP servers
are available.

Table 9-2 Parameters of the access control rights
ACL No. 1250 1 Indicates the number of the ACL.
NE Flag NE ID, NE IP NE ID l When ECC is used to communicate with
the standard NTP server, set the
parameter to NE ID
l When the IP protocol is used to
communicate with the standard NTP
server, set the parameter to NE IP
NE - - Sets the ID or IP address of the NE.
9-15
Whether to Receive
Data Packet
Yes, No Yes Sets whether to receive the packet
transmitted from NE.
Right Level query, synchronize,
server, peer
query The device provides four levels of access
control. When an NTP access request is
received on the local equipment, the request
is matched with the levels from the
minimum access limit to the maximum
access limit, and the first matched level is
given. The matching order is as follows:
l peer (minimum access limit): The time
request and the control query can be
carried out for the NTP service of the
local equipment. The local clock can be
synchronized to the remote server as
well.
l server: The time request and the control
query can be carried out for the NTP
service of the local equipment, but the
local clock is not synchronized to the
remote server.
l synchronization: The time query is
allowed for only the NTP service of the
local equipment.
l query (maximum access limit): The
control query can be carried out only for
the NTP service of the local equipment.

Table 9-3 Parameters of the standard NTP key management
Encryption MD5 MD5 Indicates the MD5 key algorithm.
Key 11024 1 Indicates the number of the key.
Password - - Indicates the password of the key.
Trusted Yes, No No If you set this parameter to No, the key is
verified but cannot be trusted during the
clock synchronization. Therefore, the clock
of the NE cannot be synchronized.

9.1.8 Localizing the NE Time
When the daylight saving time (DST) is used in the area where the NE is located, you need to
localize the NE time to synchronize the NE with the local time.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explore. Choose Configuration > NE Time
Localization Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Correctly set the time zone and daylight saving time of the NE depending on the location of the
NE.
Step 3 Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
Parameter Value Default Value Description
Time Zone - - l The change of the time zone results in the
transition of the current NE time.
location of the NE.
DST Enabled, Disabled Disabled l The DST-related parameters are valid
only if this parameter is set to Enabled.
l Set these parameters depending on
whether the location of the NE adopts the
DST.
9-17
DST Rule MM-WW-DD,
MM-DD
MM-WW-DD l When the DST Rule is set to MM-WW-
DD, Start Time and Stop Time of the
DST is set in month-week-day format.
l When the DST Rule is set to MM-DD,
Start Time and Stop Time of the DST is
set in month-day format.
l Set this parameter according to the DST
rule in the location of the NE.
DST Offset - - l Start Time is automatically added with
the DST Offset time according to the
current NE time.
l Stop Time is automatically decreased by
the DST Offset time according to the
current NE time.
l Set the three parameters according to the
DST rule in the location of the NE.
Start Time - -
Stop Time - -

9.2 Configuring Radio Links
Configuring a radio link involves configuring the IF/ODU information of the radio link and the
microwave features such as the XPIC, IF 1+1 protection, IF N+1 protection, and AM.
9.2.1 Creating IF 1+1 Protection
In the case of the IDU 620, if the microwave link adopts 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, you need
to create the corresponding IF 1+1 protection group.
9.2.2 Creating an XPIC Workgroup
When two IFX boards that form an XPIC workgroup are installed on an IDU, you can create an
XPIC workgroup to ensure that the XPIC workgroup is configured with the same work mode,
transmission frequency, TX power, and ATPC attributes.
9.2.3 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link
This section describes how to configure the common IF/ODU information for each radio links
in the SDH/PDH microwave. You can set the IF/ODU information that is frequently used by
the SDH/PDH radio link based on each radio link.
9.2.4 Creating an N+1 Protection Group
When the OptiX RTN 600 transmits two or three STM-1 microwave services in the point-to-
point mode, you can adopt the N+1 protection configuration.
9.2.5 Creating REGs
In the case of the 3+1 protection, you need to configure REGs for the secondary NE.
9.2.6 Configuring the Hybrid/AM Attribute
The Hybrid microwave supports the transmission of E1 services and Ethernet services and
supports the adaptive modulation (AM) function. Hence, the Hybrid microwave ensures the
reliable transmission of the E1 services and flexible transmission of the Ethernet services whose
bandwidth is large and changes dynamically.
9.2.7 Configuring the ATPC Function
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
To configure the ATPC function, set the ATPC attributes of the IF board.
9.2.1 Creating IF 1+1 Protection
In the case of the IDU 620, if the microwave link adopts 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, you need
to create the corresponding IF 1+1 protection group.
Prerequisite
The IF boards and their corresponding ODUs that form the IF 1+1 protection must be included
in the NE Panel.
When a 1+0 service is converted into a 1+1 service by configuring the 1+1 protection, the original
services are not interrupted.
Precautions
The 18,2E1,3.5MHz,QPSK work mode does not support IF 1+1 protection.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Step 2 Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab.
Step 3 Click New.
The system displays the Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box.
Step 4 Set the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection group.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
9-19
Parameters
Protection Group ID 1, 2 - l If only one IF 1+1 protection group is to
be created, it is recommended that you set
Protection Group ID to 1.
l If two IF 1+1 protection groups are to be
created, it is recommended that you set
the Protection Group ID of the
protection group that is formed by the IF
boards in slots 5 and 7 to 1 and the
Protection Group ID of the protection
group that is formed by the IF boards in
slots 6 and 8 to 2.
Working Mode HSB, FD, SD HSB l In the 1+1 HSB protection mode, the
equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby
configuration for the IF board and ODU
at the two ends of each hop of a radio link
to realize the protection.
l In the 1+1 FD protection mode, the
system uses two channels that have a
frequency spacing between them, to
transmit and receive the same signal. The
remote end selects signals from the two
received signals. With the 1+1 FD
protection, the impact of the fading on
signal transmission is reduced.
l In the 1+1 SD protection mode, the
system uses two antennas that have a
space distance between them, to receive
the same signal. The equipment selects
signals from the two received signals.
With the 1+1 SD protection, the impact
of the fading on signal transmission is
reduced.
l The 1+1 FD protection mode and 1+1 SD
protection mode are compatible with the
1+1 HSB switching function.
planning information.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Revertive Mode Revertive, Non-
Revertive
Revertive l When this parameter is set to Revertive,
the NE that is in the switching state
releases the switching and enables the
former working channel to return to the
normal state some time after the former
working channel is restored to normal.
l When this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive, the NE that is in the switching
state keeps the current state unchanged
unless another switching occurs even
though the former working channel is
restored to normal.
default value.
WTR Time (s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter is valid only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
set wait-to-restore (WTR) time, a
revertive switching occurs.
default value.
Enable Reverse
Switching
Enable, Disable Enable l When both the main IF board and the
standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to the
source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
this parameter at the source end is set to
Enable and the reverse switching
conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection
switching occurs at the source end.
l This parameter is valid only when
Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.
l Generally, if Working Mode is set to
HSB, it is recommended that you set this
parameter to Disable; if Working
Mode is set to SD, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to Enable.
Working Board IF ports - l In the 1+1 FD/SD mode, two IF boards
should be installed as a pair in slots 5 and
7 (the IF board in slot 5 is recommended
to be the main board) or in slots 6 and 8
(the IF board in slot 6 is recommended to
be the main board).
l In the 1+1 HSB mode, the IF boards can
be installed in slots 58. It is
9-21
Protection Board
recommended that you install two IF
boards in a pair in slots 5 and 7 (the IF
board in slot 5 is the main board) or in
slots 6 and 8 (the IF board in slot 6 is the
main board).

NOTE
The parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time (s), and Enable Reverse Switching must
be set to the same values at both ends of a radio link hop.
Postrequisite
l In the case of the 1+1 HSB protection and 1+1 SD protection, you need to configure the
IF/ODU information of the active microwave link later. The standby microwave link
automatically copies the related information of the active microwave link except the
transmission status of the ODU.
l In the case of the 1+1 FD protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the
active microwave link and the information of the standby ODU later. The standby
microwave link automatically copies the IF information of the active microwave link.
NOTE
The default TX Status of an ODU is Unmute. Hence, you do not need to configure the TX Status of the standby
ODU after you create an IF 1+1 protection group.
9.2.2 Creating an XPIC Workgroup
When two IFX boards that form an XPIC workgroup are installed on an IDU, you can create an
XPIC workgroup to ensure that the XPIC workgroup is configured with the same work mode,
transmission frequency, TX power, and ATPC attributes.
Prerequisite
The IFX boards and the ODUs to which the IFX boards are connected must be created.
The XPIC Enabled parameter must be set to Enabled (default value) for the IFX boards.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from
the Function Tree.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Step 2 Click the XPIC tab.
Step 3 Click New.
The Create XPIC Protection Group dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Set the parameters for the XPIC workgroup.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Parameters
Polarization
direction-V
IF ports of IFX
boards
- l Polarization direction-V and
Polarization direction-H indicate the IF
ports to which polarization direction V
and polarization direction H correspond
respectively.
l It is recommended that you install the two
IFX boards that form an XPIC workgroup
in the slots that are at the same layer or in
the same column. Set the IF port on the
IFX board that has a smaller slot number
to Polarization direction-V and the IF
port on the other IFX board to
Polarization direction-H.
Polarization
direction-H
Link ID-V 1 to 4094 1 l Link ID-V and Link ID-H indicate the
link IDs to which polarization direction
V and polarization direction H
correspond respectively.
9-23
Link ID-H
l A Link ID is an identifier of a microwave
link and is used to prevent the microwave
links between sites from being wrongly
connected.
l When the Link ID received by an NE is
different from the Link ID set for the NE,
the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm and
inserts the AIS.
l Set these two parameters according to the
planning information. These two
parameters must be set to different
values, but the Link ID-V must be set to
the same value at the two ends of a link
and the Link ID-H must also be set to the
same value at the two ends of a link.
TX Power (dBm) -10.0 to 35.0 0 l The value of this parameter must not
exceed the rated power range supported
by the ODU.
l The TX power of the ODU must be set to
the same value at the two ends of a
microwave link.
Transmission
Frequency (MHz)
0 to 4294967.295 100 l The parameter specifies the channel
center frequency.
l The value of this parameter must not be
less than the sum of the lower TX
frequency limit supported by the ODU
and a half of the channel spacing, and
must not be greater than the difference
between the upper TX frequency limit
supported by the ODU and a half of the
channel spacing.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Transmission Status mute, unmute mute l When Transmission Status is set to
mute, the transmitter of the ODU does
not work but the ODU can normally
receive microwave signals.
l When Transmission Status is set to
unmute, the ODU normally transmits
and receives microwave signals.
l In normal cases, set this parameter to
unmute.
ATPC Enabled Enabled, Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the
ATPC function is enabled. The ATPC
function enables the TX power of a
transmitter to automatically trace the
change of the received signal level (RSL)
at the receive end within the ATPC
control range.
l In the case of areas where fast fading is
severe, it is recommended that you set
this parameter to Disabled.
l During commissioning, set this
parameter to Disabled to ensure that the
TX power is not changed. After the
commissioning, re-set the ATPC
attributes.
ATPC Upper
Threshold (dBm)
-20 to -75 -45 l Set the central value of the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold
so that the central value is equal to the
required value of the receive power.
l Ensure that the difference between values
of the automatic ATPC upper threshold
and the automatic ATPC lower threshold
is not less than 5 dB.
ATPC Lower
Threshold (dBm)
-35 to -90 -70

NOTE
Each of the ATPC parameters must be set to the same value at the two ends of a microwave link.
Postrequisite
Generally, you do not need to configure the IF/ODU information after you configure an XPIC
workgroup. You, however, need to set the T/R spacing used by the ODU in the IF/ODU
Configuration tab page if the used ODU supports two T/R spacings.
9-25
9.2.3 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link
This section describes how to configure the common IF/ODU information for each radio links
in the SDH/PDH microwave. You can set the IF/ODU information that is frequently used by
the SDH/PDH radio link based on each radio link.
Prerequisite
In the case of the IDU 610/620, the IF board and the ODU that connects to the IF board must
be added.
Precautions
l In 1+1 HSB/SD protection mode, one protection group corresponds to one radio link. In
this case, you need configure only the IF/ODU information of the main OptiX RTN 600.
l In 1+1 FD protection mode, one protection group corresponds to one radio link. In this
case, you need configure the IF/ODU information of the main OptiX RTN 600 and the
ODU information of the standby OptiX RTN 600.
l In the case of XPIC radio links, one XPIC workgroup corresponds to two radio links. The
IF/ODU information of the radio links should be configured in the XPIC workgroup.
l In the case of N+1 radio links, one N+1 protection group corresponds to N+1 radio links
and the IF/ODU information of the N+1 radio links should be set respectively.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Step 2 Click IF/ODU Configuration.
Step 3 Click an IF board icon or ODU icon.
Then, the system displays the IF/ODU information of the radio link to which the IF board
belongs.
Step 4 Set the corresponding IF information of the radio link.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Set the corresponding ODU information of the radio link.
Step 7 Click Apply.
NOTE
Click Apply after you set the IF information of the radio link and after you set the ODU information of the radio
link.
----End
9-27
Parameters
Work Mode 1,4E1,7MHz,QPS
K
2,4E1,3.5MHz,
16QAM
3,8E1,14MHz,QPS
K
4,8E1,7MHz,
16QAM
5,16E1,28MHz,QP
SK
6,16E1,14MHz,
16QAM
7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM
8,E3,28MHz,QPS
K
9,E3,14MHz,
16QAM
10,22E1,14MHz,
32QAM
11,26E1,14MHz,
64QAM
12,32E1,14MHz,
128QAM
13,35E1,28MHz,
16QAM
14,44E1,28MHz,
32QAM
15,53E1,28MHz,
64QAM
16,5E1,7MHz,QPS
K
17,10E1,14MHz,Q
PSK
18,2E1,3.5MHz,QP
SK
1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK
(IF1A/B)
5,16E1,28MHz,QP
SK (IF0A/B)
7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM (IFX)
l This parameter indicates the radio work
mode in "work mode, service capacity,
channel spacing, modulation mode"
format.
l The IF1A/IF1B board supports radio
work modes 115 and the IF0A/IF0B
board supports radio work modes 5 and
1618. The IFX board supports radio
work mode 7.
l The IFH2 board of the IDU 620 does not
support the setting of the Work Mode.
planning. The radio work modes of the IF
boards at both the radio link must be the
same.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Link ID 14094 1 l As the identifier of a radio link, this
parameter is used to avoid misconnection
of radio links between sites.
l If this parameter is different from
Received Link ID, the NE reports the
MW_LIM alarm and inserts the AIS into
the downstream.
planning. Each radio link of an NE should
have a unique Link ID, and the Link IDs
at both the ends of a radio link should be
the same.
ATPC Enable Status Enabled, Disabled Disabled l This parameter indicates whether the
function ensures that the TX power of the
transmitter automatically traces the
changes of the RX level at the receive end,
within the ATPC controlled range.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Disabled in areas where fast
fading severely affects the radio
transmission.
l To ensure that the TX power does not
change during the commissioning
process, set this parameter to Disabled.
After the commissioning is complete, you
can set this parameter to another value.
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Enabled, Disabled Enabled l The ATPC function enables the transmit
power of a transmitter to automatically
trace the change of the received signal
level (RSL) at the receive end within the
ATPC control range.
l When the function is enabled, the
manually set ATPC upper and lower
thresholds are invalid. The equipment
automatically uses the preset ATPC upper
and lower thresholds based on the
l When the function is disabled, the
thresholds are used.
9-29
TX Frequency
(MHz)
04294967.295 0.0 l The parameter specifies the channel
center frequency.
l This parameter cannot be set to a value
that is less than the minimum TX
frequency supported by the ODU + 50%
channel spacing or more than the
maximum TX frequency supported by the
ODU - 50% channel spacing.
l The difference between the TX
frequencies of both the ends of a radio link
is a T/R spacing.
planning.
TX Power (dBm) -10.0 to +35.0 -10.0 l This parameter cannot be set to a value
that exceeds the nominal power range
supported by the ODU.
l The TX power of the ODU should be set
to the same value at both the ends of a
radio link.
planning.
T/R Spacing (MHz) 04294967.295 0.0 l This parameter indicates the spacing
between the TX frequency and receive
frequency of the ODU. If Station Type of
the ODU is TX high, the TX frequency is
one T/R spacing higher than the receive
power. If Station Type of the ODU is TX
low, the TX frequency is one T/R spacing
lower than the receive power.
l If the ODU supports only one T/R
spacing, set this parameter to 0, indicating
that the T/R spacing supported by the
ODU is used.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be
set to the same value at both the ends of a
radio link.
TX Status mute, unmute unmute l When this parameter is set to mute, the
transmitter of the ODU does not work but
the ODU can normally receive
microwave signals.
l When this parameter is set to unmute, the
ODU can normally receive and transmit
microwave signals.
l Generally, this parameter takes the
default value.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)

NOTE
The ATPC attributes at both the ends of a radio link should be set to the same.
9.2.4 Creating an N+1 Protection Group
When the OptiX RTN 600 transmits two or three STM-1 microwave services in the point-to-
point mode, you can adopt the N+1 protection configuration.
Prerequisite
The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be created.
The STM-1 optical/electrical interface boards (only in the case of the primary NE that is to be
configured with 3+1 protection) must be created.
The IF boards must work in the STM-1 mode.
When an N+0 service is converted into an N+1 service by configuring the N+1 protection, the
original services are not interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Function Tree and then choose Configuration >
Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the N+1 Protection tab.
Step 2 Click Create.
The system displays the Create an N+1 Protection Group dialog box.
Step 3 Set the attributes of the N+1 protection group.
Step 4 Set the slot mapping relation.
1. In Select Mapping direction, select Working Unit.
2. In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which a working channel corresponds and
click .
3. Repeat Step 4.2 to select the line ports to which other working channels correspond.
4. In Select Mapping direction, select Protection Unit.
5. In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the protection channel corresponds
and click .
9-31
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Parameters
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l When the time after the former working
default value.
SD enable Enabled, Disabled Enabled l When SD enable is set to Enabled, the
B2_SD alarm is considered as a
switching condition.
default value.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Slot Mapping
Relation
- - l In the case of 2+1 protection, map two IF
ports as Working Unit and map the
remaining IF port as Protection Unit.
l In the case of the 3+1 protection, it is
recommended that you map the two IF
ports and the first line port of the STM-1
optical/electrical interface board that is
connected to the secondary NE as
Working Unit, and map the other line
port as Protection Unit.

NOTE
The N+1 protection groups of the equipment at both ends must have the same attributes.
9.2.5 Creating REGs
In the case of the 3+1 protection, you need to configure REGs for the secondary NE.
Prerequisite
The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be created.
The STM-1 optical/electrical interface board that is connected to the primary NE must be created.
The IF boards must work in the STM-1 mode.
Context
In the case of the 3+1 protection, you need to two configure REGs for the secondary NE.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > REG
The system displays the Create REG dialog box.
Step 3 Set the SD Enabled parameter.
1. In Slot Mapping Direction, select West Line.
2. In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the west line corresponds and click
.
3. In Slot Mapping Direction, select East Line.
9-33
4. In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the east line corresponds and click
.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 Repeat Step 2 to Step 5, Create another REG.
----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameters
SD Enabled Enabled, Disabled Enabled l When this parameter is set to Enabled,
the REG inserts an MS-AIS alarm when
a B2_SD alarm is generated.
default value.
Slot Mapping
Relation
- - It is recommended that you map the IF port
as West Line and the port of the STM-1
optical/electrical interface board as East
Line.

9.2.6 Configuring the Hybrid/AM Attribute
The Hybrid microwave supports the transmission of E1 services and Ethernet services and
supports the adaptive modulation (AM) function. Hence, the Hybrid microwave ensures the
reliable transmission of the E1 services and flexible transmission of the Ethernet services whose
bandwidth is large and changes dynamically.
Prerequisite
The IDU 620 supports the Hybrid/AM function. The IFH2 board is used as the Hybrid IF board.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the target Hybrid IF board in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration > Hybrid/
AM Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query.
Step 3 Set the parameters related to the Hybrid/AM function.
NOTE
To set the Hybrid IF board to work in super PDH mode of 40M/64QAM, do as follows:
1. Set AM Enable Status to Disable. Set Manually Specified Modulation Mode to 64QAM. Click
Apply.
2. Set IF Channel Bandwidth to 40M. Click Apply.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
9-35
Parameters
IF Channel
Bandwidth
In the case of the
IFH2 board of
the IDU 620:
l 7M
l 14M
l 28M
l 40M
l 56M
7M IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the channel
spacing of the corresponding radio links. Set this
parameter to the planned value.
NOTE
Only the combination of the IF Channel Bandwidth of
40M and the modulation mode of 64QAM forms the
super PDH mode. The super PDH mode does not support
the AM function.
AM Mode Asymmetric - When this parameter is set to Asymmetric, an AM
switching in one direction of the radio link (when
the conditions for triggering the AM switching are
met) does not cause an AM switching in the other
AM Enable Status l Disable
l Enable
- l When this parameter is set to Disable, the radio
link uses the specified modulation scheme only.
In this case, you need to select Manually
Specified Modulation Mode.
l When this parameter is set to Enable, the radio
link uses the corresponding modulation scheme
according to the channel conditions.
Hence, the Hybrid microwave can ensure the
reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide
dynamic bandwidth for the Ethernet services when
the AM function is enabled.
Modulation Mode
of the Assured AM
Capacity
l QPSK
l 16QAM
l 32QAM
l 64QAM
l 128QAM
l 256QAM
QPSK This parameter specifies the lowest modulation
scheme that the AM function supports. Set this
parameter to the planned value. Generally, the value
of this parameter is determined by the service
transmission bandwidth that the Hybrid microwave
must ensure and the availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
This parameter is valid only when AM Enable
Status is set to Enable.
Modulation Mode
of the Full AM
Capacity
l QPSK
l 16QAM
l 32QAM
l 64QAM
l 128QAM
l 256QAM
128QAM This parameter specifies the highest modulation
scheme that the AM function supports. Set this
parameter to the planned value. Generally, the value
of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of
the services that need to be transmitted over the
Hybrid microwave and the availability of the radio
link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
Status is set to Enable.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Manually Specified
Modulation Mode
l QPSK
l 16QAM
l 32QAM
l 64QAM
l 128QAM
l 256QAM
- This parameter specifies the modulation scheme
that the radio link uses for the transmission.
Status is set to Disable.
E1 Capacity 175 - This parameter specifies the number of E1 services
that can be transmitted in the Hybrid work mode.
The value of this parameter cannot exceed the
maximum number of E1 services permitted in
Assured E1 Capacity.
E1 Capacity must be set to the same value at both
ends of a radio link.

9.2.7 Configuring the ATPC Function
To configure the ATPC function, set the ATPC attributes of the IF board.
Prerequisite
The related IF board must be added.
Precautions
l In the case of the IF boards that are configured with the 1+1 protection, set only the ATPC
attributes of the main IF board.
l The following procedure describes the configuration of ATPC parameters in the IF interface
configuration dialog box of the IF board. You can also set ATPC parameters in the following
configuration dialog boxes:
Create an XPIC working group
IF/ODU configuration
NOTE
In the IF/ODU configuration dialog box, the ATPC adjustment thresholds cannot be modified.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the IF board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF
Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the ATPC Attributes tab.
Step 3 Set the ATPC attributes.
9-37
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
ATPC Enable Status Enabled, Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the
function enables the transmit power of a
transmitter to automatically trace the
change of the received signal level (RSL)
at the receive end within the ATPC
control range.
l In the case of areas where fast fading is
severe, it is recommended that you set
this parameter to Disabled.
ATPC Upper
Threshold (dBm)
-20 to -75 -45 l Set the central value of the ATPC upper
ATPC Lower
Threshold (dBm)
-35 to -90 -70
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Enabled, Disabled Enabled l The ATPC function enables the transmit
power of a transmitter to automatically
trace the change of the received signal
level (RSL) at the receive end within the
ATPC control range.
automatically uses the preset ATPC
upper and lower thresholds based on the

Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
NOTE
l Each of the ATPC parameters must be set to the same value at the two ends of a microwave link.
l During commissioning, set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not
changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes.
9.3 Configuring MSP
The MSP includes the ring MSP and linear MSP.
9.3.1 Configuring the Ring MSP
If a ring network formed by STM-4 fibers is used and the services are discrete services, you can
configure the ring MSP.
9.3.2 Creating Linear MSP
To protect the services carried by the optical fibers or STM-1e cables between two nodes,
configure the linear MSP.
9.3.1 Configuring the Ring MSP
If a ring network formed by STM-4 fibers is used and the services are discrete services, you can
configure the ring MSP.
Prerequisite
The boards where the working unit and the protection unit are located must be configured.
When an unprotected service is converted into a ring MSP service by configuring the ring MSP,
the original services are not interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ring MS from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New.
A prompt is displayed, indicating that the service that is configured in the protection timeslot is
changed to an extra service.
Step 3 Click OK.
The system displays the Create a Ring Multiplex Section dialog box.
Step 4 Set the attributes of the ring MSP protection group according to the networking plan.
1. Set Local Node, West Node, and East Node according to the networking plan.
2. In Select Mapping Direction, select West Line 1.
9-39
3. In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the working channel corresponds
and click .
4. In Select Mapping Direction, select East Line 1.
and click .
Step 6 Click OK.
----End
Parameters
Level STM-4 STM-4 The value is always set to STM-4.
Protection Type 2-fiber Bidirectional
Multiplex Section
2-fiber Bidirectional
Multiplex Section
The value is always set to 2-fiber
Bidirectional Multiplex Section.
Local Node 0 to 15 0 l This parameter specifies the node ID
allocated to the local NE.
l The node ID of each NE must be unique.
West Node 0 to 15 0 This parameter specifies the node ID that is
allocated to the NE to which the west line
board of the local NE is connected.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
East Node 0 to 15 0 This parameter specifies the node ID that is
allocated to the NE to which the east line
board of the local NE is connected.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l When the time after the former working
set value of this parameter, a revertive
switching occurs.
default value.
default value.
Protocol Type New Protocol,
Restructure Protocol
New Protocol l The new protocol is more mature than the
restructure protocol but the restructure
protocol is in better compliance with the
standards than the new protocol.
l It is recommended that you select the new
protocol. When the OptiX equipment is
interconnected with the third-party
equipment, select the restructure protocol
if an interconnection problem occurs
when the new protocol is adopted.
Slot Mapping
Relation
- - It is recommended that you map the line port
of the SL4 board in slot 6 as West Line 1
and map the line port of the SL4 board in
slot 8 as East Line 1.
Map as VC4 Selected, Not
selected
Not selected l If you select Map as VC4, the VC-4 is
considered as the unit of the settings in
the slot mapping relation.
default value.

NOTE
The protection groups of the NEs that form a ring multiplex section must be set with the same attributes except
Local Node, West Node, and East Node.
Postrequisite
In the case of a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring, you need to configure bidirectional cross-
connections between the services and the timeslots of the working channel (the first half of the
timeslots of the line port) later. If extra services need to be transmitted, you need to configure
9-41
bidirectional cross-connections between the extra services and the timeslots of the protection
channel (the second half of the timeslots of the line port).
9.3.2 Creating Linear MSP
To protect the services carried by the optical fibers or STM-1e cables between two nodes,
configure the linear MSP.
Prerequisite
The boards where the working unit and the protection unit are located must be configured.
When an unprotected service is converted into a linear MSP service by configuring the linear
MSP, the original services are not interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS
The system displays the Create a Linear Multiplex Section dialog box.
Step 3 Set the attributes of the linear MSP group.
NOTE
When Protection Type is set to 1:N Protection. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the service that is
configured in the protection timeslot is changed to an extra service.
1. In Select Mapping direction, select West Working Unit.
2. In Select Mapping Mode, select the line port to which the working channel corresponds
and click .
3. In Select Mapping direction, select West Protection Unit.
and click .
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Parameters
Protection Type 1+1 Protection, 1:N
Protection
1+1 Protection l In the single-ended mode, if the services
on the working channels in a certain
direction need to be switched, only the
services on the working channels in the
direction are switched to the protection
channels.
l In the dual-ended mode, the services on
the working channels in two directions
are switched to the protection channels.
l When Revertive Mode is set to
state releases the switching and enables
the former working channel to return to
the normal state some time after the
former working channel is restored to
normal.
l When Revertive Mode is set to Non-
Switching Mode l Single-Ended
Switching, Dual-
Ended Switching
(1+1 protection)
l Dual-Ended
Switching (1:N
protection)
l Single-Ended
Switching (1+1
protection)
l Dual-Ended
Switching (1:N
protection)
9-43
Revertive Mode l Non-Revertive,
Revertive (1+1
protection)
l Revertive (1:N
protection)
l Non-Revertive (1
+1 protection)
l Revertive (1:N
protection)
restored to normal.
l When extra services need to be
transmitted or several working channels
exist, select 1:N protection.
l In the case of other situations, it is
recommended that you select the 1+1
single-ended and non-revertive mode.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter is valid only when
default value.
default value.
Protocol Type New Protocol,
Restructure Protocol
New Protocol l The new protocol is more mature than the
restructure protocol but the restructure
protocol is in better compliance with the
standards than the new protocol.
l It is recommended that you select the new
protocol. When the OptiX equipment is
interconnected with the third-party
equipment, select the restructure protocol
if an interconnection problem occurs
when the new protocol is adopted.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
SD/SF PRI
Switching Tag
High priority, Low
priority
High priority l When this parameter is set to High
priority, "1101" and "1011" are used as
an SF/SD switching request.
l When this parameter is set to Low
priority, "1100" and "1010" are used as
an SF/SD switching request.
default value.
Switching Mode
Indication
Not indicated,
Indicated
l Not indicated (1
+1 protection)
l Indicated (1:N
protection)
l When this parameter is set to Indicated,
the MSP protocol uses K2 (bit 6 to bit 8)
to indicate the switching mode (that is,
uses code "100" to indicate the single-
ended mode and code "101" to indicate
the dual-ended mode).
l When this parameter is set to Not
indicated, the MSP protocol does not
indicate the switching mode.
default value.
Slot Mapping
Relation
- - l In the case of 1+1 protection, only one
line port can be mapped as West
Working Unit; in the case of 1:N
protection, a maximum of three line ports
can be mapped as West Working Unit.
l Only one line port can be mapped as West
Protection Unit.
l Ensure that the line port that is mapped as
West Protection Unit and the line port
that is mapped as West Working Unit
are not on the same board, if possible.

NOTE
Ensure that the MSP groups of the equipment at both ends of the linear multiplex section are set with the same
attributes.
Postrequisite
l In the case of the 1:N linear MSP, you need to configure bidirectional cross-connections
between the services and the working channels later. If extra services need to be transmitted,
it is necessary to configure bidirectional cross-connections between the extra services and
the protection channels.
l In the case of the 1+1 linear MSP, you need to configure unidirectional cross-connections
between the services and the protection channels, in addition to configuring the
bidirectional cross-connections between the services and the working channels.
9-45
9.4 Configuring SDH/PDH Services (NE Configuration)
The SDH/PDH services are classified into point-to-point services and SNCP services according
to the cross-connection mode.
9.4.1 Numbering Schemes for SDH Timeslots
Two numbering schemes for VC-12 timeslots are applicable to SDH optical/electrical lines or
SDH radio links.
9.4.2 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services
In a cross-connection of point-to-point services, one service source corresponds to one service
sink.
9.4.3 Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP Services
The cross-connection of SNCP services is a cross-connection that a working source and a
protection source correspond to a service sink.
9.4.4 Setting the Automatic Switching Conditions of SNCP Services
In the case of the SNCP services at the VC-4 level, you can set certain alarms as the automatic
switching conditions.
9.4.5 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a Service
When a service is not used, you can delete the cross-connections of this service to release the
corresponding resources.
9.4.6 Converting Normal Services into SNCP Services
After converting the normal services into the SNCP services, you can convert the unidirectional
cross-connection of the normal services into the unidirectional cross-connection in the receive
direction of the SNCP services.
9.4.7 Converting SNCP Services into Normal Services
After converting the SNCP services into the normal services, you can convert the SNCP cross-
connection in the receive direction into the unidirectional cross-connection of the normal
services.
9.4.1 Numbering Schemes for SDH Timeslots
Two numbering schemes for VC-12 timeslots are applicable to SDH optical/electrical lines or
SDH radio links.
VC-12 Timeslot Numbering
Two numbering schemes are applicable to SDH optical/electrical lines or SDH radio links when
you create cross-connections.
l By order
This timeslot numbering scheme is also considered as timeslot scheme, where the
numbering formula is as follows: VC-12 number = TUG-3 number + (TUG-2 number - 1)
x 3 + (TU-12 number -1) x 21.
This scheme is the numbering scheme recommended by ITU-T G.707, which is the default
scheme adopted by the OptiX equipment.
l Interleaved scheme
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
This timeslot numbering scheme is also considered as line scheme, where the numbering
formula is as follows: VC-12 number = (TUG-3 number - 1) x 21 + (TUG-2 number -1) x
3 + TU-12 number.
The OptiX equipment can adopt this scheme when it interconnects with the equipment that
adopts the interleaved scheme or when specific timeslot numbering scheme is required.
Figure 9-1 Numbering VC-12 timeslots by order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1
1 2
3
1
2 2
3
1
3 2
3
{
{
{
TUG-2
TUG-3 TU-12
1 4 7 10 13 16 19
22 25 28 31 34 37 40
43 46 49 52 55 58 61
2 5 8 11 14 17 20
23 26 29 32 35 38 41
44 47 50 53 56 59 62
3 6 9 12 15 18 21
24 27 30 33 36 39 42
45 48 51 54 57 60 63

Figure 9-2 Numbering VC-12 timeslots in the interleaved scheme
{
{
{
TUG-2
TUG-3 TU-12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1
1 2
3
1
2 2
3
1
3 2
3
1 4 7 10 13 16 19
2 5 8 11 14 17 20
3 6 9 12 15 18 21
22 25 28 31 34 37 40
23 26 29 32 35 38 41
24 27 30 33 36 39 42
43 46 49 52 55 58 61
44 47 50 53 56 59 62
45 48 51 54 57 60 63

VC-3 Timeslot Numbering
A VC-3 timeslot number corresponds to a TUG-3 number. If you need to configure VC-3 cross-
connections and VC-12 cross-connections in a VC-4 path at the same time, note that the timeslots
in the TUG-3 that are occupied by the VC-3 cross-connections cannot be configured for VC-12
cross-connections.
9-47
9.4.2 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services
In a cross-connection of point-to-point services, one service source corresponds to one service
sink.
Prerequisite
l The source and sink boards must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Cross-
Step 2 Optional: Click Scheme to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering scheme used for the cross-
connections.
Step 3 Click New.
Then, the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Configure the cross-connections of the service.
Step 5 Click OK.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
NOTE
l When you create a cross-connection whose source or sink is the timeslots of an IF board, the creation may
fail due to the limited number of licenses.
l The calculation of the required number of licenses is based on the total number of service timeslots of all
the IF boards that are involved in cross-connections. In the case of the cross-connections of VC-3 or VC-4
services, the VC-3 or VC-4 services need to be converted into E1 services that have the same capacity. For
example, the cross-connections of one E3 service from a PL3 board to an IF board require the number of
licenses that are used for 21xE1. One VC-3 pass-through service between two IF boards requires the number
of licenses that are used for 42xE1. The 8xE1 SNCP services from two IF boards to one PO1 board require
the number of licenses that are used for 16xE1.
----End
Parameters
Level VC12/VC3/VC4 VC12 l This parameter indicates the level of the
cross-connections.
l In the case of E1 services or data services
in bound VC-12 paths, set this parameter
to VC12.
l In the case of E3/T3 services or data
services in bound VC-3 paths, set this
parameter to VC3.
l If all the services in a VC-4 path are
passed through the NE, set this parameter
to VC4.
Direction Unidirectional,
Bidirectional
Bidirectional l When this parameter is set to
Unidirectional, create the cross-
connections from the service source to
the service sink only.
l When this parameter is set to
Bidirectional, create the cross-
connections from the service source to
the service sink and from the service sink
to the service source.
parameter to Bidirectional.
Source - - Sets the slot of the source service.
Source VC4 - - This parameter indicates the number of the
VC-4 path where the service source is
located.
9-49
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,36)
- - l This parameter indicates the timeslot
range corresponding to the service
source.
l This parameter can be set to a value or
multiple values. When this parameter is
set to multiples values, use "," to separate
each value and use "" to indicate
sequential numbers. For example, "1,3
6" indicates 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l If the IF board works in the PDH mode,
E1s/E3s 1n transmitted over radio
correspond to VC-12/VC-3 timeslots 1
n. Ports 1n of E1 interface boards and
E3/T3 interface boards correspond to
VC-12/VC-3 timeslots 1n.
l The E1s 175 transmitted on the IFH2
board correspond to the 163 VC-12
timeslots of the first VC-4 and the 112
VC-12 timeslots of the second VC-4.
Sink - - Sets the solt of the sink service.
Sink Port - - This parameter indicates the port where the
service sink is located.
Sink VC4 - - This parameter indicates the number of the
VC-4 path where the service sink is located.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,36)
- - l This parameter indicates the timeslot
range corresponding to the service sink.
l This parameter can be set to a value or
multiple values. When this parameter is
set to multiples values, use "," to separate
each value and use "" to indicate
sequential numbers. For example, "1,3
6" indicates 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l If the IF board works in the PDH mode,
E1s/E3s 1n transmitted over radio
correspond to VC-12/VC-3 timeslots 1
n. Ports 1n of E1 interface boards and
E3/T3 interface boards correspond to
VC-12/VC3 timeslots 1n.
l The E1s 175 transmitted on the IFH2
board correspond to the 163 VC-12
timeslots of the first VC-4 and the 112
VC-12 timeslots of the second VC-4.

Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
9.4.3 Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP Services
The cross-connection of SNCP services is a cross-connection that a working source and a
protection source correspond to a service sink.
Prerequisite
The boards where the source and the sink are must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > Cross-
Step 2 Optional: Click Scheme to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-
connection.
Step 3 Click Create SNCP.
The system displays the Create SNCP Service dialog box.
Step 4 Set the attributes of the SNCP protection group and the slot mapping relation of the SNCP
service.
9-51
Step 5 Click OK.
NOTE
l When you create a cross-connection whose source or sink is the timeslots of an IF board, the creation may
fail due to the limited number of licenses.
l The calculation of the required number of licenses is based on the total number of service timeslots of all
the IF boards that are involved in cross-connections. In the case of the cross-connections of VC-3 or VC-4
services, the VC-3 or VC-4 services need to be converted into E1 services that have the same capacity. For
example, the cross-connections of one E3 service from a PL3 board to an IF board require the number of
licenses that are used for 21xE1. One VC-3 pass-through service between two IF boards requires the number
of licenses that are used for 42xE1. The 8xE1 SNCP services from two IF boards to one PO1 board require
the number of licenses that are used for 16xE1.
----End
Parameters
Service Type SNCP SNCP -
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Level VC12, VC3, VC4 VC12 l Specifies the level of the cross-
connection to be created.
l If the service is an E1 service or a data
service that is bound with VC-12 paths,
set this parameter to VC12.
l If the service is an E3/T3 service or a data
service that is bound with VC-3 paths, set
this parameter to VC3.
l If all the services in a VC-4 pass through
the NE, set this parameter to VC4.
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive,
Revertive
restored to normal.
parameter to Revertive.
Bidirectional
Unidirectional l When this parameter is set to
Unidirectional, only the cross-
connections in the SNCP receive
direction are created.
Bidirectional, both the cross-
connections in the SNCP receive
direction and the cross-connections in the
SNCP transmit direction are created.
parameter to Bidirectional.
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0 to 100 0 l When a line fault occurs, an NE can
perform SNCP switching after a delay of
time to prevent the situation where the
NE performs SNCP switching and other
protection switching at the same time.
This parameter specifies the duration of
the delay.
default value because the SNCP cannot
co-exist with other protection switching
modes in the OptiX RTN 600.
9-53
default value.
Source Slot - - Indicates the source slot of the service.
Source Port - - Specifies the port where the service source
exists.
Source VC4 - - Specifies the number of the VC-4 where the
service source exists.
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
- - l Specifies the timeslot range to which the
service source corresponds.
l You can set this parameter to a number or
several numbers. When you set this
parameter to several numbers, use "," to
separate these discrete values and use "-"
to indicate continuous numbers. For
example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3,
4, 5, and 6.
l In the case of an IF board that works in
the PDH mode, the first to the nth E1s/
E3s transmitted by microwaves
correspond to the first to the nth VC-12/
VC-3 timeslots respectively. Similarly,
the first to the nth ports of an E1 interface
board or an E3/T3 interface board
VC-3 timeslots respectively.
Sink Slot - - Indicates the sink slot of the service.
Sink Port - - Specifies the port where the service sink
exists.
Sink VC4 - - Specifies the number of the VC-4 where the
service sink exists.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
service sink corresponds.
separate these discrete values and use "-"
example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1, 3,
4, 5, and 6.

Postrequisite
If Direction is set to Unidirectional, the cross-connection only in the SNCP receive direction
is created. Hence, you need to configure a unidirectional cross-connection between the service
and the working trail, and later, a unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the
protection trail.
9.4.4 Setting the Automatic Switching Conditions of SNCP Services
In the case of the SNCP services at the VC-4 level, you can set certain alarms as the automatic
switching conditions.
Prerequisite
An SNCP protection group at the VC-4 level must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service
Control from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the SNCP protection group. Double-click Initiation Condition to which the working
service corresponds.
The system displays the Initiation Condition dialog box.
Step 3 Select SD switching conditions. Then, click OK.
9-55
Step 4 Select the SNCP protection group. Double-click Initiation Condition to which the protection
service corresponds.
The system displays the Initiation Condition dialog box.
Step 5 Repeat Step 3.
Step 6 Click Apply.
The system displays a prompt box asking you whether to carry out the switching.
Step 7 Click Yes.
----End
Parameters
HPUNEQ Selected, Not
selected
Not selected l When this item is selected, the SNCP
service considers the HP_UNEQ alarm as
an SD switching condition.
default value.
HPTIM Selected, Not
selected
service considers the HP_TIM alarm as
default value.
B3SD Selected, Not
selected
service considers the B3_SD alarm as an
SD switching condition.
default value.
B3EXC Selected, Not
selected
service considers the B3_EXC alarm as
default value.

NOTE
It is recommended that you set Initiation Condition of the working service to be the same as Initiation
Condition of the protection service.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
9.4.5 Deleting the Cross-Connections of a Service
When a service is not used, you can delete the cross-connections of this service to release the
corresponding resources.
Prerequisite
The cross-connections of the service must be configured and the service is not be used.
Procedure
Step 2 Click Query.
Step 3 Select the cross-connection of the SNCP service that needs to be deleted in Cross-
Connection.
Step 4 Click Delete.
Then, a dialog box is displayed. Click OK.
Step 5 Click Query.
At this time, the cross-connection of the SNCP service is already deleted.
----End
9.4.6 Converting Normal Services into SNCP Services
After converting the normal services into the SNCP services, you can convert the unidirectional
cross-connection of the normal services into the unidirectional cross-connection in the receive
direction of the SNCP services.
Prerequisite
The unidirectional cross-connection of normal services must be configured and the source of
the cross-connection must be a line board.
When this task is performed to convert a normal service into an SNCP service, the original
Procedure
9-57
Step 2 Select the bidirectional cross-connection of the normal service in Cross-connection. Then,
right-click and choose Expand from the shortcut menu.
Step 3 Select the unidirectional cross-connection of the normal service in Cross-connection. Then,
right-click and choose Convert to SNCP from the shortcut menu.
Then, the Convert to SNCP service dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Set the attributes of the SNCP protection group and the slot mapping relation of the SNCP
service.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameters
Revertive
restored to normal.
parameter to Revertive.
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0 to 100 0 l When a line fault occurs, an NE can
perform SNCP switching after a delay of
time to prevent the situation where the
NE performs SNCP switching and other
protection switching at the same time.
This parameter specifies the duration of
the delay.
default value because the SNCP cannot
co-exist with other protection switching
modes in the OptiX RTN 600.
default value.
Source - - Indicates the source slot of the service.
Source Port - - Specifies the port where the service source
exists.
Source VC4 - - Specifies the number of the VC-4 where the
service source exists.
9-59
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
service source corresponds.
separate these discrete values and use ""
example, "1, 36" indicates numbers 1, 3,
4, 5, and 6.
Sink - - Indicates the sink slot of the service.
Sink Port - - Specifies the port where the service sink
exists.
Sink VC4 - - Specifies the number of the VC-4 where the
service sink exists.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
service sink corresponds.
4, 5, and 6.

Postrequisite
The SNCP service after the conversion is the SNCP service only in the receive direction. Later,
you need to configure a unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the working
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
trail, and a unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the protection trail. The
normal service can be converted into the SNCP service both in the receive direction and the
transmit direction only after the configuration.
9.4.7 Converting SNCP Services into Normal Services
After converting the SNCP services into the normal services, you can convert the SNCP cross-
connection in the receive direction into the unidirectional cross-connection of the normal
services.
Prerequisite
The current service is transmitted in the working path.
The SNCP cross-connection in the receive direction must be configured.
When this task is performed to convert an SNCP service into a normal service, the original
Procedure
Step 2 In the Auto-Created Cross-Connection pane, select the cross-connection and click To
Normal.
Step 3 In the Auto-Created Cross-Connection pane, select the cross-connection. Right-click and
choose Change to Normal Service from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 Choose Working or Protection from the displayed menu.
l To convert the cross-connection into a cross-connection between the working source and
the service sink, choose Working.
l To convert the cross-connection into a cross-connection between the protection source and
the service sink, choose Protection.
----End
Postrequisite
You need to delete the unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the working path
or the unidirectional cross-connection between the service and the protection path. The SNCP
service can be converted into the normal service both in the receive direction and the transmit
direction only after the deletion.
9.5 Configuring the Clock
This topic describes how to configure the clock. In a digital transmission network, all the
transmission nodes must be synchronized. Otherwise, buffer overflow or exhaustion of the signal
9-61
bits generated at the transmission nodes causes sliding damage to the digital flow, thus resulting
in data errors. To ensure time synchronization, configure the clock for each NE. In the case of
a complex network, configure clock protection at the same time.
9.5.1 Clock Synchronization Scheme
This section describes the clock synchronization schemes. You need choose the clock
synchronization scheme for the OptiX RTN 600 (based on IDU 610/620) according to the actual
networking architecture.
9.5.2 Configuring the Clock Sources
This topic describes how to configure the clock source according to the planned the clock
synchronization scheme, thus ensuring that all the NEs in a network trace the same clock.
9.5.3 Configuring Protection for Clock Sources
This section describes how to configure protection for clock sources. In the case of simple
networks such as chain networks, you need not configure protection for the clock sources. The
clock sources are protected according to the clock source priority table. In the case of complex
clock networks such as ring networks or tangent rings and intersecting rings deriving from ring
networks, protection for the clock sources need to be implemented through the standard SSM
protocol or extended SSM protocol.
9.5.4 Modifying the Parameters of the External Clock Output
The NE outputs the 2 Mbit/s external clock regardless of the clock quality.
9.5.5 Customizing the Clock Parameters
In certain situations, the user need modify the default switching conditions or self-defined quality
of the clock sources.
9.5.1 Clock Synchronization Scheme
This section describes the clock synchronization schemes. You need choose the clock
synchronization scheme for the OptiX RTN 600 (based on IDU 610/620) according to the actual
networking architecture.
Clock Synchronization Scheme for a Chain/Tree Network
The clock synchronization schemes for chain/tree networks are as follows:
l If the main (first) node accesses a clock source (external clock or line clock), configure this
clock source for this node.
l Configure the clock source of the higher-level radio link for other nodes.
l When the higher-level radio link adopts 1+1 protection, configure two clock sources for
the corresponding node. Note that the clock source priority of the main radio link should
be higher than the clock source priority of the standby radio link.
l When multiple higher-level radio links exist, (for example, when the radio link is
configured with XPIC or N+1 protection), the node configures a microwave clock source
for each radio link and allocates different clock priority levels based on the situation of
each radio link.
l Do not configure the synchronization status message (SSM) or extended SSM protection.
Figure 9-3 shows the clock synchronization scheme of a chain network.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
l The PXC board in slot 1 on the main node NE1 accesses the external clock source. Hence,
the clock source priority levels are external clock source 1 and internal clock source in the
descending order.
l The IF1A boards in slots 5 and 7 on NE2 form an IF 1+1 protection group (the board in
slot 5 is the main board) and provide the radio link from NE1 to NE2. Hence, the clock
source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1, 7-IF1A-1, and internal clock source in the
descending order.
l The IF1A board in slot 5 on NE2 provides the radio link from NE3 to NE2. Hence, the
clock source level priority levels are 5-IF1A-1 and internal clock source in the descending
order.
order.
l Do not configure the SSM or extended SSM protection.
Figure 9-3 Clock synchronization scheme for a chain network
External 1/
Internal
5-IF1A-1/
7-IF1A-1/
Internal
5-IF1A-1/
Internal
NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4
Master clock
5-IF1A-1/
Internal

Figure 9-4 shows the clock synchronization scheme of a tree network.
l The SL1 board in slot 4 on NE1 accesses the line clock source. Hence, the clock source
level priority levels are 4-SL1-1 and internal clock source in the descending order.
l The IFX boards in slots 5 and 7 on NE2 form an XPIC workgroup (the IFX board in slot
5 works on polarization V and the IFX board in slot 7 is works on polarization H) and
provide the radio link from NE1 to NE2. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are
5-IF1A-1, 7-IF1A-1, and internal clock source in the descending order.
order.
order.
9-63
Figure 9-4 Clock synchronization scheme for a tree network
4-SL1-1/
Internal
5-IFX-1/
7-IFX-1/
Internal
5-IF1A-1/
Internal
NE1 NE2
NE3
NE4
Master clock
5-IF1A-1/
Internal

Clock Synchronization Scheme for a Ring Network
The clock synchronization schemes for a ring network formed by the OptiX RTN 600 equipment
only or formed by the OptiX RTN 600 equipment and other OptiX equipment are as follows:
l When the entire ring network line is an SDH line, set the SSM or extended SSM according
to the clock synchronization schemes of an optical transmission network.
l When a PDH section exists on the line of the ring network, divide the ring network into
two chains and set the synchronization according to the clock synchronization schemes of
a chain network.
Figure 9-5 shows the clock synchronization scheme of a ring network of which the entire ring
network line is an SDH line.
l The SSM or extended SSM protection is enabled on all the nodes in the ring network.
descending order.
l The clock source priority levels of other nodes are the west clock source, east clock source,
and internal clock source in the descending order.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Figure 9-5 Clock synchronization scheme for a ring network (the entire ring network line is an
SDH line)
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
NE5
NE6
External 1/
Internal
West/
East/
Internal
Master clock
West/
East/
Internal
West/
East/
Internal
West/
East/
Internal
West/
East/
Internal

Figure 9-6 shows the clock synchronization scheme of a ring network of which not the entire
ring network line is an SDH line.
l This ring network is formed by PDH microwave. Hence, divide the ring network at the
main node NE1 into two chains: from NE1 to NE2 and from NE3 to NE4.
l The SL1 board in slot 4 on NE1 accesses the line clock source. Hence, the clock source
level priority levels are 4-SL1-1 and internal clock source in the descending order.
l NE2 traces the clock of the main node. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are the
west clock source and internal clock source in the descending order.
l NE4 traces the clock of the main node. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are the
east clock source and internal clock source in the descending order.
l NE3 traces the clock of NE4. Hence, the clock source level priority levels are the east clock
source and internal clock source in the descending order.
9-65
Figure 9-6 Clock synchronization scheme for a ring network (not the entire ring network line
is an SDH line)
4-SL1-1/
Internal
East/
Internal
West/
Internal
East/
Internal
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
Master clock

Clock Synchronization Scheme for Networking with Convergence at Tributary
Ports
Networking with convergence at tributary ports indicates that several OptiX RTN 600 NEs are
converged to the higher-level OptiX RTN NE through the E1/E3 cable. The clock
synchronization schemes for networking with convergence at tributary ports are as follows:
l The higher-level NE accesses the clock source (external clock source or line clock source).
l The lower-level NEs trace the tributary clock sources (port 1 and port 5 of the PO1/PH1/
PD1 board can be used as the tributary clock sources).
l When a lower-level NE is connected to multiple hops of radio links, abnormal pointer
adjustments may occur if the lower-level NE traces the tributary clock. Therefore, the
lower-level NEs should trace the external clock output by the higher-level NE.
Figure 9-7shows the clock synchronization scheme for networking with convergence at
tributary ports.
descending order.
order.
l NE3 converges services TO NE2 through ports 14 of the PO1 board in slot 4. Hence, the
clock source level priority levels are 4-PO1-1 and internal clock source in the descending
order.
l Multiple microwave hops exist in the downstream of NE4. In this case, the downstream
nodes will report point adjustments if NE4 adopts the tributary clock source. Hence, NE4
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
adopts the external clock output from NE2 as the external clock input to the PXC board in
slot 1.
Figure 9-7 Clock synchronization scheme for networking with convergence at tributary ports
External 1/
Internal
5-IF1A-1/
Internal
4-PO1-1/
Internal
NE1 NE2
NE3
Master clock
External/
Internal
NE4
E1 External clock

Precautions for Making the Clock Synchronization Scheme
The precautions for making the clock synchronization scheme are as follows:
l The number of the NEs on the long clock chain must not exceed 20. It is recommended
that the long clock chain contains less than 10 NEs. If the long clock chain contains too
many NEs, new clock sources need be added to the chain for use compensation.
l Use SDH interface boards to converge services at the convergence node. Thus, the clock
signals can be passed over SDH signals not over PDH signals, which ensures the high
quality of the clock.
9.5.2 Configuring the Clock Sources
This topic describes how to configure the clock source according to the planned the clock
synchronization scheme, thus ensuring that all the NEs in a network trace the same clock.
Prerequisite
The PXC boards and input/output clock source boards must be configured.
9-67
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock
Source Priority from the Function Tree.
The Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Select the clock sources.
TIP
By pressing the Ctrl key, you can select multiple clock sources at one time.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Optional: Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 to add other clock sources.
Step 6 Optional: Select a clock source and click or to adjust the priority level of
this clock source.
The clock priority levels are arranged in the descending order from the first row to the last row.
The internal clock source is fixed with the lowest priority.
Step 7 Optional: Set External Clock Source Mode and Synchronous Status Byte for the external
clock sources.
Step 8 Click Apply.
----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameters
Clock Source l External clock source 1 indicates the
external clock source at the port of the
PXC board in slot 1. External clock
source 2 indicates the external clock
source at the port of the PXC board in slot
3.
l IFH2-1(SDH) indicates the microwave
clock source.
l IFH2-2(ETH) indicates the clock source
of the synchronous Ethernet.
l The internal clock source is fixed with the
lowest priority and indicates that the NE
works in the free-run mode.
l Determine the clock sources and the
corresponding clock source priority
levels according to the clock
synchronization schemes.
External Clock
Source Mode
2 Mbit/s, 2 MHz 2 Mbit/s l This parameter indicates the type of the
external clock source signal.
l Set this parameter depending on the
external clock signal. Generally, the
external clock signal is a 2 Mbit/s signal.
Synchronization
Status Byte
SA4SA8 SA4 l This parameter is valid only when
External Clock Source Mode is set to 2
Mbit/s.
l This parameter indicates which bit of the
TS0 in odd frames of the external clock
signal is used to transmit the SSM.
l This parameter need to be set only when
the SSM or extended SSM is enabled.
Generally, the external clock sources use
the SA4 to pass the SSM.

9.5.3 Configuring Protection for Clock Sources
This section describes how to configure protection for clock sources. In the case of simple
networks such as chain networks, you need not configure protection for the clock sources. The
clock sources are protected according to the clock source priority table. In the case of complex
clock networks such as ring networks or tangent rings and intersecting rings deriving from ring
networks, protection for the clock sources need to be implemented through the standard SSM
protocol or extended SSM protocol.
9-69
Prerequisite
The clock source priority table must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock
Subnet Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Enable the clock protection protocol.
1. Click the Clock Subnet tab.
2. Enable the clock protection protocol and set the protocol parameters.
3. Click Apply.
Step 3 Set the SSM output port.
1. Click the SSM Output Control tab.
2. Set the SSM output port.
3. Click Apply.
Step 4 Optional: Set the clock ID output port.
1. Click the Clock ID Status tab.
2. Set the clock ID output port.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
3. Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
Protection Status Start Extended SSM
Protocol, Start
Standard SSM
Protocol, Stop SSM
Protocol
Stop SSM Protocol l The SSM protocol is a scheme used for
synchronous management in an SDH
network and indicates that the SSM is
passed by the lower four bits of the S1
byte and can be exchanged between the
nodes. The SSM protocol ensures that the
equipment automatically select the clock
source with the highest quality and
highest priority, thus preventing clock
mutual tracing.
l The extended SSM protocol is the
extension of the standard SSM protocol.
It defines the unique ID for each clock
source and uses the higher four bits of the
S1 byte to pass the ID. The extended SSM
protocol can be used to prevent the NEs
from tracing their own clocks.
l If third-party equipment exists in the ring
network, enable the SSM protocol. If
only OptiX equipment exists in the ring
network and clock mutual tracing can be
prevented through certain configurations
of the clock sources, the SSM protocol
can also be enabled.
l If only OptiX equipment exists in the ring
network, it is recommended that the
extended SSM protocol is used.
Affiliated Subnet 0255 0 l This parameter is used when the clock
subnet need to be created on the NMS.
l The NEs that trace the same clock source
should be allocated with the same clock
subnet ID.
9-71
Clock Source ID (None), 015 (None) l This parameter is valid only when the
SSM protocol is enabled.
l Allocate the clock source ID for the
following clock sources only:
External clock sources
Internal clock source of the node that
accesses the external clock sources
Internal clock source of the joint node
of a ring and a chain or the joint node
of two rings
Line clock source that enters the ring
when the intra-ring line clock source is
configured at the joint node of a ring
and a chain or the joint node of two
rings
Control Status Enabled, Disabled Enabled l This parameter is valid only when the
SSM protocol or the extended SSM
protocol is enabled.
l This parameter indicates whether the
SSM is output at the line port.
l When the line port is connected to an NE
in the same clock subnet, set this
parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set this
parameter to Disabled.
Enable Status Enabled, Disabled. Enabled l This parameter is valid only when the
SSM protocol is enabled.
clock source ID is output at the line port.
l When the line port is connected to an NE
in the same clock subnet and the extended
SSM protocol is enabled at the remote
NE, set this parameter to Enabled;
otherwise, set this parameter to
Disabled.

9.5.4 Modifying the Parameters of the External Clock Output
The NE outputs the 2 Mbit/s external clock regardless of the clock quality.
Prerequisite
The PXC board must be configured.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Precautions
In the OptiX RTN 600, external clock source 1 indicates the external clock on the PXC board
in slot 1 and external clock source 2 indicates the external clock on the PXC board in slot 3.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Modify the clock output parameters.
Step 3 Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
External Clock
Output Mode
2 Mbit/s, 2 MHz 2 Mbit/s l This parameter indicates the mode of the
output clock.
requirements of the interconnected
equipment. Generally, the output clock
signal is a 2 Mbit/s signal.
External Clock
Output Timeslot
SA4SA8, ALL ALL l This parameter is valid only when
External Clock Output Mode is set to
2 Mbit/s.
l This parameter indicates which bit of the
TS0 in odd frames of the external clock
signal is used to transmit the SSM.
l When this parameter is set to ALL, it
indicates that each bit can transmit the
SSM.
l It is recommended that this parameter
takes the default value.
External Clock
Output Threshold
Threshold Disabled,
Not Inferior to G.
813 SETS Signal,
Not Inferior to G.
812 Local Clock
Signal, Not Inferior
to G.812 Transit
Clock Signal, Not
Inferior to G.811
Clock Signal
Threshold Disabled l This parameter indicates the lowest clock
quality of the output clock. When the
clock quality is lower than the parameter
value, the signal is not output.
l When this parameter is set to Threshold
Disabled, it indicates that the clock
signal is continuously output.
9-73
2M Phase-Locked
Source Fail
Condition
No Failure
Condition, AIS,
LOF, AIS OR LOF
No Failure
Condition
l This parameter indicates the conditions
when the 2M phase-locked clock source
fails.
default value.
2M Phase-Locked
Source Fail Action
Shut Down Output,
2M Output S1 Byte
Unavailable, Send
AIS
Shut Down Output l This parameter is valid only when 2M
Phase-Locked Source Fail Condition is
No Failure Condition.
l This parameter indicates the action of the
2M phase-locked loop when 2M Phase-
Locked Source Fail Condition is met.
default value.

9.5.5 Customizing the Clock Parameters
In certain situations, the user need modify the default switching conditions or self-defined quality
of the clock sources.
Table 9-4 lists the navigation path for customizing the clock parameters. For details, see the
Online help of the NMS.
Table 9-4 Navigation path for customizing the clock parameters
Clock Parameter Navigation Path
Clock source switching condition Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE
Explore. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Clock Source Switching from the Function
Tree.
Clock source quality Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE
Explore. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Clock Subnet Configuration from the
Function Tree.

9.6 Configuring the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces
This topic describes how to configure the orderwire, synchronous data services, asynchronous
data services, and external alarms.
9.6.1 Configuring the Orderwire
This topic describes how to configure the orderwire. When the orderwire is enabled, it can
provide a dedicated communication channel for the network maintenance engineers.
9.6.2 Configuring Synchronous Data Services
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
To configure the synchronous data services, you need set the F1 data port of the OptiX RTN
600. The synchronous data services are transmitted over the F1 overhead bytes in the radio frame
or STM-N frame. The transmission rate is 64 kbit/s, that is, E0 level.
9.6.3 Configuring Asynchronous Data Services
To configure the asynchronous data services, you need to set the broadcast data port of the OptiX
RTN 600. The Serial byte in the radio overheads or any of the bytes Serial1Serial4 in the normal
SDH overheads is used to transparently transmit the asynchronous data services.
9.6.4 Configuring External Alarms
To configure external alarms, you need to configure the environment monitor port on the EOW
board of the OptiX RTN 600. After the outputting of external alarms is configured, the alarm
information of the OptiX RTN 600 can be output to other equipment. After the inputting of
external alarms is configured, the alarm information of other equipment can be input to the OptiX
RTN 600 and then to the processing equipment at the remote end.
9.6.1 Configuring the Orderwire
This topic describes how to configure the orderwire. When the orderwire is enabled, it can
provide a dedicated communication channel for the network maintenance engineers.
Prerequisite
Context
The communication channel must be available for activating the orderwire.
l When an SDH optical/electrical line exists between two NEs, the overhead byte E1 or E2
in the SDH frames can be used as the orderwire communication channel.
l When a radio link exists between two NEs, a fixed overhead byte in the radio frames can
be used as the orderwire communication channel.
l When no SDH optical/electrical line and microwave link exists between two NEs, connect
the external clock ports or synchronous data ports of the two NEs to provide the orderwire
communication channel.
The OptiX RTN 600 supports the group call function of the orderwire. When an OptiX RTN
600 dials the orderwire group call number 888, the orderwire phones of all the OptiX RTN 600s
in the orderwire subnet ring. When an OptiX RTN 600 answers the phone call, the other OptiX
RTN 600s stop ringing, that is, the group call becomes a point-to-point call between two NEs.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire
Step 2 Click the General tab.
Step 3 Configure the orderwire information.
9-75
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Optional: Modify the orderwire occupied overhead bytes.
1. Click the Advanced tab.
2. Configure Orderwire Occupied Bytes.
3. Click Apply.
----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameters
Call Waiting Time
(s)
19 9 l This parameter indicates the waiting time
after the local station dials the number. If
the calling station does not receive the
response message from the called station
within the call waiting time, it
automatically removes the
communication connection.
l If less than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire
subnet, it is recommended that you set
this parameter to 5s. If more than 30
nodes exist in the orderwire subnet, it is
recommended that you set this parameter
to 9s.
l Set the same call waiting time for all the
NEs.
Phone 1 10099999999 101 l This parameter indicates the orderwire
phone number of the local station.
l The length of the orderwire phone
number of each NE should be the same.
It is recommended that the phone number
consists of three numerics.
l The orderwire phone number of each NE
should be unique. It is recommended that
the phone numbers are allocated from
101 for the NEs according to the NE IDs.
l The orderwire phone number cannot be
set to the group call number 888 and
cannot start with 888.
9-77
Orderwire port Line ports, external
clock port, F1 port
- l This parameter indicates the ports that
can transmit the orderwire information.
l The OptiX RTN 600 does not support
conference calls and thus allows the lines
that transmit the orderwire information to
form a loop.
l If the radio link between two nodes is
configured with 1+1 protection, only the
line port of the main IF board need to be
used as the orderwire port.
l If multiple links (for example, configured
with XPIC or N+1 protection) exist
between two nodes, the line ports
corresponding to all the links need to be
used as the orderwire ports.
l When orderwire communication is
implemented by interconnecting the two
NEs through the external clock ports, the
external clock ports need to be used as the
orderwire ports.
l When orderwire communication is
implemented by interconnecting the two
NEs through the synchronous data ports,
the F1 port need to be used as the
orderwire port.
Orderwire Occupied
Bytes
E1, E2 E1 l This parameter indicates the overhead
byte that is used to transmit the orderwire
information.
l Regardless the parameter value, the radio
link uses a fixed self-defined overhead
byte to transmit the orderwire
information. Hence, this parameter
should be set according to the occupied
SDH overhead bytes in the ordinary
SDH.

9.6.2 Configuring Synchronous Data Services
To configure the synchronous data services, you need set the F1 data port of the OptiX RTN
600. The synchronous data services are transmitted over the F1 overhead bytes in the radio frame
or STM-N frame. The transmission rate is 64 kbit/s, that is, E0 level.
Prerequisite
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
The boards that are related to the synchronous data services must be configured.
Procedure
Step 2 Click the F1 Data Port tab.
Step 3 Press the Ctrl key and select two data channels from Available Data Channel. Click
.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
Parameter Value
Range
Default
Value
Description
Data Channel
1, Data
Channel 2
Depending
on the board
configuration
, the
following
ports can be
selected:
SDH optical/
electrical
port, IF port,
F1 port, and
external
clock port of
the PXC
board.
- l When the SDH optical/electrical line port is selected, the F1
byte in the SDH frame of this port is used.
l When the IF port is selected, the self-defined F1 byte in the
radio frame of this port is used.
l When the F1 port is selected, the F1 synchronous data port
on the SCC board is used. The F1 port conforms to the G.703
and the rate is 64 kbit/s.
l When the PXC-1 is selected, the external clock port of the
PXC board is used. In this case, the external clock port is used
as the output port of the overhead bytes.
9-79

9.6.3 Configuring Asynchronous Data Services
To configure the asynchronous data services, you need to set the broadcast data port of the OptiX
RTN 600. The Serial byte in the radio overheads or any of the bytes Serial1Serial4 in the normal
SDH overheads is used to transparently transmit the asynchronous data services.
Prerequisite
The boards that are related to the asynchronous data services must be configured.
Context
The asynchronous data port of the OptiX RTN 600 is an RS-232 port and can implement the
universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) full-duplex communication. The service
transmission is required to be point-to-point transparent transmission. Therefore, the port rate
and transmission control protocol need not be configured and the maximum communication rate
is 19.2 kbit/s. Hence, the asynchronous data port is also considered as the transparent data port.
Procedure
Step 2 Click the Broadcast Data Port tab.
Step 3 Set the parameters of the broadcast data port.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
Parameter Value
Range
Default
Value
Description
Overhead
Byte
SERIAL1
SERIAL4
SERIAL1 l In the case of an SDH optical/electrical line, the preset
overhead byte is used to transmit the asynchronous data
services.
l In the case of a radio link, a self-defined Serial overhead byte
in the radio frame is used to transmit the asynchronous data
services.
Broadcast
Data Source
Depending
on the board
configuration
, the
following
values can be
selected:
SERIAL1
SERIAL4,
SDH optical/
electrical
port, IF port,
and external
clock port of
the PXC
board.
No Data l When this parameter is set so that it is the same as the SERIAL
byte corresponding to the Overhead Byte, the asynchronous
data port on the SCC board is used.
l When this parameter is set to the SDH optical/electrical line
port, the Overhead Byte of this port is used.
l When this parameter is set to IF port, the self-defined Serial
byte in the radio frame of this port is used.
l When this parameter is set to the external clock port on the
PXC board, the external clock port on the PXC board is used.
In this case, the external clock port is used as the output port
of overhead bytes.
Broadcast
Data Sink

9.6.4 Configuring External Alarms
To configure external alarms, you need to configure the environment monitor port on the EOW
board of the OptiX RTN 600. After the outputting of external alarms is configured, the alarm
information of the OptiX RTN 600 can be output to other equipment. After the inputting of
external alarms is configured, the alarm information of other equipment can be input to the OptiX
RTN 600 and then to the processing equipment at the remote end.
Prerequisite
Context
The external alarms of the OptiX RTN 600 are also considered as housekeeping alarms. The
external alarm port of the OptiX RTN 600 is a relay port. This port can be either in the "on" state
or in the "off" state.
9-81
OptiX RTN 600 IDU 610/620 provides two alarm output ports and six alarm input ports. The
alarm input ports report the RELAY_ALARM alarm (the alarm parameter indicates the port
number of the input alarm) after the external alarm is triggered. To ensure that the external alarm
port works normally, the external alarm cables must be correctly connected.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the EOW board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface from the Function
Tree.
Step 2 Configure the input alarm.
1. Select Input Relay from the drop-down list.
2. Set the parameters of the input alarm.
3. Click Apply.
Step 3 Configure the output alarm.
1. Select Output Relay from the drop-down list.
2. Set the parameters of the output alarm.
3. Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
Using Status Used, Unused Unused This parameter is valid for the input
relay and is used to set the usage status
of this alarm port.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Alarm Mode l Input Relay:
Relay Turns On/
Low Level, Relay
Turns Off/High
Level
l Output Relay:
Alarm Occurs
when Relay
Turns Off, Alarm
Occurs when
Relay Turns On
l Input Relay:
Relay Turns On/Low
Level
l Output Relay:
Alarm Occurs when
Relay Turns Off
Input Relay:
l If this parameter is set to Relay
Turns On/Low Level, the alarm is
generated when the relay is on.
l If this parameter is set to Relay
Turns Off/High Level, the alarm is
generated when the relay is off.
Output Relay:
l If this parameter is set to Alarm
Occurs when Relay Turns Off, the
alarm is generated when the relay is
off.
l If this parameter is set to Alarm
Occurs when Relay Turns On, the
alarm is generated when the relay is
on.
Use or Not Used, Unused Unused This parameter is valid for the output
relay and is used to set the usage status
of this alarm port.
Working Mode Automatic, Manual Automatic This parameter is valid for the output
relay.
l Automatic: Changing the status of
the output relay according to Alarm
Trigger Conditions and Alarm
Mode
l Manual: Determining the status of
the output relay manually
9-83
Alarm Trigger
Conditions
l Available values
when Working
Mode is set to
Automatic: Input
Path 1Input Path
6, Automatically
Triggered by
Major Alarms,
Automatically
Triggered by
Critical Alarms,
and
Automatically
Triggered by
Critical and
Major Alarms
l Available values
when Working
Mode is set to
Manual: Output
Low Level in
Manual and
Output High
Level in Manual
l Automatic:
Automatically
Triggered by Critical
and Major Alarms
l Manual: Output High
Level in Manual
This parameter is valid for the output
relay.
l Automatic: Automatically changing
the status of the relay according to
the preset value
l Manual: Outputting the high level or
low level according to the setting

9.7 Configuring the Parameters of Various Ports
This topic describes how to set the parameters of various ports. Normally, the default values of
the parameters are adopted to meet the relevant requirements. In certain cases, however, the
parameters of the ports need to be modified.
9.7.1 Configuring the Parameters of SDH Interfaces
This section describes how to set the parameters of SDH interfaces, including loopback of the
SDH interface board and the enabling/disabling of the lasers at the SDH optical ports.
9.7.2 Configuring the Parameters of PDH Interfaces
By performing the operations, you can set the loopback status and service loading indication of
the tributary boards. In the case of the E1 interface board, you can also set the tributary retiming
function. In the case of the E3/T3 interface board, you can also set the service type and signal
equalization.
9.7.3 Setting the Parameters of IF Ports
This topic describes how to configure the parameters of IF ports, including the IF attributes and
ATPC attributes of the IF boards.
9.7.4 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports
This section describes how to set the parameters of ODU ports, including the RF attributes,
power attributes, and advanced attributes of the ODU.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
9.7.1 Configuring the Parameters of SDH Interfaces
This section describes how to set the parameters of SDH interfaces, including loopback of the
SDH interface board and the enabling/disabling of the lasers at the SDH optical ports.
Prerequisite
The required SDH interface boards must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explore. Choose
Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select By Board/Port(Path) (default option of the system).
Step 3 Select Port from the dropdown list and set the parameters of the SDH interface board.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Select VC4 Path from the dropdown list.
Step 6 Configure VC-4 path loopback.
Step 7 Click Apply.
----End
9-85
Parameters
Laser Switch
a
Open, Close Open l This parameter indicates whether the
laser is enabled to receive/transmit
optical signals.
l Normally, this parameter takes the
default value.
Optical (Electrical)
Interface Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Non-Loopback l Optical (electrical) inloop indicates that
loopback occurs in the SDH optical
(electrical) signals to be transmitted to the
opposite end.
l Optical (electrical) outloop indicates that
loopback occurs in the SDH optical
(electrical) signals to be received.
default value.
VC4 Loopback Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Non-Loopback l VC-4 path inloop indicates that loopback
occurs in the VC-4 signals to be
transmitted to the opposite end.
l VC-4 path outloop indicates that
loopback occurs in the VC-4 signals to be
received.
default value.

NOTE
a: Only SDH optical interface boards support this parameter.
9.7.2 Configuring the Parameters of PDH Interfaces
By performing the operations, you can set the loopback status and service loading indication of
the tributary boards. In the case of the E1 interface board, you can also set the tributary retiming
function. In the case of the E3/T3 interface board, you can also set the service type and signal
equalization.
Prerequisite
The required PDH interface boards must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the PDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Step 2 Select By Board/Port(Channel) (default value).
Step 3 Select Path from the drop-down list, Set the parameters of the PDH interfaces according to the
types of the PDH interfaces.
l Set the parameters of the PDH interfaces on the E1 interface board.
l Set the parameters of the PDH interface on the E3/T3 interface board.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
Tributary Loopback Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Non-Loopback l Tributary inloop indicates that loopback
occurs in the tributary signals to be
transmitted to the remote end.
l Tributary outloop indicates that loopback
occurs in the tributary signals to be
received.
default value.
Service Load
Indication
Load, Non-Loaded Load l This parameter is valid for the tributary
ports that are configured with services.
l When this parameter is set to Load, the
board detects whether alarms exist in this
path.
Loaded, the board does not detect
whether alarms exist in this path.
default value.
9-87
Retiming Mode
a
Normal, Retiming
Mode of Tributary
Clock, Retiming
Mode of Cross-
Connect Clock
Normal l By using the retiming function, the
retiming reference signal from the SDH
network and the service data signal are
combined and then sent to the client
equipment, thus decreasing the output
jitter in the signal. In this way, the
retiming function ensures that the service
code flow can normally transfer the
retiming reference signal.
l When this parameter is set to Normal, the
retiming function is not used.
l When this parameter is set to Retiming
Mode of Tributary Clock, the retiming
function is used with the clock of the
upstream tributary unit traced.
l When this parameter is set to Retiming
Mode of Cross-Connect Clock, the
retiming function is used with the clock
of the cross-connect unit traced.
l It is recommended that the external clock,
instead of the retiming function, is used to
provide an external clock for the client
equipment.
l If the retiming function is required, it is
recommended that you adopt Retiming
Mode of Cross-Connect Clock.
Port Service Type
b
E3, T3 E3 l This parameter indicates the type of the
services the tributary board processes.
l Set this parameter according to the type
of the accessed services.
Input Signal
Equalization
b
Unequalized,
Equalized
Unequalized l This parameter is valid only when Service
Type is set to T3.
input signals are equalized.
l If the trunk cable exceeds 70 m, it is
to Equalized. Otherwise, adopt the
default value.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Output Signal
Equalization
b
Unequalized,
Equalized
Unequalized l This parameter is valid only when Service
Type is set to T3.
output signals are equalized.
l If the trunk cable exceeds 70 m, it is
to Equalized. Otherwise, adopt the
default value.

NOTE
l a: Only E1 interface boards support this parameter.
l b: Only E3/T3 interface boards support the parameters.
9.7.3 Setting the Parameters of IF Ports
This topic describes how to configure the parameters of IF ports, including the IF attributes and
ATPC attributes of the IF boards.
Prerequisite
The required IF boards must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the IF board from the Object Tree. Choose Configuration > IF
Step 2 Click the IF Attributes tab.
Step 3 Set each parameter for the IF attributes.
NOTE
The IFH2 board of the IDU 620 does not support the setting of the Radio Work Mode.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click the ATPC Attributes tab.
Step 6 Set each parameter for the ATPC attributes.
9-89
Step 7 Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
Radio Work Mode 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK
2,4E1,3.5MHz,
16QAM
3,8E1,14MHz,QPS
K
4,8E1,7MHz,
16QAM
5,16E1,28MHz,QP
SK
6,16E1,14MHz,
16QAM
7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM
8,E3,28MHz,QPSK
9,E3,14MHz,
16QAM
10,22E1,14MHz,
32QAM
11,26E1,14MHz,
64QAM
12,32E1,14MHz,
128QAM
13,35E1,28MHz,
16QAM
14,44E1,28MHz,
32QAM
15,53E1,28MHz,
64QAM
16,5E1,7MHz,QPS
K
17,10E1,14MHz,Q
PSK
18,2E1,3.5MHz,QP
SK
1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK
(IF1A/B)
5,16E1,28MHz,QP
SK (IF0A/B)
7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM (IFX)
l This parameter indicates the radio work
mode in "work mode, service capacity,
channel spacing, modulation mode"
format.
l The IF1A/B board supports radio work
modes 1 to 15. The IF0A/B board
supports radio work modes 5, 16, 17, and
18. The IFX board supports radio work
mode 7 only.
l The IFH2 board of the IDU 620 does not
support the setting of the Radio Work
Mode.
network planning. The radio work modes
of the IF boards at both the radio link must
be the same.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Radio Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l As the identifier of a radio link, this
parameter is used to avoid misconnection
of radio links between sites.
l If this parameter is different from
Received Link ID, the NE reports the
MW_LIM alarm and inserts the AIS into
the downstream.
planning. Each radio link of an NE should
have a unique Link ID, and the Link IDs
at both the ends of a radio link should be
the same.
IF Port Loopback
a
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Non-Loopback l IF port inloop indicates that loopback
occurs in the IF signals to be transmitted
to the remote end.
l IF port outloop indicates that loopback
occurs in the IF signals to be received.
default value.
2M Wayside Enable
Status
b
Enabled, Disabled Disabled l In the case of the IFX board, this
parameter is valid only when Radio
Work Mode is set to 7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM.
l In the case of the IF1A/B board, this
parameter is valid only when Radio
Work Mode is set to 7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or
9,E3,14MHz,16QAM.
radio link transmits the wayside E1
service.
l The wayside E1 service is a 2.048 kbit/s
service that is transmitted by the
microwave frame overhead. The IDU
610/620 accesses the wayside E1 service
through the external clock interface on
the PXC board.
2M Wayside Input
Board
b
1, 3 1 l This parameter is valid only when 2M
Wayside Enable Status is set to
Enabled.
l This parameter indicates the slot in which
the PXC board accesses the wayside E1
service through the external clock port.
9-91
XPIC Enable
c
Enabled, Disabled Enabled l This parameter indicates whether the
XPIC function is enabled.
l If the IF board does not use the XPIC
function, set this parameter to Disabled.
In this case, use the XPIC cable to
perform self-loop at the XPIC port.
ATPC Enable
Status
d
Enabled, Disabled Disabled l This parameter indicates whether the
function ensures that the TX power of the
transmitter automatically traces the
changes of the RX level at the receive
end, within the ATPC controlled range.
parameter to Disabled in areas where fast
fading severely affects the radio
transmission.
l To ensure that the TX power does not
change during the commissioning
process, set this parameter to Disabled.
After the commissioning is complete,
you can set this parameter to another
value.
ATPC Upper
Threshold (dBm)
d
-20 dBm to -75 dBm -45 dBm l Set the central value of the ATPC upper
ATPC Lower
Threshold (dBm)
d
-35 dBm to -90 dBm -70dBm
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Enabled, Disabled Enabled l This parameter sets whether to enable the
ATPC. The ATPC function enables the
transmit power of a transmitter to
automatically trace the change of the
received signal level (RSL) at the receive
end within the ATPC control range.
automatically uses the preset ATP upper
and lower thresholds based on the

Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
NOTE
l a: The IFH2 and IFX boards do not support the loopback on the IF ports.
l b: The IFH2 and IF0A/B boards do not support wayside E1 services.
l c: The IFH2, IF0A/B, and IF1A/B boards do not support the XPIC function.
l d: The ATPC attributes need to be set to the same values at both ends of a radio link.
9.7.4 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports
This section describes how to set the parameters of ODU ports, including the RF attributes,
power attributes, and advanced attributes of the ODU.
Prerequisite
The required IF boards must be added.
The corresponding ODU must be added in the slot layout diagram.
Context
Procedure
Step 1 Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Step 2 Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.
Step 3 Configure the TX frequency and T/R spacing.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click the Power Attributes tab.
Step 6 Configure the transmit power and receive power of the ODU.
Step 7 Click Apply.
Step 8 Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Step 9 Set Configure Transmission Status.
Step 10 Click Apply.
----End
9-93
Parameters
Transmit Frequency
(MHz)
- - l The parameter specifies the channel
center frequency.
l This parameter cannot be set to a value
that is less than the minimum Transmit
frequency supported by the ODU + 50%
channel spacing or more than the
maximum Transmit frequency supported
by the ODU - 50% channel spacing.
l The difference between the Transmit
frequencies of both the ends of a radio
link is a T/R spacing.
planning.
Maximum Transmit
Power (dBm)
- - l This parameter cannot be set to a value
that exceeds the rated power range
l Set this parameter to limit the maximum
transmit power of the ODU within this
preset value. The maximum transmit
power adjusted by ATPC should not
exceed this value.
planning.
Transmit Power
(dBm)
- - l This parameter cannot be set to a value
that exceeds the nominal power range
l The Transmit power of the ODU should
be set to the same value at both the ends
of a radio link.
planning.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Receive Power
(dBm)
- - l This parameter is used to set the expected
receive power of the ODU and is mainly
used in the antenna alignment stage.
After this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, if the
actual receive power of the ODU exceeds
the range of receive power3 dB, the
ODU LED of the IF board connected to
the ODU is on (yellow) for 300 ms and
off for 300 ms repeatedly, indicating that
the antenna is not aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.
planning.
T/R Spacing (MHz) 04294967.295 - l This parameter indicates the spacing
between the TX power and receive power
of the ODU. If Station Type of the ODU
is TX high, the TX power is one T/R
spacing higher than the receive power. If
Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the
TX power is one T/R spacing lower than
the receive power.
l If the ODU supports only one T/R
spacing, set this parameter to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing supported
by the ODU is used.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be
set to the same value at both the ends of
a radio link.
Configure
Transmission Status
mute, unmute unmute l When this parameter is set to mute, the
transmitter of the ODU does not work but
the ODU can normally receive
microwave signals.
l When this parameter is set to unmute, the
ODU can normally receive and transmit
microwave signals.
default value.

9-95
9.8 Configuring Overhead Bytes
This topic describes how to configure overhead bytes. Normally, the default values of the
overhead bytes to be received or transmitted are adopted to meet the relevant requirements. In
certain cases, however, the overhead bytes to be received or transmitted need to be modified.
9.8.1 Configuring the IEEE 1588 Overhead
You need to specify the IEEE 1588 overhead when the Packet microwave is interconnected with
the Hybrid microwave.
9.8.2 Configuring RSOHs
This topic describes how to configure the J0 byte in the regenerator section overheads when the
J0_MM alarm is reported at the local or remote NE.
9.8.3 Configuring VC-4 POHs
This section describes how to configure the J1 byte or C2 byte in the VC-4 path overheads
(POHs) when the HP_TIM or HP_SLM alarm is reported on the line board at the local or remote
NE.
You need to configure the J1 or C2 byte in the VC-3 path overheads, when the E3/T3 interface
board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_SLM alarm or when the Ethernet
board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM_VC3 or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm.
You need to configure the signal indicator of the J2 or V5 byte in the VC-12 path overheads,
when the E1 interface board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_SLM alarm
or when the Ethernet board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM_VC12 or
LP_SLM_VC12 alarm.
9.8.1 Configuring the IEEE 1588 Overhead
You need to specify the IEEE 1588 overhead when the Packet microwave is interconnected with
the Hybrid microwave.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the IFH2 board, and choose Configuration > Overhead
Management > 1588 Overhead from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Set the enable status of 1588 Overhead.
Step 3 Click Apply.
----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameter Description
1588 Overhead Enabled, Disabled Disabled l When the Hybrid microwave is
interconnected with the Packet
microwave, this parameter is set to
Enabled.
l When the Hybrid microwave is
interconnected with the Hybrid
microwave, this parameter is set to
Disabled.

9.8.2 Configuring RSOHs
This topic describes how to configure the J0 byte in the regenerator section overheads when the
J0_MM alarm is reported at the local or remote NE.
Prerequisite
The required SDH interface boards must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Overhead Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the
Function Tree.
Step 2 Set the J0 byte.
1. Double-click the parameter to be modified.
Then, the Please Input Overhead Byte dialog box is displayed.
2. Set the overhead byte.
9-97
3. Click OK.
Step 3 Click Apply.
Then, a prompt box is displayed. Confirm the operations in this prompt box.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End
Parameters
J0 to Be Sent
([Mode]Content)
- [16 Byte]HuaWei
SBS
l Two byte modes are supported: single
byte mode and 16-byte mode (the first
byte is generated automatically).
l If the remote NE reports the J0_MM
alarm, set this parameter according tot he
J0 byte to be received at the remote NE.
J0 to Be Received
([Mode]Content)
- Disable l Three byte modes are supported: single
byte mode, 16-byte mode (the first byte
is generated automatically), and disable
mode.
l When this parameter is set to Disable
Mode, the board does not detect the
received J0 byte.

This section describes how to configure the J1 byte or C2 byte in the VC-4 path overheads
(POHs) when the HP_TIM or HP_SLM alarm is reported on the line board at the local or remote
NE.
Prerequisite
The required line boards must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the line board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Optional: Set the J1 byte.
1. Click the Trace Byte J1 tab.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
4. Click OK.
5. Click Apply.
6. Click OK.
Step 3 Optional: Set the C2 byte.
1. Click the Signal Flag C2 tab.
2. Set the C2 byte.
3. Click OK.
4. Click Apply.
Step 4 Optional: Set the termination mode of the VC-4 POHs.
1. Click the Overhead Termination tab.
2. Set the termination mode of the VC-4 POHs.
3. Click Apply.
4. Click OK.
----End
9-99
Parameters
J1 to Be Sent
([Mode]Content)
- [16 Byte]HuaWei
SBS
l Three byte modes are supported: single
is generated automatically), and 64-byte
mode (synchronization bit 0x0D, 0x0A).
l If the remote NE reports the HP_TIM
alarm, set this parameter according to the
J1 byte to be received at the remote NE.
J1 to Be Received
([Mode]Content)
- Disable l Three byte modes are supported: 16-byte
mode (the first byte is generated
automatically), 64-byte mode
(synchronization bit 0x0D, 0x0A), and
disable mode.
received J1 byte.
C2 to Be Sent (0x00)Unequipped,
(0x01)Reserved,
(0x02) TUG
Structure, (0x03)
Locked TU-n,
(0x04)34M/45M
into C-3, (0x05)
Experimental
Mapping, (0x12)
140M into C-4
asynchronization,
(0x13)ATM
Mapping, (0x14)
MAN DQDB
Mapping, (0x15)
FDDI Mapping,
(0x16)HDLC/PPP
Mapping, (0x17)
Reserved for Special
Purpose, (0x18)
HDLC/LAPS
Mapping, (0x19)
Purpose, (0x1A)
10G Ethernet
Frame, (0x1B)GFP
Mapping, (0xCF)
Reserved, (0xE1)
Reserved, (0xFC)
Reserved, (0xFE)O.
(0x02) TUG
Structure
If the remote NE reports the HP_SLM
alarm, set this parameter according to the C2
byte to be received at the remote NE.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
C2 to Be Received 181 Test Signal,
(0xFF)VC-AIS
If the local NE reports the HP_SLM alarm,
set this parameter according to the C2 byte
to be transmitted from the remote NE.
VC4 Overhead
Termination
Auto, Pass-
Through,
Termination
Auto l When this parameter is set to Pass-
Through, the local NE detects the VC-4
overheads (the C2 byte is not detected)
and then forwards the original overheads.
Termination, the local NE detects the
VC-4 overheads (the C2 byte is not
detected) and then generates new VC-4
overheads according to the board
settings.
l When this parameter is set to Auto, the
VC-4 overhead termination of VC-4
pass-through services is Pass-Through
and the overhead termination of the
VC-3/VC-12 services is Termination.

9-101
You need to configure the J1 or C2 byte in the VC-3 path overheads, when the E3/T3 interface
board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_SLM alarm or when the Ethernet
board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM_VC3 or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm.
Prerequisite
The corresponding E3/T3 interface board or Ethernet board must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the E3/T3 interface board or Ethernet board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.
Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC3 Path Overhead from the Function
Tree.
4. Click OK.
5. Click Apply.
6. Click OK.
Step 3 Optional: Set the C2 byte.
1. Click the Signal Flag C2 tab.
2. Set the C2 byte.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
3. Click OK.
4. Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
J1 to Be Sent
([Mode]Content)
- [16 Byte]HuaWei
SBS
l Three byte modes are supported: single
is generated automatically), and 64-byte
mode (synchronization bit 0x0D, 0x0A).
l If the remote NE reports the LP_TIM or
LP_TIM_VC3 alarm, set this parameter
according to the J1 byte to be received at
the remote NE.
J1 to Be Received
([Mode]Content)
disable mode.
received J1 byte.
C2 to Be Sent (0x00)Unequipped,
(0x01)Reserved,
(0x02) TUG
Structure, (0x03)
Locked TU-n,
(0x04)34M/45M
into C-3, (0x05)
Experimental
Mapping, (0x12)
140M into C-4
asynchronization,
(0x13)ATM
Mapping, (0x14)
MAN DQDB
Mapping, (0x15)
FDDI Mapping,
(0x16)HDLC/PPP
Mapping, (0x17)
Purpose, (0x18)
HDLC/LAPS
Mapping, (0x19)
(0x04)34M/45M
into C-3 (E3/T3
interface boards)
(0x02) TUG
Structure (Ethernet
boards)
If the remote NE reports the LP_TIM or
according to the C2 byte to be received at
the remote NE.
9-103
C2 to Be Received Reserved for Special
Purpose, (0x1A)
10G Ethernet
Frame, (0x1B)GFP
Mapping, (0xCF)
Reserved, (0xE1)
Reserved, (0xFC)
Reserved, (0xFE)O.
181 Test Signal,
(0xFF)VC-AIS
If the local NE reports the LP_TIM or
according to the C2 byte to be transmitted
from the remote NE.

You need to configure the signal indicator of the J2 or V5 byte in the VC-12 path overheads,
when the E1 interface board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM or LP_SLM alarm
or when the Ethernet board on the local or opposite NE reports the LP_TIM_VC12 or
LP_SLM_VC12 alarm.
Prerequisite
The corresponding E1 interface board or Ethernet board must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the E1 interface board or Ethernet board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
4. Click OK.
5. Click Apply.
6. Click OK.
Step 3 Optional: Set the signal flag.
1. Click the Signal Flag tab.
2. Set the signal flag in the V5 byte.
3. Click Apply.
4. Click OK.
----End
Parameters
J2 to Be Sent
([Mode]Content)
- [16 Byte]HuaWei
SBS
l Two byte modes are supported: single
byte mode and 16-byte mode (the first
byte is generated automatically).
l If the remote NE reports the LP_TIM or
according to the J1 byte to be received at
the remote NE.
9-105
J2 to Be Received
([Mode]Content)
disable mode.
received J2 byte.
V5 to Be
Transmitted
(0x00)Unequipped
or Supervisory-
Unequipped, (0x01)
Equipped-Non-
Specific Payload,
(0x02)
Asynchronous,
(0x03)Bit
Synchronization,
(0x04)Byte
Synchronization,
(0x05)Retained
Signal Flag, (0x06)
O.181 Test Signal,
(0x07)VC_AIS
(0x02)
Asynchronous
If the remote NE reports the LP_SLM or
LP_SLM_VC3 alarm, set this parameter
according to the V5 byte to be received at
the remote NE.
V5 to Be Received If the local NE reports the LP_SLM or
LP_SLM_VC3 alarm, set this parameter
according to the V5 byte to be transmitted
from the remote NE.

9.9 Adjusting the Alarm Management Function
This section describes how to adjust the alarm management function of a board or port according
to the service availability, thus improving the alarm monitoring efficiency.
Table 9-5 lists the common alarm management functions. For details, refer to the OptiX Web
LCT online Help.
Table 9-5 Common alarm management functions
Alarm
Management
Function
Navigation Path Major Application Example
Reversing alarms
a
Select the board from
the Object Tree in the
NE Explore. Choose
Alarm > Alarm
Reversion from the
Function Tree.
Used to reverse the
alarms of certain
ports for which the
service is unavailable
When no service is
available at a line
port, you can reverse
the R_LOS alarm at
the port.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Alarm
Management
Function
Navigation Path Major Application Example
Suppressing alarms Select the board from
NE Explore. Choose
Alarm > Alarm
Suppression from
the Function Tree.
Used to suppress the
alarms that need not
be handled
When two PXC
boards are
configured but only
one power supply is
accessed, you can
suppress the
VOLT_LOS alarm
of the PXC board that
is not fed with power.
Setting the bit error
alarm threshold
Select the board from
NE Explore. Choose
Alarm > QoS
Alarm > Bit Error
Alarm Threshold
from the Function
Tree.
Used to adjust the
alarm threshold,
depending on the
sensitivity of the
service to bit errors
When the data
services are carried,
you can set the bit
error threshold-
crossing value to
10
-6
and the bit error
degrade threshold to
10
-8
.

NOTE
a: Before you set the alarms of the board to be reversed, you need to enable the alarm reversion function.
Select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Alarm > NE Alarm Attribute from the Function Tree.
Set Reversion Mode to Automatic Reversion or Manual Reversion.
9.10 Enabling/Disabling the Monitoring of the NE
Performance
The NE performance monitoring function is enabled by default. You can disable and then enable
the NE performance monitoring function manually.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explore. Choose Performance > NE Performance
Monitor Time from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Set the performance monitoring parameters according to the requirements.
1. Select 15-Minute or 24-Hour.
2. Select Enable or Disable in Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring.
3. Set the start time and end time of the performance monitoring.
9-107
NOTE
Normally, enable the 15-minute and the 24-hour performance monitoring at the same time.
Step 3 Click Apply.
----End
9.11 Configuring Ethernet Ports
The Ethernet ports contain the internal Ethernet ports and external Ethernet ports. The external
Ethernet ports are the physical ports that are used to connect the Ethernet equipment. The internal
Ethernet ports (VCTRUNKs) are internal paths that implement Ethernet over SDH.
9.11.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports
When an NE uses the external ports (that is, PORTs) of the Ethernet boards to access Ethernet
services, the attributes of the external ports need to be configured so that the external ports can
work with the data communication equipment on the client side to provide the normal access to
the Ethernet services.
9.11.2 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board
When an NE transmits Ethernet services to a line through an internal port (that is, VCTRUNK)
of an Ethernet board, the attributes of the internal port need to be set. Thus, the Ethernet board
works with the Ethernet board on the opposite side to realize the transmission of the Ethernet
services in the network.
9.11.3 Modifying the Type Field of Jumbo Frames
By default, the type field of Jumbo frames processed by Ethernet boards is set to "0x8700".
9.11.4 Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the VCTRUNK Bandwidth
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
When the LCAS function is enabled on an NE, you can dynamically increase or decrease the
VCTRUNK-bound paths to increase or decrease the bandwidth. The operation does not affect
services.
9.11.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports
When an NE uses the external ports (that is, PORTs) of the Ethernet boards to access Ethernet
services, the attributes of the external ports need to be configured so that the external ports can
work with the data communication equipment on the client side to provide the normal access to
the Ethernet services.
Prerequisite
The Ethernet board must be included in the NE Panel.
Precautions
l The IDU 610 supports the Ethernet board EFT4. The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet boards
EFT4 and EMS6.
Ethernet ports FE1FE4 of an EFT4 board correspond to PORT1PORT4 respectively.
The EFT4 board does not support the setting of TAG attributes, network attributes, and
advanced attributes.
Ethernet ports FE1FE4 of an EMS6 board correspond to PORT1PORT4 respectively.
Ports GE1 and GE2 of an EMS6 board correspond to PORT5 and PORT6 respectively.
l The following procedures describe how to configure the external port of an EMS6 board.
The EFT4 board does not support the configuration of the TAG attributes, network
attributes, and advanced attributes.
l The Hybrid IF board (IFH2) provides the GE port for accessing Ethernet services and it
supports certain Ethernet service access functions. The procedure for configuring the
Ethernet port of the IFH2 board is similar to the procedure for configuring the external
Ethernet port. The IFH2 board, however, supports the configuration of only the basic
attributes and flow control function.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select External Port.
NOTE
If you need to configure the attributes of the Ethernet port on the IFH2 board, select the IFH2 board in the
NE Explorer.
Step 2 Set the basic attributes of the port.
1. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
2. Set the basic attributes of the port.
9-109
3. Click Apply.
Step 3 Set the flow control mode of the port.
1. Click the Flow Control tab.
2. Set the flow control mode of the port.
3. Click Apply.
Step 4 Optional: Set the TAG attributes of the port.
1. Click the TAG Attributes tab.
2. Set the TAG attributes of the port.
3. Click Apply.
Step 5 Optional: Set the network attributes of the port.
1. Click the Network Attributes tab.
2. Set the network attributes of the port.
3. Click Apply.
Step 6 Optional: Set the advanced attributes of the port.
1. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
2. Set the advanced attributes of the port.
3. Click Apply.
----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameters
Enabled/Disabled Enabled, Disabled Disabled l In the case of the port that accesses
In the case of other ports, set this
parameter to Disabled.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled for the
port that does not access services, an
ETH_LOS alarm may be generated.
Working Mode 10M Full-Duplex,
100M Full-Duplex,
Auto-Negotiation
(EFT4)
10M Half-Duplex,
10M Full-Duplex,
100M Half-Duplex,
100M Full-Duplex,
1000M Full-
Duplex, Auto-
Negotiation (EMS6)
Auto-Negotiation,
10M Full-Duplex,
100M Full-Duplex,
1000M Full-Duplex
(IFH2)
Auto-Negotiation l The Ethernet ports of different types
support different working modes.
l When the equipment on the opposite side
works in the auto-negotiation mode, set
the working mode of the equipment on
the local side to Auto-Negotiation.
works in the full-duplex mode, set the
working mode of the equipment on the
local side to 10M Full-Duplex, 100M
Full-Duplex, or 1000M Full-Duplex
depending on the port rate of the
equipment on the opposite side.
works in the half-duplex mode, set the
local side to 10M Half-Duplex, 100M
Half-Duplex, or Auto-Negotiation
l The GE optical interface on the EMS6
board supports the 1000M full-duplex
mode only.
Maximum Frame
Length
15181535 (EFT4)
15189600 (EMS6)
1522 The value of this parameter should be
greater than the maximum length of a frame
among all the data frames to be transported.
In the case of the EFT4 board, this parameter
is invalid for Jumbo frames. In the case of
the EMS6 board, this parameter has a
restriction on Jumbo frames.
If Jumbo frames are not considered and the
accessed services are ordinary Ethernet
frames that use VLAN tags or do not have
VLAN tags, it is recommended that you use
the default value. If the access services
include services that use double tags such as
QinQ services, it is recommended that you
set this parameter to 1526.
9-111
MAC Loopback Non-Loopback,
Inloop
Non-Loopback l When this parameter is set to Inloop, the
Ethernet frame signals that are to be sent
to the remote end are looped back.
l In normal cases, use the default value.
PHY Loopback Non-Loopback,
Inloop
Non-Loopback l When this parameter is set to Inloop, the
Ethernet physical signals that are to be
sent to the remote end are looped back.
l In normal cases, use the default value.
Non-
Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
Disabled, Enable
Symmetric Flow
Control, Send Only,
Receive Only (EFT4
and EMS6)
Disabled, Enable
Symmetric Flow
Control (IFH2)
Disabled l This parameter is used when Working
Mode is not set to Auto-Negotiation.
l When this parameter is set to Enable
Symmetric Flow Control, the port can
send PAUSE frames and process
received PAUSE frames.
l When this parameter is set to Send
Only, the port can send PAUSE frames
in the case of congestion but cannot
process received PAUSE frames.
l When this parameter is set to Receive
Only, the port can process received
PAUSE frames but cannot send PAUSE
frames in the case of congestion.
l The non-autonegotiation flow control
mode of the equipment on the local side
must match the non-autonegotiation flow
control mode of the equipment on the
opposite side.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
Disabled, Enable
Symmetric/
Dissymmetric Flow
Control, Enable
Symmetric Flow
Control, Enable
Dissymmetric Flow
Control (EFT4 and
EMS6)
Disabled, Enable
Symmetric Flow
Control (IFH2)
Disabled l This parameter is used when Working
Mode is set to Auto-Negotiation.
Symmetric Flow Control, the port can
send and process PAUSE frames.
Dissymmetric Flow Control, the port
can send PAUSE frames in the case of
congestion but cannot process received
PAUSE frames.
Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow
Control, the port can perform as follows:
Sends and processes PAUSE frames.
Sends but does not process PAUSE
frames.
Processes but does not send PAUSE
frames.
l The autonegotiation flow control mode of
the equipment on the local side must
match the autonegotiation flow control
mode of the equipment on the opposite
side.
Entry Detection Enabled, Disabled Enabled l This parameter specifies whether to
check the incoming packets from the port
according to the TAG attributes.
l Set this parameter according to actual
situations.
TAG Access, Tag Aware,
Hybrid
Tag Aware l When ports are configured with TAG
flags, the ports process frames by using
the methods provided in Table 9-6.
l If all the accessed services are frames
with the VLAN tag (tagged frames), set
this parameter to Tag Aware.
l If all the accessed services are frames that
do not have the VLAN tag (untagged
frames), set this parameter to Access.
l When the accessed services contain
tagged frames and untagged frames, set
this parameter to Hybrid.
9-113
Default VLAN ID 1 to 4095 1 l This parameter is valid only when TAG
is set to Access or Hybrid.
l For using this parameter, see Table 9-6.
situations.
VLAN Priority 0 to 7 0 l This parameter is valid only when TAG
l When the VLAN priority is required to
divide streams or to be used for other
purposes, set this parameter according to
actual situations. Generally, it is
recommended that you use the default
value.
Port Type UNI, C-Aware, S-
Aware
UNI l When this parameter is set to UNI, the
port processes data frames according to
the tag attributes.
l When this parameter is set to C-Aware
or S-Aware, the port does not process
data frames according to the tag attributes
but processes the data frames according
to the way of processing QinQ services.
l In the case of QinQ services, set this
parameter to the default value because the
NE automatically sets network attributes
according to the operation type that is set
when the QinQ services are created.
Enabling Broadcast
Packet Suppression
Enabled, Disabled Disabled This parameter specifies whether to restrict
the traffic of broadcast packets according to
the ratio of the broadcast packets to the total
packets. When a broadcast storm may occur
in the equipment on the opposite side, set
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Threshold
10% to 100% 30% The port discards the received broadcast
packets when the ratio of the received
broadcast packets to the total packets
exceeds the value of this parameter. The
value of this parameter should be greater
than the ratio of the broadcast packets to the
total packets when the broadcast storm does
not occur. Generally, set this parameter to
30% or a greater value.
Loop Detection Disabled, Enabled Disabled Sets whether to enable loop detection, which
is used to check whether a loop exists at the
port.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)

Table 9-6 Methods used by ports to process data frames
Direction Type of Data
Frame
How to Process
Tag aware Access Hybrid
Ingress Tagged frame The port receives the
frame.
The port discards the
frame.
The port receives the
frame.
Untagged frame The port discards the
frame.
The port adds the
VLAN tag to which
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority
correspond, to the
frame, and receives
the frame.
The port adds the
VLAN tag to which
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority
correspond, to the
frame, and receives
the frame.
Egress Tagged frame The port transmits
the frame.
The port strips the
VLAN tag from the
frame and then
transmits the frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
Default VLAN
ID, the port strips
the VLAN tag
from the frame
and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is not
Default VLAN
ID, the port
directly transmits
the frame.

9.11.2 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board
When an NE transmits Ethernet services to a line through an internal port (that is, VCTRUNK)
of an Ethernet board, the attributes of the internal port need to be set. Thus, the Ethernet board
works with the Ethernet board on the opposite side to realize the transmission of the Ethernet
services in the network.
Prerequisite
The Ethernet board must be included in the slot layout.
9-115
Precautions
The IDU 610 supports the Ethernet board EFT4. The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet boards
EFT4 and EMS6.
l The EFT4 board supports VCTRUNKs 14, which are bound with PORTs 14 respectively.
The EFT4 board does not support the setting of TAG attributes and network attributes.
l The EMS6 board supports VCTRUNKs 18. VCTRUNKs 18 determine the services to
be transmitted depending on information of the created Ethernet services.
The following procedures describe how to configure the internal port of an EMS6 board. The
EFT4 board does not support the configuration of the TAG attributes and network attributes.
Procedure
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Choose Internal Port.
Step 2 Set the encapsulation and mapping protocol used by the port.
1. Click the Encapsulation/Mapping tab.
2. Set Mapping Protocol and the protocol parameters.
3. Click Apply.
Step 3 Set the VC paths to be bound with the port.
1. Click the Bound Path tab.
2. Click Configuration.
The system displays the Bound Path Configuration dialog box.
3. In Configurable Ports, select a VCTRUNK as the port to be configured.
4. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Direction of the bound paths.
5. Select required items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click
.
6. Optional: Repeat Step 3.5 and bind other VCTRUNKs.
7. Click OK. Then, click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Step 4 Configure the LCAS function for the port.
1. Click the LCAS tab.
2. Set the Enabling LCAS parameter and other LCAS parameters.
3. Click Apply.
Step 5 Optional: Set the TAG attributes of the port.
1. Click the TAG Attributes tab.
2. Set the TAG attributes of the port.
3. Click Apply.
Step 6 Optional: Set the network attributes of the port.
1. Click the Network Attributes tab.
2. Set the network attributes of the port.
9-117
3. Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
Mapping Protocol GFP, LAPS, HDLC GFP It is recommended that you use the default
value.
Scramble Unscrambled,
Scrambling Mode
[X43+1],
Scrambling Mode
[X48+1]
Scrambling Mode
[X43+1]
l This parameter specifies the scrambling
polynomial used by the mapping
protocol.
default value.
Set Inverse Value
for CRC
Yes, No Yes l This parameter is valid only when
Mapping Protocol is set to LAPS or
HDLC.
l When this parameter is set to Yes, the
FCS is the result after you perform a
negation operation for the CRC.
l When this parameter is set to No, the FCS
is the CRC.
Check Field Length FCS32, FCS16, No FCS32 l When this parameter is set to FCS32, a
32-bit FCS is used.
l When this parameter is set to FCS16, a
16-bit FCS is used.
l When the Ethernet board uses the GFP
mapping protocol, this parameter can be
set to FCS32, FCS16, or No.
l When the Ethernet board uses the HDLC
set to FCS32 or FCS16.
l When the Ethernet board uses the LAPS
set to FCS32 or FCS16.
default value.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
FCS Calculated Bit
Sequence
Big endian, Little
endian
l Big endian (GFP)
l Little endian
(LAPS or HDLC)
l When this parameter is set to Big
endian, the least significant byte of the
FCS is placed first and the most
significant byte is placed last.
l When this parameter is set to Little
endian, the most significant byte of the
FCS is placed first and the least
significant byte is placed last.
default value.
Extension Header
Option
No, Yes No l This parameter specifies whether the
GFP payload header contains the
extension header and eHEC.
default value.
Configurable Ports VCTRUNKs VCTRUNK 1 This parameter specifies the VCTRUNK
whose VC paths are to be configured.
Available Bound
Paths
- - Adhere to the following principles to plan
and set this parameter:
l The capacity of VCTRUNKs should be
determined by the actual bandwidth
required by services.
l Bind only the paths in a VC-4 for a
VCTRUNK if possible. If the paths in
several VC-4s need to be bound, the
VC-4s that have the same transmission
path take priority.
l Each VC-4 of an Ethernet board can have
only VC-3 paths or only VC-12 paths.
Hence, when a VCTRUNK needs to be
bound with VC-3 paths, select VC-3
paths first from the VC-4 certain of
whose VC-3 paths are already bound.
When a VCTRUNK needs to be bound
with VC-12 paths, select VC-12 paths
first from the VC-4 certain of whose
VC-12 paths are already bound.
l Give priority to the paths in the VC-4-1
if a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with
VC-3 paths because the VC-4-1s of the
EFT4 board and EMS6 board support
only VC-3 paths whereas the VC-4-2s
support both VC-12 paths and VC-3
paths.
l Generally, bidirectional paths are bound.
9-119
Enabling LCAS Enabled, Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the
LCAS function is enabled.
l The LCAS can dynamically adjust the
number of virtual containers for mapping
required services to meet the bandwidth
requirements of the application. As a
result, the bandwidth utilization ratio is
improved.
LCAS Mode Huawei Mode,
Standard Mode
Huawei Mode l This parameter specifies the sequence in
which the LCAS sink sends the MST
control packet and Rs-Ack control
packet.
l When this parameter is set to Huawei
Mode, the LCAS sink first sends the Rs-
Ack and then sends the MST.
l When this parameter is set to Standard
Mode, the LCAS sink first sends the
MST and then sends the Rs-Ack.
l If the equipment on the opposite side is
the third-party equipment and does not
support the Huawei mode, it is
to Standard Mode. Otherwise, set this
parameter to Huawei Mode.
Hold Off Time (ms) 0, any integer that
ranges from 2000 to
10000 and has a step
of 100
2000 l When a member link is faulty, the LCAS
performs switching after a delay of time
to prevent the situation where an NE
simultaneously performs a protection
switching such as SNCP and performs an
LCAS switching. This parameter
specifies the duration of the delay.
l If the paths of the VCTRUNK are
configured with protection, it is
to 2000 ms. Otherwise, set this parameter
to 0.
WTR Time(s) 0 to 720 300 l When the time after a member link is
restored to normal reaches the set value
of this parameter, the VCG uses the
restored member link.
default value.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
TSD Enabled, Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the
TSD is used as a condition for
determining whether a member link is
faulty. In the case of the VC-12, the TSD
refers to the BIP_SD. In the case of the
VC-3, the TSD refers to the
B3_SD_VC3.
default value.
Entry Detection Enabled, Disabled Enabled l This parameter specifies whether to
check the incoming packets from the port
according to the TAG attributes.
situations.
Hybrid
Default VLAN ID 1 to 4095 1 l This parameter is valid only when TAG
situations.
VLAN Priority 0 to 7 0 l This parameter is valid only when TAG
l When the VLAN priority is required to
divide streams or to be used for other
purposes, set this parameter according to
actual situations. Generally, it is
value.
9-121
Port Type UNI, C-Aware, S-
Aware
UNI l When this parameter is set to UNI, the
port processes data frames according to
the tag attributes.
l When this parameter is set to C-Aware
or S-Aware, the port does not process
data frames according to the tag attributes
but processes the data frames according
to the way of processing QinQ services.
l In the case of QinQ services, set this
parameter to the default value because the
NE automatically sets network attributes
according to the operation type that is set
when the QinQ services are created.

NOTE
l The Mapping Protocol and protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at one end of a transmission line must
be the same as the Mapping Protocol and protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at the other end of the
transmission line.
l The Enabling LCAS and LCAS protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at one end of a transmission line
must be the same as the Enabling LCAS and LCAS protocol parameters set for VCTRUNKs at the other
end of the transmission line.
l The timeslots to which the paths bound with a VCTRUNK correspond must be the same at both ends of a
transmission line.
Table 9-7 Methods used by ports to process data frames
Frame
How to Process
Tag Aware Access Hybrid
Ingress Tagged frame The port receives the
frame.
The port discards the
frame.
The port receives the
frame.
Untagged frame The port discards the
frame.
The port adds the
VLAN tag to which
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority
correspond, to the
frame, and receives
the frame.
The port adds the
VLAN tag to which
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority
correspond, to the
frame, and receives
the frame.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Frame
How to Process
Tag Aware Access Hybrid
Egress Tagged frame The port transmits
the frame.
The port strips the
VLAN tag from the
frame and then
transmits the frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
Default VLAN
ID, the port strips
the VLAN tag
from the frame
and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is not
Default VLAN
ID, the port
directly transmits
the frame.

9.11.3 Modifying the Type Field of Jumbo Frames
By default, the type field of Jumbo frames processed by Ethernet boards is set to "0x8700".
Prerequisite
Precautions
The EMS6 board supports the modification of the type field of Jumbo frames.
Procedure
Management > Jumbo Frame from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Modify the type field of Jumbo frames.
Step 3 Click Apply.
----End
9-123
Parameters
Jumbo Frame 00 00 to FF FF 88 70 This parameter specifies the type
field of Jumbo frames. Set this
parameter according to the type
field of the accessed Jumbo frames.

9.11.4 Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the VCTRUNK
Bandwidth
When the LCAS function is enabled on an NE, you can dynamically increase or decrease the
VCTRUNK-bound paths to increase or decrease the bandwidth. The operation does not affect
services.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select
Internal Port.
Step 2 Click the Bound Path tab.
Step 3 Click Configuration.
The system displays the Bound Path Configuration dialog box.
Step 4 Optional: Dynamically increase the VCTRUNK bandwidth.
1. In Configurable Ports, select a VCTRUNK as the configurable port.
3. Select desired items in Available Resources and Available Timeslots and click
.
4. Optional: Repeat Step 4.3 and bind other VC paths.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Step 5 Optional: Dynamically decrease the VCTRUNK bandwidth.
1. Do not select the Display in Combination check box.
2. Select the VC paths to be deleted in Selected Bound Paths and click .
3. Optional: Repeat Step 5.2 to delete other VC paths.
Step 6 Click OK.
----End
Parameters
For specific parameters, see 9.11.2 Configuring the Internal Port of the Ethernet Board.
9.12 Creating Ethernet Services
The IDU 610 supports Ethernet private line services. The IDU 620 supports Ethernet private
line services and Ethernet LAN services.
9.12.1 Creating Ethernet Line Service
To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the line service, perform certain operations
to configure the related information, such as the service source and service sink.
9.12.2 Creating the Ethernet LAN Service
To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the LAN service, perform certain operations
to create the bridge and set the attributes of the bridge and to configure the mounted ports of the
bridge.
9.12.3 Modifying the Mounted Port of a Bridge
This operation enables the user to modify the mounted port of a bridge, the enabled state of the
mounted port, and Hub/Spoke attribute of the port.
9.12.4 Creating the VLAN Filter Table
9-125
You need to create the VLAN filter table for the bridge when you create the EVPLAN service.
9.12.5 Deleting an Ethernet Private Line Service
When an Ethernet private line service is not used, you can delete the Ethernet private line service
to release the corresponding resources.
9.12.6 Deleting an Ethernet LAN Service
When an Ethernet LAN service is not used, you can delete the Ethernet LAN service to release
the corresponding resources.
9.12.1 Creating Ethernet Line Service
To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the line service, perform certain operations
to configure the related information, such as the service source and service sink.
Prerequisite
The Ethernet switching board must be added in the slot layout.
Precautions
l This topic does not describe the method for creating the QinQ service.
l IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6. The EFT4 board is an Ethernet
transparent transmission board, and the PORTs of the EFT4 board correspond to the
VCTRUNKs. Hence, you do not need to create the Ethernet line service.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Step 2 Click New.
The Create Ethernet Line Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the attributes of the Ethernet line service.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Step 4 Optional: Set the port attributes of the source port and sink port.
NOTE
The result of setting the port attributes during the Ethernet line service configuration process is the same as the
result of directly setting the Ethernet service port attributes.
Step 5 Optional: Set the bound path.
The Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.
.
5. Optional: Repeat Step 5.4 to bind other VC paths.
9-127
NOTE
The result of setting the port attributes during the Ethernet line service configuration process is the same
as the result of directly setting the Ethernet service port attributes.
6. Click OK.
Step 6 Click OK.
----End
Parameters
Service Type EPL, EVPL (QinQ) EPL When creating the non-QinQ private line
Bidirectional
Bidirectional l When setting this parameter to
Unidirectional, create the service only
from the service source to the service
sink. That is, the service source is
forwarded only to the sink port.
l When setting this parameter to
Bidirectional, create the service from the
service source to the service sink and the
service from the service sink to the
service source. That is, when the service
source is forwarded to the sink port, the
service sink is forwarded to the source
port.
l Generally, it is recommended that you
use the default value.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Source Port A specific PORT or
VCTRUNK
PORT1 l This parameter indicates the port where
the service source resides.
l When creating the bidirectional Ethernet
service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK,
use a specific PORT as the source port.
Source C-VLAN
(e.g. 1,3-6)
14095 - l You can set this parameter to null, a
number, or several numbers. When
setting this parameter to several numbers,
use "," to separate these discrete values
and use "" to indicate continuous
numbers. For example, "1, 36" indicates
numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l The number of VLANs set in this
parameter should be the same as the
number of VLANs set in Sink C-VLAN
(e.g. 1,3-6).
l When you set this parameter to null, all
the services of the source port work as the
service source.
l When you set this parameter to a non-null
value, only the services of the source port
whose VLAN IDs are included in the set
value of this parameter work as the
service source.
Sink Port A specific PORT or
VCTRUNK
PORT1 l This parameter indicates the port where
the service sink resides.
l Do not set the value of this parameter to
the same as the value of Source Port.
l When creating the bidirectional Ethernet
service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK,
use a VCTRUNK as the sink port.
9-129
Sink C-VLAN (e.g.
1,3-6)
14095 - l You can set this parameter to null, a
number, or several numbers. When
setting this parameter to several numbers,
use "," to separate these discrete values
and use "" to indicate continuous
numbers. For example, "1, 36" indicates
numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l The number of VLANs set in this
parameter should be the same as the
number of VLANs set in Source C-
VLAN (e.g. 1,3-6).
l When you set this parameter to null, all
the services of the sink port work as the
service sink.
l When you set this parameter to a non-null
value, only the services of the sink port
whose VLAN IDs are included in the set
value of this parameter work as the
service sink.
Port Enabled Enabled, Disabled - When the source port or the sink port is set
to a PORT, set Port Enabled to Enabled.
Hybrid
Tag Aware l When all the accessed services are frames
l When all of the accessed services are not
frames with the VLAN tag (untagged
Configurable Ports VCTRUNKs VCTRUNK 1 This parameter specifies the VCTRUNK
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Available Bound
Paths
determined by the actual bandwidth
required by services.
l Bind only the paths in a VC-4 for a
VCTRUNK if possible. If the paths in
several VC-4s need to be bound, the
VC-4s that have the same transmission
path take priority.
whose VC-3 paths are already bound.
When a VCTRUNK needs to be bound
l Give priority to the paths in the VC-4-1
if a VCTRUNK needs to be bound with
VC-3 paths because the VC-4-1s of the
EFT4 board and EMS6 board support
only VC-3 paths whereas the VC-4-2s
support both VC-12 paths and VC-3
paths.

9.12.2 Creating the Ethernet LAN Service
To enable the Ethernet switching board to transmit the LAN service, perform certain operations
to create the bridge and set the attributes of the bridge and to configure the mounted ports of the
bridge.
Prerequisite
The Ethernet switching board must be included in the slot layout.
Precautions
l This task describes only how to create the 802.1d bridge and how to create the 802.1q
bridge.
l The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.
9-131
Procedure
Step 2 Click New.
The Create Ethernet LAN Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the attributes of the bridge according to the bridge type.
l Set the attributes of the 802.1q bridge.
l Set the attributes of the 802.1d bridge.
Step 4 Configure the mounted ports of the bridge.
1. Click Configure Mount.
The Service Mount Configuration dialog box is displayed.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
2. Select a port from the ports listed in Available Mounted Ports, and then click
.
3. Optional: Repeat Step 4.2 to select other mounted ports.
4. Click OK.
Step 5 Optional: If any VCTRUNK is mounted to the VB, configure the VC paths that are bound to
the VCTRUNK.
The Bound Path Configuration dialog box is displayed.
3. In Available Bound Paths, set Level and Service Direction of the bound paths.
.
5. Optional: Repeat Step 5.4 to bind other VC paths.
9-133
NOTE
The result of setting the port attributes during the Ethernet line service configuration process is the same
as the result of directly setting the Ethernet service port attributes.
6. Click OK.
Step 6 Click OK.
----End
Parameters
VB Name - - This parameter is a string that describes the
bridge. It is recommended that you set this
string to a value that contains the specific
purpose of the bridge.
Bridge Type 802.1q, 802.1d,
802.1ad (EMS6)
802.1q l When setting this parameter to 802.1q,
create the 802.1q bridge.
l When setting this parameter to 802.1d,
create the 802.1d bridge.
l Using the 802.1q bridge is a priority. If
the conditions of the VLAN that is used
by the user are not known and if the user
does not require the isolation of the data
among VLANs, you can also use the
802.1d bridge.
l This task describes only how to create the
802.1d bridge and how to create the
802.1q bridge.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Bridge Switch Mode IVL/Ingress Filter
Enable (802.1q),
SVL/Ingress Filter
Disable (802.1d)
IVL/Ingress Filter
Enable (802.1q),
SVL/Ingress Filter
Disable (802.1d)
l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all
the VLANs share one MAC address
table. When the bridge uses the IVL
mode, all the VLANs correspond to their
respective MAC address tables.
l If the ingress filter is enabled, the VLAN
tag is checked at the ingress port. If the
VLAN ID does not equal the VLAN ID
of the port defined in the VLAN filtering
table, the packet is discarded. If the
ingress filter is disabled, the preceding
described check is not conducted.
Mount Port - - l Only the port that is selected as the
mounted port of a bridge functions in the
packet forwarding process of the bridge.
situations.
Configurable Ports Mount each
VCTRUNK of the
port.
- This parameter specifies the VCTRUNK
Available Bound
Paths
determined by the actual bandwidth of
the service needs.
l Bind only the paths in a VC-4 if possible.
If the paths of several VC-4s need to be
bound, the VC-4s that have the same
transmission path take priority.
whose VC-3 paths are already bound;
when a VCTRUNK needs to be bound
l As the VC-4-1s of the EFT4 board and
EMS6 board support only VC-3 paths
whereas the VC-4-2s support both VC-12
paths and VC-3 paths, give priority to the
paths in the VC-4-1 if a VCTRUNK
needs to be bound with VC-3 paths.
9-135

9.12.3 Modifying the Mounted Port of a Bridge
This operation enables the user to modify the mounted port of a bridge, the enabled state of the
mounted port, and Hub/Spoke attribute of the port.
Prerequisite
The Ethernet LAN service must be created.
Precautions
CAUTION
Modifying the ports that are mounted to the bridge may interrupt the service.
The IDU 620 supports the Ethernet switching board EMS6.
Procedure
Step 2 Select the bridge that is already created, and click the Service Mount tab.
Step 3 Modify the mounted port of this bridge and the related attributes of the mounted port.
To change the port that is connected to the 802.1d/802.1q bridge, click the corresponding Mount
Port. After selecting the corresponding option from the drop-down list, click Apply.
To change the port that is connected to the 802.1ad bridge, click Configure Mount. After
changing the settings in the dialog box that is displayed, click OK.
----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameters
VB Port 1 to 14 - This parameter specifies the ID of the logical
port of the bridge.
Mount Port Unconnected, a
specific PORT, a
specific
VCTRUNK
- l Only the port that is selected as the
mounted port of a bridge functions in the
packet forwarding process of the bridge.
situations.
Port Enabled Enabled, Disabled Enabled Set Port Enabled to Enabled. Otherwise,
the port cannot forward the service.
Hub/Spoke Hub, Spoke Hub l The Spoke ports cannot access each other.
The Hub port and the Spoke port can
access each other. The Hub ports can
access each other.
situations.
Hybrid
9-137
Working Mode 10M Half-Duplex,
10M Full-Duplex,
100M Half-Duplex,
100M Full-Duplex,
1000M Full-
Duplex, Auto-
Negotiation
(EMS6)
Auto-Negotiation l The Ethernet ports of different types
support different working modes.
works in the auto-negotiation mode, set
the working mode of the equipment on the
local side to Auto-Negotiation.
works in the full-duplex mode, set the
local side to 10M Full-Duplex, 100M
Full-Duplex, or 1000M Full-Duplex
works in the half-duplex mode, set the
local side to 10M Half-Duplex, 100M
Half-Duplex, or Auto-Negotiation

9.12.4 Creating the VLAN Filter Table
You need to create the VLAN filter table for the bridge when you create the EVPLAN service.
Prerequisite
The EVPLAN service must be created.
Precautions
Procedure
Step 2 Select the bridge that is already created, and click the VLAN Filtering tab.
Step 3 Create the VLAN filter table.
1. Click New.
The Create VLAN dialog box is displayed.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
2. Set VLAN ID (e.g:1,3-6).
3. Select a port from the ports listed in Available forwarding ports, and then click
.
4. Optional: Repeat Step 3.3 to select other forwarding ports.
5. Click OK.
----End
Parameters
VLAN ID (e.g:
1,3-6)
14095 - l You can set this parameter to a number or
4, 5, and 6.
situations.
9-139
selected forwarding
ports
This parameter
indicates the ports
that are mounted to a
bridge.
- l The packets can be forwarded between
the selected forwarding ports only.
l The ports that are in selected forwarding
ports can forward only the packet that
carries the VLAN ID (e.g:1,3-6) tag.
These ports discard the packet that carries
other VLAN tags.
l The broadcast packet that is transmitted
by the ports in selected forwarding
ports is broadcast only to the ports
included in selected forwarding ports.

9.12.5 Deleting an Ethernet Private Line Service
When an Ethernet private line service is not used, you can delete the Ethernet private line service
to release the corresponding resources.
Prerequisite
The Ethernet private line service must be configured and the service is not be used.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the target Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration >
Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query.
Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.
Step 3 Select the Ethernet private line service that needs to be deleted and then click Delete.
Step 4 Click Query.
At this time, the Ethernet private line service is already deleted.
----End
9.12.6 Deleting an Ethernet LAN Service
When an Ethernet LAN service is not used, you can delete the Ethernet LAN service to release
the corresponding resources.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Prerequisite
The Ethernet LAN service must be configured and the service is not used.
Deleting an Ethernet LAN service involves the following tasks:
1. Deleting the VLAN filtering table
2. Deleting the VB mounting relation
Procedure
Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query.
Then, click OK in the dialog box that is displayed.
Step 3 Click the VLAN Filtering tab.
Step 4 Select the VLAN filtering entries that need to be deleted. Then, click Delete.
Step 5 Click the Service Mount tab.
Step 6 Select the Ethernet LAN service that needs to be deleted and then click Delete.
Step 7 Click Query.
At this time, the Ethernet private line service is already deleted.
----End
9.13 Configuring the Cross-Connections of Ethernet
Services
In the case of Ethernet over SDH, you need to configure the cross-connections of the Ethernet
services.
9.13.1 Creating Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services
This topic describes how to create the timeslot connections between the bound paths and the
line board, thus to ensure that the Ethernet services are transmitted in specified timeslots over
the transmission line.
9.13.2 Deleting the Cross-Connections of an Ethernet Service
When the cross-connections of an Ethernet service are deleted, the corresponding cross-
connection resources are released.
9-141
9.13.1 Creating Cross-Connections of Ethernet Services
This topic describes how to create the timeslot connections between the bound paths and the
line board, thus to ensure that the Ethernet services are transmitted in specified timeslots over
the transmission line.
See 9.4.2 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services to create the cross-
connections of the Ethernet services. If SNCP is configured for the Ethernet services, see 9.4.3
Creating Cross-Connections for SNCP Services to create the cross-connections of the SNCP
Ethernet services.
9.13.2 Deleting the Cross-Connections of an Ethernet Service
When the cross-connections of an Ethernet service are deleted, the corresponding cross-
connection resources are released.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 2 Click Query.
Step 3 Select the cross-connection of the Ethernet service that needs to be deleted in Cross-
Connection.
Step 4 Click Close.
Then, a dialog box is displayed. Click OK.
Step 5 Click Query.
At this time, the cross-connection of the Ethernet service is already deleted.
----End
9.14 Configuring the QoS
The QoS provides differentiated services. Hence, you can configure the QoS to ensure the quality
of the Ethernet services.
9.14.1 Creating a Flow
In the case of the Ethernet switching board, a flow refers to the collection of packets on which
the same QoS operation is performed. Creating a flow is the prerequisite for performing CAR
and CoS operations.
9.14.2 Creating the CAR
CAR is a type of traffic policing technologies. After the flow classification, the CAR assesses
the rate of the traffic in a certain period (including in the long term and in the short term). The
CAR sets the packet whose rate does not exceed the specified rate to high priority and discards
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
the packet whose rate exceeds the specified rate or downgrades this kind of packet, thus
restricting the traffic into the transmission network.
9.14.3 Creating the CoS
By using the CoS, the packets in a flow can be scheduled to different queues of different priorities
and can be processed according to the priority of each queue. This ensures that the packets of
different priorities can be processed according to different QoS requirements.
9.14.4 Binding the CAR/CoS
To enable the CAR or CoS function, bind the corresponding flow to the created CAR/CoS.
9.14.5 Configuring the Traffic Shaping
The traffic shaping can restrict the traffic and burst of a connection in a network, and thus enables
the packets to be transmitted at an even rate.
9.14.6 Configuring the CoS of the IFH2 Board
The IFH2 board supports scheduling packets into different queues according to the
corresponding user priority levels in the VLAN tags.
9.14.7 Modifying CAR Parameters
The committed access rate (CAR) is the traffic policing technology that is used to check the
traffic rate within a specific period (a long time or short time) after the flow classification. The
CAR allocates the packets whose rates do not exceed the rate limit of the packets of higher
priority, and discards or downgrades the packets whose rates exceed the rate limit. In this process,
restriction of the service access to the transport network is realized. That is, you can adjust the
rate limit by adjusting the parameters such as the committed information rate and the peak
information rate.
9.14.8 Modifying CoS Parameters
The class of service (CoS) schedules packets into different priority queues and processes the
packets according to the priority levels of the specific queues. Modifying the CoS parameters
may affect the priority of the egress packets.
9.14.1 Creating a Flow
In the case of the Ethernet switching board, a flow refers to the collection of packets on which
the same QoS operation is performed. Creating a flow is the prerequisite for performing CAR
and CoS operations.
Prerequisite
The associated Ethernet service must be created.
Precautions
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
9-143
Step 2 Click the Flow Configuration tab.
Step 3 Click New.
The New Flow dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Set the flow parameters.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameters
Flow Type Port Flow, Port
+VLAN Flow, Port
+SVLAN Flow,
Port+CVLAN
+SVLAN Flow
Port Flow Port flow: The packets from a certain port
are classified as a type of flow. The Ethernet
service associated with this flow type is the
line service or Layer 2 switching service that
uses this port as the service source.
Port+VLAN flow: The packets that are from
a certain port and have a specified VLAN
ID are classified as a type of flow. The
associated Ethernet service of this flow type
is the line service that uses this port+VLAN
as the service source.
Port+SVLAN flow: The packets that are
from a certain port and have a specified
SVLAN ID are classified as a type of flow.
The associated Ethernet service of this flow
type is the EVPL service (based on QinQ)
or EVPLAN service (based on the 802.1ad
bridge) that uses this port + S-VLAN as the
service source.
Port+CVLAN+SVLAN flow: The packets
that are from a certain port and have a
specified CVLAN+SVLAN are classified
as a type of flow. The associated Ethernet
service of this flow type is the EVPL service
(based on QinQ) or EVPLAN service (based
on the 802.1ad bridge) that uses this port +
C-VLAN + S-VLAN as the service source.
Port PORT1PORT6,
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK8
(EMS6)
PORT1 l When the associated service is the line
service, set this parameter to the source
port or sink port of the associated
Ethernet service.
l When the associated service is the Layer
2 switching service, set this parameter to
a mounted port of the bridge.
VLAN ID 14095 1 l This parameter is valid only when Flow
Type is set to Port+VLAN Flow.
l Set this parameter to the source VLAN of
the associated Ethernet service.
C-VLAN 14095 1 l This parameter is valid only when Flow
Type is set to Port+SVLAN+CVLAN
Flow.
l Set this parameter to the source C-VLAN
of the associated Ethernet service.
9-145
S-VLAN 14095 1 l This parameter is valid only when Flow
Type is set to Port+SVLAN Flow or set
to Port+SVLAN+CVLAN Flow
l Set this parameter to the source S-VLAN
of the associated Ethernet service.

Postrequisite
After creating a flow, bind it to the corresponding CAR or CoS operation as required.
9.14.2 Creating the CAR
CAR is a type of traffic policing technologies. After the flow classification, the CAR assesses
the rate of the traffic in a certain period (including in the long term and in the short term). The
CAR sets the packet whose rate does not exceed the specified rate to high priority and discards
the packet whose rate exceeds the specified rate or downgrades this kind of packet, thus
restricting the traffic into the transmission network.
Prerequisite
Precautions
Procedure
Step 2 Click the CAR Configuration tab.
Step 3 Click New.
The New Car dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Set the CAR parameters.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Parameters
CAR ID 165535 (EMS6) - This parameter identifies a CAR
operation, and is used to bind a flow
Enabled/Disabled Enabled, Disabled Disabled This parameter determines whether
to enable the CAR operation
performed on the flow bound to the
CAR.
Committed Information
Rate (kbit/s)
An integer ranging from 0
to 1048576, with a step of
64
0 l When the rate of the packets is
not more than the CIR, these
packets pass the restriction of the
CAR and are forwarded first
even in the case of network
congestion.
l The value of this parameter
should not be more than the PIR.
9-147
Committed Burst Size
(kbyte)
01024 0 When the rate of the packets that
pass the restriction of the CAR is
not more than the CIR in a certain
period, certain packets can burst
and can pass the restriction of the
CAR. These packets can be
forwarded first even in the case of
network congestion. The maximum
traffic of the burst packets is
determined by the CBS. Note that
the CBS has an inherent size, and
this parameter indicates the
increment value only. The inherent
size of the CBS is determined by the
CIR. The greater the CIR, the
greater the CBS.
Peak Information Rate
(kbit/s)
An integer ranging from 0
to 1048576, with a step of
64
0 l When the rate of the packets is
more than the PIR, these packets
that exceed the rate restriction
are directly discarded. When the
rate of the packets is more than
the CIR but is not more than the
PIR, the packets whose rate is
more than the CIR can pass the
restriction of the CAR and are
marked yellow, which enables
these packets to be discarded
first in the case of network
congestion.
l The value of this parameter
should not be more than the
bandwidth at the port.
Maximum Burst Size
(kbyte)
01024 0 When the rate of the packets that
pass the restriction of the CAR is
more than the CIR but is not more
than the PIR, certain packets can
burst and are marked yellow, which
enables these packets to be
discarded first in the case of
network congestion. The maximum
traffic of the burst packets is
determined by the set MBS. Note
that the MBS has an inherent size,
and this parameter indicates the
increment value only. The inherent
size of the MBS is determined by
the PIR. The greater the PIR, the
greater the MBS.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)

Postrequisite
After creating the CAR, bind the flow to the corresponding CAR operation as required.
9.14.3 Creating the CoS
By using the CoS, the packets in a flow can be scheduled to different queues of different priorities
and can be processed according to the priority of each queue. This ensures that the packets of
different priorities can be processed according to different QoS requirements.
Prerequisite
Precautions
Procedure
Step 2 Click the CoS Configuration tab.
Step 3 Click New.
The New CoS dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Set the CoS parameters.
9-149
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Parameters
CoS ID 165535 1 This parameter identifies a CoS operation,
and is used to bind a flow to an associated
CoS operation.
CoS Type In the case of the
EMS6 board:
l simple
l VLAN priority
l DSCP
- l If the CoS type of a flow is set to simple,
all the packets in this flow are directly
scheduled to a specified egress queue.
l If the CoS type of a flow is set to VLAN
priority, the packets in this flow are
scheduled to specified egress queues
according to the user priorities specified
in the VLAN tags of these packets.
l If the CoS type of a flow is set to DSCP,
the packets in this flow are scheduled to
specified egress queues according to
differentiated services code point
(DSCP) in the IPv6 tags of these packets.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
CoS Priority In the case of the
EMS6 board: 07
0 This parameter specified which queue a
packet is scheduled to.
In the case of the EMS6 board:
l Each port on the EMS6 board supports
eight egress queues, and the CoS
priorities of these eight queues are from
0 to 7.
l If the traffic shaping feature of all the
queues is enabled or disabled, the queue
whose CoS priority is 7 is an SP queue,
and the other queues whose priorities are
from 0 to 6 are WRR queues. The
weighted proportion of these WRR
queues are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from
l If the traffic shaping feature of certain
queues is enabled, the bandwidth is
allocated first to the queue whose traffic
shaping feature is enabled, according to
the set CIR. The remaining bandwidth is
allocated to the queues whose traffic
shaping is disabled, according to the SP
+WRR algorithm.

Postrequisite
After creating the CoS, bind the flow to the corresponding CoS operation as required.
9.14.4 Binding the CAR/CoS
To enable the CAR or CoS function, bind the corresponding flow to the created CAR/CoS.
Prerequisite
The flow and CAR/CoS must be created.
Precautions
9-151
Procedure
Management > Flow Management.
Step 2 Click the Flow Configuration tab.
Step 3 Bind the CAR/CoS.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
Bound CAR - - This parameter indicates the CAR ID
corresponding to a CAR operation.
Different CAR IDs should be bound to
different flows, even though the parameters
of the CAR operations are the same.
Bound CoS - - This parameter indicates the CoS ID
corresponding to a CoS operation.

9.14.5 Configuring the Traffic Shaping
The traffic shaping can restrict the traffic and burst of a connection in a network, and thus enables
the packets to be transmitted at an even rate.
Prerequisite
Precautions
Procedure
Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Step 2 In Port List, select a port.
Step 3 Set the traffic shaping information about the port queue.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
Port A specific PORT or
VCTRUNK
- This parameter indicates the port whose
traffic is shaped.
Enabled/Disabled Enabled, Disabled Disabled l This parameter determines whether to
enable the traffic shaping of an egress
queue.
l If the traffic shaping feature of certain
queues is enabled, the bandwidth is
allocated first to the queue whose traffic
shaping feature is enabled, according to
the set CIR. The remaining bandwidth is
allocated to the queues whose traffic
shaping is disabled, according to the SP
+WRR algorithm.
CIR (kbit/s) An integer ranging
from 0 to 1048574,
with a step of 64
0 l When the rate of the packets is not more
than the CIR, these packets directly enter
the egress queue.
l The value of this parameter should not be
more than the PIR.
PIR (kbit/s) An integer ranging
from 0 to 1048574,
with a step of 64
0 l When the rate of the packets is more than
the PIR, the packets that exceed the rate
restriction are directly discarded. When
the rate of the packets is more than the
CIR but not more than the PIR, the
packets whose rate is more than the CIR
enter the buffer of the CIR. When the
buffer overflows, the packets are marked
yellow and enter the egress queue, which
enables these packets to be discarded first
in the case of queue congestion.
l The value of this parameter should not be
more than the bandwidth at the port.

9-153
9.14.6 Configuring the CoS of the IFH2 Board
The IFH2 board supports scheduling packets into different queues according to the
corresponding user priority levels in the VLAN tags.
Prerequisite
The IFH2 board must be added in the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the IFH2 board in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Configuration > QoS Management
> Flow Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Set CoS Priority for User Priority 0 in the VLAN Tag to User Priority 7 in the VLAN
Tag.
Step 3 Click Apply.
----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameters
CoS Parameter User Priority 0 in the
VLAN Tag. User
Priority 1 in the
VLAN Tag, User
Priority 2 in the
VLAN Tag, User
Priority 3 in the
VLAN Tag, User
Priority 4 in the
VLAN Tag, User
Priority 5 in the
VLAN Tag, User
Priority 6 in the
VLAN Tag, User
Priority 7 in the
VLAN Tag
- This parameter specifies the data flows. The
IFH2 boards supports differentiating the
data flows according to the user priority
levels in the VLAN tags of packets.
CoS Priority 03 0 l This parameter specifies the queue to
which a packet should be scheduled.
l The IFH2 board supports four queues.
The corresponding CoS priority levels
that correspond to the four queues are 0
3 and the scheduling scheme is SP. The
higher the CoS priority, the higher is the
queue priority.

9.14.7 Modifying CAR Parameters
The committed access rate (CAR) is the traffic policing technology that is used to check the
traffic rate within a specific period (a long time or short time) after the flow classification. The
CAR allocates the packets whose rates do not exceed the rate limit of the packets of higher
priority, and discards or downgrades the packets whose rates exceed the rate limit. In this process,
restriction of the service access to the transport network is realized. That is, you can adjust the
rate limit by adjusting the parameters such as the committed information rate and the peak
information rate.
Prerequisite
The CAR must be configured.
Precautions
9-155
Procedure
QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the CAR Configuration tab.
Step 3 Click Query.
Step 4 Select CAR ID that needs to be changed.
Step 5 Modify the other parameters that need to be modified.
Step 6 Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
For details, see 9.14.2 Creating the CAR.
9.14.8 Modifying CoS Parameters
The class of service (CoS) schedules packets into different priority queues and processes the
packets according to the priority levels of the specific queues. Modifying the CoS parameters
may affect the priority of the egress packets.
Prerequisite
The CoS must be configured.
Precautions
Procedure
QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the CoS Configuration tab.
Step 3 Click Query.
Step 4 Select the CoS ID that needs to be changed.
Step 5 Select the CoS Parameter that needs to be changed.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Step 6 Modify CoS Priority.
Step 7 Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
For details, see 9.14.3 Creating the CoS.
9.15 Creating a LAG
Link aggregation allows all the members in a LAG to share the incoming and outgoing service
loads, thus increasing bandwidth. In addition, the members in the same LAG provide backup to
each other dynamically. This increases the availability of the connection.
Prerequisite
The physical network topology must be established.
Ethernet boards must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
Step 3 Click New and the Create Link Aggregation Group dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters.
9-157
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 Optional: Click the Link Aggregation Parameters tab. Set Port Priority and System
Priority.
NOTE
l The port ID consists of Port and Port Priority. The port that has the smallest port ID in a LAG has
the priority to be aggregated first.
l The system ID consists of System Priority and System MAC Address. When the system negotiates
with the remote system, the system with the smallest ID has the priority to choose the port. In this
example, the system refers to the board, and the system MAC address refers to the MAC address of
the board. The factory-set MAC address is globally unique and cannot be modified.
----End
Parameters
Field Value Default Description
LAG No. An integer from 1 to
7(EMS6)
- Displays the LAG
number.
LAG Name For example: LAG_1 - Displays the LAG
name.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
LAG Type Manual, Static Static l Static: If this value
is selected, you
can manually
create a LAG with
the LACP
protocol. You can
verify the working
status (selected or
standby) of ports
in the LAG. In a
LAG, a port can be
in the Selected or
Standby state.
The convergence
information is
exchanged among
the different
equipment
through the LACP
protocol, so that
the convergence
information can
be consistent.
l Manual: If this
value is selected,
you can manually
create a LAG with
no LACP
protocol. The port
can be in the UP or
DOWN state.
According to the
physical (UP or
DOWN) state of
the port, you can
determine
whether to
perform a
convergence.
In the case of the
LAG that is created
for the IF 1+1
protection, this
parameter is set to
Manual. In other
situations, set this
parameter according
to the requirements
of the opposite
equipment.
9-159
Load Sharing Sharing, Non-
Sharing
Sharing l Sharing: If this
value is selected,
each member link
of a LAG has
traffic at the same
time and shares
loads together.
The load sharing
can increase a
higher bandwidth
for the link. When
the LAG members
change, or certain
links fail, the
system
automatically re-
allocates the
traffic.
l Non-Sharing:
Only one member
link of a LAG has
traffic, and other
links are standby.
In this case, a type
of hot backup
mechanism is
provided. When
the active link of a
LAG fails, the
system chooses
one link from the
standby links of
the LAG and
activates it, to
suppress the link
failure.
In the case of the
LAG that is created
for the IF 1+1
protection, this
parameter is set to
Non-Sharing. In
other situations, set
this parameter
according to the
requirements of the
opposite equipment.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Sharing Mode IP Sharing Mode,
MAC Sharing Mode
IP Sharing Mode This parameter can
be set only when
Load Sharing is set
to Sharing.
Revertive
Revertive This parameter can
be set only when
Load Sharing is set
to Non-Sharing.
When a LAG
cooperates with IF 1
+1 protection of
Hybrid radio, you
need to set this
parameter to Non-
Revertive.
9-161
Main Port For example: PORT1 - The main port in a
LAG.
l In the case of the
LAG that is
created for the IF 1
+1 protection, you
need to select the
port that is
interconnected
with the active IF
board IFH2 for
this parameter.
l In other situations,
set this parameter
according to the
requirements of
the opposite
equipment.
After a LAG is
created, you can add
Ethernet services to
the main port only.
Services cannot be
added to a slave port.
When the Load
Sharing parameter is
set to Non-Sharing,
all services are
transmitted on the
link to which the
main port is
connected. The links
to which other slave
ports are connected
function as
protection links.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Slave Port - - The slave port in a
LAG.
The parameter
specifies that a link
aggregation group is
manually created
rather than being
automatically
created by the
system. A link
aggregation group
contains main ports
and slave ports. The
slave ports in a link
aggregation group
are fixed. Unless they
are manually
modified, the system
does not
automatically add
them to or delete
them from the link
aggregation group.
Available Slave
Ports
For example: PORT2 - l In the case of the
LAG that is
created for the IF 1
+1 protection, you
need to select the
port that is
interconnected
with the standby
IF board IFH2 for
this parameter.
l In other situations,
set this parameter
according to the
requirements of
the opposite
equipment.
Selected Slave Ports For example: PORT2 - Displays the port that
is selected as a slave
port.
9-163
Status Unknown, In
Service, Out of
Service
- The parameter
specifies the state,
which is derived
from logical
computation, of each
member ports in a
link aggregation
group.
l If you do not query
a LAG, the port
status is
Unknown.
l If the port is the
actually working
port and services
are forwarded at
the port, the port
status is In
Service.
l If the port is the
standby port and
no service is
forwarded at the
port, the port
status is Out of
Service.
Port Priority 0-65535, in step
length of 1
32768 This parameter is
valid only when the
LAG Type of a LAG
is set to Static.
This parameter
indicates the
priorities of the ports
in a LAG as defined
in the LACP
protocol. The smaller
the value, the higher
the priority.
When ports are
added into a LAG,
the port with highest
priority is preferred
to transmit services.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
System Priority 0-65535, in step
length of 1
32768 This parameter is
valid only when
LAG Type of a LAG
is set to Static.
This parameter
indicates the priority
of a LAG. The
smaller the value, the
higher the priority.
When a local LAG
negotiates with an
opposite LAG
through LACP
packets, both LAGs
can obtain the system
priorities of each
other. Then, the
computation result
based on the logic
that is selected by the
LAG with the higher
system priority is
considered as the
result of both LAGs.
If the priorities of
both LAGs are the
same, the system
MAC addresses are
compared. Then, the
computation result
based on the logic
that is selected by the
LAG with lower
system MAC address
is considered as the
result of both LAGs.
System MAC
Address
For example: 00-16-
EC-FA-AC-0A
- Displays the system
MAC address.

NOTE
For different boards, the value ranges of the port and system priorities are different.
9.16 LPT Configuration
When enabling the LPT function for an Ethernet service, you need to configure the LPT port
and the related information.
9-165
Prerequisite
The Ethernet data board supports the LPT function.
The port-based Ethernet private line service must be created and activated.
The data service is configured as the pure transparent service.
Precautions
NOTE
l Point-to-point LPT and point-to-multipoint LPT are mutually exclusive. On one board, you can select
only one configuration mode to realize the LPT function.
l The data service of the point-to-point LPT is configured as the pure transparent service.
CAUTION
Before configuring the point-to-multipoint LPT function, make sure that the following two
conditions are met. Otherwise, the services may be interrupted.
l The data services are displayed in the tree topology.
l The data service topology is consistent with that of the LPT.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > LPT Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Optional: Configuring Point-to-Point LPT.
1. Click Query. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
2. Select a PORT and a VCTRUNK port, and then set the following parameters.
NOTE
If LPT is enabled, you can set Port-Type Port Hold-Off Time(ms) and VCTRUNK Port Hold-
Off Time(ms) as required.
3. Click Apply and a prompt appears telling you the operation was successful.
4. Click Close.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 2 to configure point-to-point LPT for the opposite NE.
Step 3 Optional: Configuring Point-to-Multipoint LPT.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
1. Click Advanced Configuration.
2. In the LPT Management window, click New.
3. In the Create LPT window, select Port from the Convergence Point pane, and set Hold-
Off Time(ms).
NOTE
If the port at the convergence point is a VCTRUNK port, you need to set Bearer Mode.
4. In the Access Point pane, select an appropriate Port and click . Double-click
Bearer Mode and select an appropriate bearer mode from the drop-down list.
NOTE
l If the port at the convergence point is not a VCTRUNK port, do not set Bearer Mode.
l If you want to modify Bearer Mode, you can modify it in the Modify LPT window.
5. Click OK. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.
6. Repeat Steps 1 and Steps 3 to configure point-to-multipoint LPT for other NEs.
----End
Parameter
Table 9-8 Parameter of the Point-to-Point LPT
Port For
example:
PORT1
- The external port of board.
VCTRUNK
Port
For
example:
VCTRU
NK1
- The VCTRUNK port where
EPL services are transparently
transmitted.
9-167
Direction Positive,
Reverse
- The direction of the EPL
services that are transparently
transmitted.
The direction is Positive if the
source port is a PORT port and
the sink port is a VCTRUNK
port. The direction is Reverse
if the source port is a
VCTRUNK port and the sink
port is a PORT port.
LPT Yes, No No Sets whether to use LPT.
Bearer Mode GFP
(HUAW
EI),
Ethernet
GFP(HUAWEI) This parameter is valid only
when the LPT occurs.
The bearer mode of LPT
frames.
Port-Type
Port Hold-Off
Time (ms)
0 to
10000
100 This parameter is valid only
When the LPT switching is
enabled, the port informs the
opposite end after the hold-off
time.
VCTRUNK
Port Hold-Off
Time (ms)
0 to
10000
100 This parameter is valid only
When the LPT switching is
enabled, the port informs the
opposite end after the hold-off
time.

Table 9-9 Parameter of the Point-to-Multipoint LPT
Convergence
Point
Port PORT1 to
PORT6,
VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK8
PORT1 The port where
the convergence
point resides.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Bearer Mode GFP
(HUAWEI),
Ethernet
GFP
(HUAWEI)
The bearer
mode of the port
where the access
point resides.
This parameter
can be edited
only when it is
supported by a
board.
Hold-Off Time
(ms)
0 to 10000 0 If LPT
switching is
enabled, the port
notifies the
opposite end
after the hold-
off time.
Access Point Port PORT1 to
PORT6,
VCTRUNK1 to
VCTRUNK8
- The port where
the access point
resides.
Bearer Mode GFP
(HUAWEI),
Ethernet
GFP
(HUAWEI)
The bearer
mode of the port
where the access
point resides.
This parameter
can be edited
only when it is
supported by a
board.

9.17 Configuring the Layer 2 Switching Feature
You can configure the Layer 2 switching feature for Ethernet LAN services according to the
actual service requirements.
9.17.1 Creating the Entry of a MAC Address Table Manually
The bridge can obtain the dynamic entry of a MAC address table by using the SVL or IVL mode.
In addition, you can manually add the entry of a MAC address table. The manually created
entries of a MAC address table can be classified into two categories: unicast entry (that is, static
entry) and disabled entry (that is, blacklist entry).
9.17.2 Modifying the Aging Time of the MAC Address Table Entry
In the case of the Ethernet switching board, the aging time of a MAC address table entry is 5
minutes by default.
9.17.3 Configuring the Spanning Tree Protocol
In the case of the Layer 2 service, if the loop is formed, enable the STP or RSTP for the bridge
and set bridge parameters and port parameters.
9-169
9.17.4 Configuring the IGMP Snooping Protocol
If the bridge accesses a LAN where the IGMP multicast server exists, you can enable the IGMP
Snooping protocol and configure the method for processing the unknown multicast packet.
9.17.5 Modifying the Aging Time of the Multicast Table Item
In the case of the Ethernet switching board, the aging time of a multicast table item is 8 minutes
by default.
9.17.6 Configuring the Broadcast Packet Suppression Function
When the broadcast packet suppression function is enabled, the port discards the newly received
broadcast packets when the bandwidth used by the received broadcast packets exceeds the preset
broadcast packet suppression threshold of the port.
9.17.1 Creating the Entry of a MAC Address Table Manually
The bridge can obtain the dynamic entry of a MAC address table by using the SVL or IVL mode.
In addition, you can manually add the entry of a MAC address table. The manually created
entries of a MAC address table can be classified into two categories: unicast entry (that is, static
entry) and disabled entry (that is, blacklist entry).
Prerequisite
The VLAN filter table must be created.
Precautions
Procedure
Step 2 Optional: Create the unicast entry manually.
1. Select the bridge that is already created, and click the VLAN Unicast tab.
2. Click New.
The Create VLAN Unicast dialog box is displayed.
3. Set the parameters of the unicast entry.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
4. Click OK.
Step 3 Optional: Create the disabled entry manually.
1. Select the bridge that is already created, and click the Disable MAC Address tab.
2. Click New.
The Disable MAC Address Creation dialog box is displayed.
3. Set the parameters of the disabled entry.
4. Click OK.
----End
Parameters
VLAN ID 14095 - l In the case of the 802.1d bridge and the
802.1ad bridge, this parameter is invalid
if the SVL mode is used. The set entry
applies to all the VLANs.
l In the case of the 802.1q bridge and the
802.1ad bridge, the set entry applies only
to the VLAN whose ID is equal to the set
value of this parameter if the IVL mode
is used.
situations.
MAC Address - - Set this parameter according to actual
situations.
Physical Port Each port that is
mounted to a bridge
- This parameter indicates the Ethernet port
corresponding to a MAC address. Set this
parameter according to actual situations.
9-171

9.17.2 Modifying the Aging Time of the MAC Address Table Entry
In the case of the Ethernet switching board, the aging time of a MAC address table entry is 5
minutes by default.
Prerequisite
Precautions
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Layer-2
Switching Management > Aging Time from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Modify the aging time of the MAC address table entry.
1. Double-click MAC Address Aging Time corresponding to this Ethernet switching board.
The MAC Address Aging Time dialog box is displayed.
2. Set the duration and unit of the aging time.
3. Click OK.
Step 3 Click Apply.
----End
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Parameters
MAC Address
Aging Time
1 Min to 120 Day 5 Min l If one entry is not updated in a certain
period, that is, if no new packet from this
MAC address is received to enable the re-
learning of this MAC address, this entry
is automatically deleted. This mechanism
is called aging, and this period is called
aging time.
l If this parameter is set to a very large
value, the bridge stores excessive MAC
address table entries that are outdated,
which exhausts the resources of the MAC
address forwarding table.
l If this parameter is set to a very small
value, the bridge may delete the MAC
address table entry that is needed, which
reduces the forwarding efficiency.
default value.

9.17.3 Configuring the Spanning Tree Protocol
In the case of the Layer 2 service, if the loop is formed, enable the STP or RSTP for the bridge
and set bridge parameters and port parameters.
Prerequisite
Precautions
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Layer-2
Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Optional: Set the enabled status of the protocol.
1. Click the Protocol Enable tab.
2. Configure parameters of the enabled protocol.
9-173
3. Click Apply.
Step 3 Optional: Set bridge parameters.
1. Click the Bridge Parameter tab.
2. Set bridge parameters.
3. Click Apply.
Step 4 Optional: Set port parameters.
1. Click the Port Parameter tab.
2. Set port parameters.
3. Click Apply.
Step 5 Optional: If you are enabling the RSTP, set the point-to-point attribute of the Ethernet port.
1. Click the Point to Point Attribute tab.
2. Set the point-to-point attribute.
3. Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
Protocol Enabled Enabled, Disabled Disabled l This parameter determines whether to
enable the spanning tree protocol.
l It is recommended that you do not enable
the STP or RSTP in the service
networking process, because this can
prevent the Layer 2 service from forming
the loop.
l If the loop is already formed in the service
networking, you must start the STP or
RSTP.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Protocol Type STP, RSTP RSTP l This parameter is valid only when
Protocol Enabled is set to Enabled.
l The protocol type should be set according
to the requirement of the interconnected
Ethernet equipment. Generally, it is
value.
Priority (Bridge
Parameter)
061440 32768 l The most significant 16 bits of the bridge
ID indicates the priority of the bridge.
l The smaller the value of this parameter,
the higher the priority and the higher the
possibility that the bridge is selected as
the root bridge.
l If the priorities of all the bridges in the
STP network use the same value, the
bridge whose MAC address is the
smallest is selected as the root bridge.
Max Age (s) 640 20 l This parameter indicates the maximum
age of the CBPDU packet that is recorded
by the port.
l The greater the value, the longer the
transmission distance of the CBPDU,
which indicates that the network diameter
is greater. When the value of this
parameter is greater, it is less possible that
the bridge detects the link fault in a timely
manner and thus the network adaptation
ability is reduced.
Hello Time (s) 110 2 l This parameter indicates the interval of
transmitting the CBPDU packet of the
bridge.
l The greater the value of this parameter,
the less the network resources that are
occupied by the spanning tree. The
topology stability, however, decreases.
Forward Delay (s) 430 15 l This parameter indicates the holding time
of a port in the listening state and in the
learning state.
l The greater the value, the longer the delay
time of the network state change. Hence,
the topology changes are slower and the
recovery in the case of faults is slower.
TxHoldCout (per
second)
110 6 This parameter indicates the number of
times the port transmits the CBPDU in every
second.
9-175
Priority (Port
Parameters)
0240 128 l The most significant eight bits of the port
ID indicate the port priority.
l The smaller the value of this parameter,
the higher the priority.
Port Path Cost 165535 - l This parameter indicates the status of the
network that the port is connected to.
l In the case of the bridges on both ends of
the path, set this parameter to the same
value.
Admin Edge
Attribute
Enabled, Disabled Disabled l This parameter is valid only when the
RSTP is used.
l This parameter determines whether to set
the port to an edge port. The edge port
refers to the bridge port that is connected
only to the LAN. The edge port receives
the BPDU and does not transmit the
BPDU.
l This parameter is set to Enabled only
when the Ethernet port of the Ethernet
board is directly connected to the data
communication terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In other cases, it is
value.
Protocol Enabled Enabled, Disabled Enabled l Specifies whether the STP/RSTP
protocol is enabled for the port.
l When this parameter is set to Disabled,
the BPDU cannot be processed and
transmitted.
adopts the default value.
Auto Edge
Detection
Enabled, Disabled Disabled l This parameter is valid only when Admin
Edge Attribute is set to Enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled, if
the bridge detects that this port is
connected to the port of other bridges, the
RSTP considers this port as a non-edge
port.
l If Admin Edge Attribute is set to
Enabled, set this parameter to Enabled.
In other cases, it is recommended that you
use the default value.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Point-to-Point
Attribute
Adaptive
connection, Link
connection, Shared
media
Adaptive
connection
l This parameter is valid only when the
RSTP is used.
l If this parameter is set to Adaptive
connection, the bridge determines the
actual point-to-point attribute of the port
according to the actual working mode of
the port. If the actual working mode of the
port is full-duplex, the actual point-to-
point attribute of the port is "true". If the
actual working mode of the port is half-
duplex, the actual point-to-point attribute
of the port is "false".
l If this parameter is set to Link
connection, the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port is "true".
l If this parameter is set to Shared media,
the actual point-to-point attribute of the
port is "false".
l Only the port whose point-to-point
attribute is "true" can transmit the rapid
transition request and response.
default value.

NOTE
l In the service networking process, it is recommended that you prevent the loop from forming in the case of
the Layer 2 service and thus avoid enabling the STP or RSTP.
l Because the RSTP and STP are complicated, it is recommended that you negotiate with the engineer in
charge of maintaining the opposite Ethernet equipment and set the related parameters as instructed, before
enabling the STP or RSTP.
9.17.4 Configuring the IGMP Snooping Protocol
If the bridge accesses a LAN where the IGMP multicast server exists, you can enable the IGMP
Snooping protocol and configure the method for processing the unknown multicast packet.
Prerequisite
The VLAN filter table must be created.
9-177
Precautions
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Layer-2
Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Protocol Enable tab.
Step 3 Set the information related to the IGMP Snooping protocol.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
Protocol Enable Enabled, Disabled Disabled l This parameter determines whether to
enable the IGMP Snooping protocol.
l If the bridge accesses a LAN where the
IGMP multicast server exists, you can
enable the IGMP Snooping protocol
according to the requirement.
The Discarded Tag
of the Packet
Excluded in the
Multicast Group
Enabled, Disabled Enabled l This parameter is valid only when
Protocol Enabled is set to Enabled.
l If the 802.1q bridge or the 802.1ad bridge
receives a multicast packet whose
multicast address has no mapping item in
the multicast table (that is, this multicast
packet is an unknown multicast packet),
this parameter indicates the method for
processing this packet.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled,
The unknown multicast packet is
discarded.
l When this parameter is set to Disabled,
the unknown multicast packet is
broadcast in the VLAN.
requirement of the IGMP multicast
server.

Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
9.17.5 Modifying the Aging Time of the Multicast Table Item
In the case of the Ethernet switching board, the aging time of a multicast table item is 8 minutes
by default.
Prerequisite
The IGMP Snooping protocol of the bridge must be enabled.
Precautions
Procedure
Step 1 Select the Ethernet switching board from the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Layer-2
Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Multicast Aging Time tab.
Step 3 Modify the aging time of the multicast table item.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
9-179
Parameters
Multicast Aging
Time (Min)
1120 8 l When a table item is not updated
in a certain period (that is, no
IGMP request from this
multicast address is received),
this table item is automatically
deleted. This mechanism is
called aging, and this period is
called aging time.
l If this parameter is set to a very
large value, the bridge stores
excessive multicast table items
that are outdated, which exhausts
the resources of the multicast
table.
l If this parameter is set to a very
small value, the bridge may
delete the multicast table item
that is needed, which reduces the
forwarding efficiency.

9.17.6 Configuring the Broadcast Packet Suppression Function
When the broadcast packet suppression function is enabled, the port discards the newly received
broadcast packets when the bandwidth used by the received broadcast packets exceeds the preset
broadcast packet suppression threshold of the port.
Prerequisite
Precautions
Procedure
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Then, select External Port.
Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Step 3 Set Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression and Broadcast Packet Suppression
Threshold.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
Parameters
Enabling Broadcast
Packet Suppression
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled This parameter specifies whether to enable
the broadcast packet suppression function.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Threshold
10% to 100% 30% When the broadcast packet suppression
function is enabled, the port discards the
newly received broadcast packets when the
bandwidth used by the received broadcast
packets exceeds the preset broadcast packet
suppression threshold of the port.

9.18 Configuring the Service Access of NEs
You can ensure the security of a network by setting the service access of the NEs on the network.
9.18.1 Configuring the LCT Access to NEs
When an NE is managed by the NMS, the LCT cannot access this NE by default.
9.18.2 Configuring the Ethernet Access to an NE
By default, the NMS can access an NE by using the Ethernet port.
9.18.3 Configuring the Serial Port Access to an NE
By default, the NMS can access an NE by using the serial port.
9.18.1 Configuring the LCT Access to NEs
When an NE is managed by the NMS, the LCT cannot access this NE by default.
Prerequisite
l If the LCT requests to log in to an NE to which the NMS has logged in, the NE determines
whether to permit the login of the LCT according to the status of LCT Access Control
Switch.
l If the LCT requests to log in to an NE to which the NMS has not logged in, the NE permits
the login of the LCT regardless of the status of LCT Access Control Switch. The NMS,
however, can log in to an NE to which the LCT has logged in. That is, the login of the LCT
does not affect the login of the NMS. After the NMS user logs in to the NE successfully,
the logged LCT user is not affected. If LCT Access Control Switch is set to Disable
Access, the logged LCT user is also not affected.
9-181
Procedure
Step 1 Select the target NE in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Security > LCT Access Control from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Access Allowed to enable the LCT access function.
NOTE
To disable the LCT access function, click Disable Access.
----End
9.18.2 Configuring the Ethernet Access to an NE
By default, the NMS can access an NE by using the Ethernet port.
Prerequisite
l It is recommended that the LCT accesses an NE by using the Ethernet port.
l If you need to initialize an NE or perform software loading by using the LCT, the LCT
needs to access the NE by using the Ethernet port.
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Procedure
Step 1 Select the target NE in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Communication > Access Control from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the Enable Ethernet Access check box and click Apply to enable the Ethernet access
function.
NOTE
To disable the Ethernet access function, do not select the Enable Ethernet Access check box and click
Apply.
----End
9.18.3 Configuring the Serial Port Access to an NE
By default, the NMS can access an NE by using the serial port.
Prerequisite
If the LCT cannot access an NE through the serial port after the Enable Serial Port Access
check box is selected, it indicates that the LCT access function may be disabled.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the target NE in the NE Explorer. Then, choose Communication > Access Control from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the Enable Serial Port Access check box and select Access NM. Click Apply.
Step 3 Optional: Select the baud rate of the serial port from the Baud Rate drop-down list. Click
Apply to complete the setting.
----End
9-183
Parameters
Enable Serial Port Access Selected, not selected Selected If the Enable Serial Port
Access check box is selected, the
serial port access function is
available.
Access Command Line Selected, not selected Not selected If Access Command Line is
selected, the serial port can be
used to access the command line
terminal.
Access NM Selected, not selected Selected If Access NM is selected, the
serial port can be used to access
the NMS.
Baud Rate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400, 57600,
115200
9600 This parameter specifies the
communication rate of the serial
port. This parameter can be set
only when the Enable Serial
Port Access check box is
selected.

Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
A Glossary
Terms are listed in an alphabetical order.
A.1 0-9
This section provides the terms starting with numbers.
A.2 A-E
This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.
A.3 F-J
This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.
A.4 K-O
This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.
A.5 P-T
This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.
A.6 U-Z
This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.
IDU 610/620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) A Glossary
A-1
A.1 0-9
This section provides the terms starting with numbers.
1+1 protection An architecture that has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protection
SNC/trail and a permanent bridge. At the source end, the normal traffic signal is
permanently bridged to both the working and protection SNC/trail. At the sink end, the
normal traffic signal is selected from the better of the two SNCs/trails. Due to the
permanent bridging, the 1+1 architecture does not allow an extra unprotected traffic
signal to be provided.
1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)
802.1Q in 802.1Q 802.1Q in 802.1Q (QinQ) is a VLAN feature that allows the equipment to add a VLAN
tag to a tagged frame.The implementation of QinQ is to add a public VLAN tag to a
frame with a private VLAN tag, making the frame encapsulated with two layers of VLAN
tags. The frame is forwarded over the service provider's backbone network based on the
public VLAN tag. By this, a layer 2 VPN tunnel is provided to customers.The QinQ
feature enables the transmission of the private VLANs to the peer end transparently.
A.2 A-E
This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.
A
ACAP See adjacent channel alternate polarization
adaptive modulation A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to the
channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a high-
efficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum
utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts
the low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the
link that carries high-priority services.
ADC See Analog to Digital Converter
add/drop multiplexer Add/Drop Multiplexing. Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of
the constituent signals contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are
added to (inserted), and/or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed
through the ADM.
Address Resolution
Protocol
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to
MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through
ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host
converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame.
The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment
through its IP address.
adjacent channel
alternate polarization
A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal
polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.
ADM See add/drop multiplexer
A Glossary
A-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Administrative Unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer
and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order
VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to
the multiplex section frame start.
AGC See Automatic Gain Control
AM See adaptive modulation
Analog to Digital
Converter
An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. The
reverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC).
APS See Automatic Protection Switching
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol
ASK amplitude shift keying
ATPC See automatic transmit power control
AU See Administrative Unit
Automatic Gain
Control
A process or means by which gain is automatically adjusted in a specified manner as a
function of a specified parameter, such as received signal level.
Automatic Protection
Switching
Automatic Protection Switching (APS) is the capability of a transmission system to
detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the
traffic.
automatic transmit
power control
A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected
at the receiver
B
Base Station Controller A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworks
with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides
the following functions: Radio resource management, Base station management, Power
control, Handover control, and Traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages
one or more BTSs in an actual network.
BER See Bit Error Rate
BIOS Basic Input Output System
BIP Bit-Interleaved Parity
bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding
bit in the received digital signal.
Bit Error Rate Bit error rate. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used
to measure the communications quality of a network.
BPDU See Bridge Protocol Data Unit
Bridge Protocol Data
Unit
The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that
uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on
ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was
intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a
network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges
interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
BSC See Base Station Controller
A-3
C
C-VLAN Customer VLAN
CAR See committed access rate
CBS See Committed Burst Size
CCDP See Co-Channel Dual Polarization
Central Processing
Unit
The CPU is the brains of the computer. Sometimes referred to simply as the processor
or central processor, the CPU is where most calculations take place.
CF See compact flash
CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol
CIR See Committed Information Rate
CIST See Common and Internal Spanning Tree
Class of Service A class object that stores the priority mapping rules. When network congestion occurs,
the class of service (CoS) first processes services by different priority levels from high
to low. If the bandwidth is insufficient to support all services, the CoS dumps the services
of low priority.
Co-Channel Dual
Polarization
A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical
polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twice
the transmission capacity of the single polarization.
committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.
CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified
into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate
can be defined.
Committed Burst Size committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is,
the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed
information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this
parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be
forwarded.
Committed
Information Rate
The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal
conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to
the leaky bucket.
Common and Internal
Spanning Tree
Common and Internal Spanning Tree. The single Spanning Tree calculated by STP and
RSTP together with the logical continuation of that connectivity through MST Bridges
and regions, calculatedby MSTP to ensure that all LANs in the Bridged Local Area
Network are simply and fully connected.
compact flash Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in
portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in
a standardized enclosure.
CoS See Class of Service
CPU See Central Processing Unit
CRC See Cyclic Redundancy Check
A Glossary
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
cross polarization
interference
cancellation
A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminate
the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.
Cyclic Redundancy
Check
A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses
a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it
sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after
transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission
was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission
includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D
Data Communication
Network
A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data
Communication Function (DCF).
Data Communications
Channel
The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to
transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)
between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1D3 is referred to as the
192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4D12
is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
DC See Direct Current
DC-C See DC-Return Common (with Ground)
DC-I See DC-Return Isolate (with Ground)
DC-Return Common
(with Ground)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between
the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-Return Isolate
(with Ground)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND
on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DCC See Data Communications Channel
DCN See Data Communication Network
Differentiated Services
Code Point
Differentiated Services CodePoint. A marker in the header of each IP packet using bits
0-6 in the DS field. Routers provide differentiated classes of services to various service
streams/flows based on this marker. In other words, routers select corresponding PHB
according to the DSCP value.
digital modulation A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the
carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the
information can be transmitted by the carrier.
Direct Current Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop or
change amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction.
Distance Vector
Multicast Routing
Protocol
Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol. The DVMRP protocol is an Internet
gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical dense
mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing
datagrams with its neighbors.
DSCP See Differentiated Services Code Point
A-5
dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio waves
orthogonally polarized.
DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
E
E-LAN Ethernet-LAN
ECC See Embedded Control Channel
Electro Magnetic
Interference
Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or
limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
electromagnetic
compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications
equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic
environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional
electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
[NTIA]
Embedded Control
Channel
An ECC provides a logical operations channel between SDH NEs, utilizing a data
communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer.
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility
EMI See Electro Magnetic Interference
EPL See Ethernet Private Line
EPLAN See ethernet private lan service
equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for
the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.
ERPS See ethernet ring protection switching
ES-IS End System to Intermediate System
ethernet private lan
service
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a
dedocated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or
MPLS server layer networks.
Ethernet Private Line A point-to-point interconnection between two UNIs without SDH bandwidth sharing.
Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers.
ethernet ring
protection switching
protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies.
ethernet virtual private
lan service
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared
bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
ethernet virtual private
line service
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared
bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute
European
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
A Glossary
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
EVPL See ethernet virtual private line service
EVPLAN See ethernet virtual private lan service
A.3 F-J
This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.
F
Fast Ethernet A type of Ethernet with a maximum transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s. It complies with
the IEEE 802.3u standard and extends the traditional media-sharing Ethernet standard.
fast link pulse The likn pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation.
FCS Frame Check Sequence
FD See frequency diversity
FE See Fast Ethernet
FEC See Forward Error Correction
Field Programmable
Gate Array
A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit
(ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the
PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also
overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the
limited number of gate arraies.
FIFO See First in First out
File Transfer Protocol A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers
on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an
FTP client and the other an FTP server.
First in First out A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.
FLP See fast link pulse
Forward Error
Correction
A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at
the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission are corrected at the receive end.
FPGA See Field Programmable Gate Array
frequency diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain
frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then
performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.
FTP See File Transfer Protocol
G
gateway network
element
A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and
the NM application layer
GE See Gigabit Ethernet
A-7
Generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is
to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router
to avoid packet discarding and congestion.
GFP Generic Framing Procedure
Gigabit Ethernet GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.It
runs at 1000Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support
coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If
Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge
(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.
In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing
the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.
GNE See gateway network element
Graphical User
Interface
A visual computer enviroment that represents programs, files, and options with graphical
images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.
GTS See Generic traffic shaping
GUI See Graphical User Interface
H
HDB3 High Density Bipolar Code 3
HDLC See High level Data Link Control procedure
High level Data Link
Control procedure
A data link protocol from ISO for point-to-point communications over serial links.
Derived from IBM's SDLC protocol, HDLC has been the basis for numerous protocols
including X.25, ISDN, T1, SS7, GSM, CDPD, PPP and others. Various subsets of HDLC
have been developed under the name of Link Access Procedure (LAP).
hot standby A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables and
storage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. When
the faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services in
the faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entire
system.
HSM Hitless Switch Mode
hybrid radio The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supports
the AM function.
I
ICMP See Internet Control Messages Protocol
IDU See indoor unit
IEC See International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF The Internet Engineering Task Force
IF See intermediate frequency
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol
A Glossary
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
IGMP snooping A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages
and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner,
the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
indoor unit The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing,
multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.
Institute of Electrical
and Electronics
Engineers
A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but
boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,
electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF
signal.
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF
signal.
Intermediate System to
Intermediate System
A protocol used by network devices (routers) .IS-IS is a kind of Interior Gateway Protocol
(IGP), used within the ASs. It is a link status protocol using Shortest Path First (SPF)
algorithm to calculate the route.
International
Electrotechnical
Commission
The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and non-
governmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards.
International
Organization for
Standardization
ISO (International Organization for Standardization) is the world's largest developer and
publisher of International Standards.
Internet Control
Messages Protocol
ICMP belongs to the TCP/IP protocol suite. It is used to send error and control messages
during the transmission of IP-type data packets.
Internet Group
Management Protocol
The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among
the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish
and maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent
across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery
service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The
entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two
fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.
Internet Protocol
Version 6
A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications
and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task
Force (IETF).Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) is also called. It is a new version of the
Internet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The specifications and
standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force
(IETF).The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while
an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
IP See Internet Protocol
IPv6 See Internet Protocol Version 6
IS-IS See Intermediate System to Intermediate System
ISO See International Organization for Standardization
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector
A-9
IVL Independence VLAN learning
A.4 K-O
This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.
L
LAG See link aggregation group
LAN See Local Area Network
LAPD Link Access Procedure on the D channel
LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH
layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits
and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the
second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
LB See Loopback
LCAS See Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LDPC Low-Density Parity Check code
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
aggregation group so that a MAC clientcan treat the link aggregation group as if it were
a single link.
Link Capacity
Adjustment Scheme
The Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) is designed to allow the dynamic
provisioning of bandwidth, using VCAT, to meet customer requirements.
LMSP Linear Multiplex Section Protection
Local Area Network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,
FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs
are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/
s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
Loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors.
LPT Link State Path Through
M
MA See Maintenance Association
MAC See Medium Access Control
MADM Multi Add-Drop Multiplexer
Maintenance
Association
That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the
connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance
Entities.
A Glossary
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
Maintenance Domain The Maintenance Domain (MD) refers to the network or the part of the network for which
connectivity is managed by CFM. The devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.
Maintenance Point Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.
Management
Information Base
A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It
comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as
routers and switches) in a network.
Maximum Transfer
Unit
The MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) is the size of the largest datagram that can be
sent over a network.
MBS Maximum Burst Size
MD See Maintenance Domain
MDI See Medium Dependent Interface
Mean Time To Repair The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
Medium Access
Control
A general reference to the low-level hardware protocols used to access a particular
network. The term MAC address is often used as a synonym for physical addresses.
Medium Dependent
Interface
The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the media
transmission.
MEP Maintenance End Point
MIB See Management Information Base
MP See Maintenance Point
MSP See multiplex section protection
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTBF Mean Time Between Failure
MTTR See Mean Time To Repair
MTU See Maximum Transfer Unit
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol
Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an
algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed
as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided
in the loop network.The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and
multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded
in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
multiplex section
protection
A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and
including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
N
N+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection
channel.
NE See Network Element
Network Element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One
NE is at least equipped with one system control board which manages and monitors the
entire network element. The NE software runs on the system control board.
A-11
network management
system
The network management system in charge of the operation, administration, and
maintenance of a network.
Network Service Access
Point
A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can
access OSI network services.
NLP Normal Link Pulse
NMS See network management system
NNI Network-to-Network Interface or Network Node Interface
non-gateway network
element
A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must be
transferred by the gateway network element application layer.
non-GNE See non-gateway network element
NSAP See Network Service Access Point
O
OAM Operations, Administration and Maintenance
ODU See outdoor unit
Open Shortest Path
First
A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's
algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A
link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers
in the area.
Open Systems
Interconnection
A standard or "reference model" (officially defined by the International Organization of
Standards (ISO)) for how messages should be transmitted between any two points in a
telecommunication network. The reference model defines seven layers of functions that
take place at each end of a communication.
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or
maintenance engineers of different stations.
OSI See Open Systems Interconnection
OSPF See Open Shortest Path First
outdoor unit The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency
conversion and amplification for RF signals.
A.5 P-T
This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.
P
PDH See Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
Peak Information Rate Peak Information Rate . A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be
not less than the committed information rate.
PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast-Dense Mode
PIM-SM See Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode
A Glossary
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
PIR See Peak Information Rate
Plesiochronous Digital
Hierarchy
A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum
rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.
Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates
data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack.
polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or
rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is
perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically
polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the
plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the
tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this
electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.
PPP See Point-to-Point Protocol
PRBS Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence
Protocol Independent
Multicast-Sparse Mode
A protocol for efficiently routing to multicast groups that may span wide-area (and inter-
domain) internets. This protocol is named protocol independent because it is not
dependent on any particular unicast routing protocol for topology discovery, and sparse-
mode because it is suitable for groups where a very low percentage of the nodes (and
their routers) will subscribe to the multicast session. Unlike earlier dense-mode multicast
routing protocols such as DVMRP and PIM-DM which flooded packets everywhere and
then pruned off branches where there were no receivers, PIM-SM explicitly constructs
a tree from each sender to the receivers in the multicast group. Multicast packets from
the sender then follow this tree.
Q
QoS See Quality of Service
QPSK See Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
Quadrature Phase Shift
Keying
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) is a modulation method of data transmission
through the conversion or modulation and the phase determination of the reference
signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses
four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On these
phases, each QPSK character can perform two-bit coding and display the codes in Gray
code on graph with the minimum BER.
Quality of Service Quality of Service, which determines the satisfaction of a subscriber for a service. QoS
is influenced by the following factors applicable to all services: service operability,
service accessibility, service maintainability, and service integrity.
R
Radio Freqency A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an
electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave.
The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC
with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified
into such high-frequency current.
Radio Network
Controller
A device used in the RNS to control the usage and integrity of radio resources.
A-13
Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree
convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
Received signal level The signal level at a receiver input terminal.
Received Signal
Strength Indicator
The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the
receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD
within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna
RF See Radio Freqency
RFC Request For Comment
RIP See Routing Information Protocol
RMON Remote Monitoring
RNC See Radio Network Controller
Routing Information
Protocol
Routing Information Protocol: A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP
protocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source and
destination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing
information to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth.
RS Reed-Solomon encoding
RSL Received Signal Level
RSSI See Received Signal Strength Indicator
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RTN Radio Transmission Node
S
SD See space diversity
SDH See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SFP See Small Form-Factor Pluggable
Signal Noise Ratio The SNR or S/N (Signal to Noise Ratio) of the amplitude of the desired signal to the
amplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the
logarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel).
Simple Network
Management Protocol
A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify
the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which
can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the
network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control
information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
Small Form-Factor
Pluggable
A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.
SNC See SubNetwork Connection
SNCP See SubNetwork Connection Protection
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol
A Glossary
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
SNR See Signal Noise Ratio
SP Strict Priority
space diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance
to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two
signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.
Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol. STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop.
STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths through
certain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network.
SSM See Synchronization Status Message
STM See synchronous transport module
STM-1 SDH Transport Module -1
STM-1e STM-1 Electrical Interface
STM-1o STM-1 Optical Interface
STM-N SDH Transport Module -N
STP See Spanning Tree Protocol
sub-network Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of
network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or
correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock
subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a
sub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions and
closely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a
topological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network
planning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space
can be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on
the equipments under their management.
SubNetwork
Connection
A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by the
association of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork.
SubNetwork
Connection Protection
A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if
the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required
level.
SVL Shared VLAN Learning
Synchronization Status
Message
A message that is used to transmit the quality levels of timing signals on the synchronous
timing link. Through this message, the node clocks of the SDH network and the
synchronization network can aquire upper stream clock information, and the two perform
operations on the corresponding clocks, such as tracing, switchover, or converting hold),
and then forward the synchronization information of this node to down stream.
Synchronous Digital
Hierarchy
SDH is a transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines
the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-
ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed
counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH is
suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since
it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
A-15
synchronous transport
module
An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in the
SDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields
organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 . The information is suitably
conditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronized
to the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Higher
capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacities
for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.
T
TCI Tag Control Information
TCP See TransmissionControl Protocol
TDM See Time Division Multiplexing
Telecommunication
Management Network
The Telecommunications Management Network is a protocol model defined by ITU-T
for managing open systems in a communications network.An architecture for
management, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation and
administration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services.
Time Division
Multiplexing
It is a multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time
slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross
time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be
transmitted over one channel.
TMN See Telecommunication Management Network
trail A type of transport entity, mainly engaged in transferring signals from the input of the
trail source to the output of the trail sink, and monitoring the integrality of the transferred
signals.
TransmissionControl
Protocol
The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to
be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete
messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable
in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in
the ISO/OSI reference model.
TU Tributary Unit
A.6 U-Z
This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.
U
UDP See User Datagram Protocol
UNI See User Network Interface
A Glossary
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)
User Datagram
Protocol
A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a
datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP
to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable
connectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,
delayed, or delivered out of order.UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,
the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is
received.
User Network Interface A type of ATM Forum specification that defines an interoperability standard for the
interface between ATM-based products (a router or an ATM switch) located in a private
network and the ATM switches located within the public carrier networks. Also used to
describe similar connections in Frame Relay networks.
V
VC See Virtual Container
VC-12 Virtual Container -12
VCG See virtual concatenation group
VCTRUNK A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal
port of a data service processing board
virtual concatenation
group
A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same
virtual concatenation link
Virtual Container A Virtual Container is the information structure used to support path layer connections
in the SDH. It consists of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information
fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 s.
Virtual Local Area
Network
A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical
network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated
with switched Ethernet.
Virtual Private
Network
The extension of a private network that encompasses encapsulated, encrypted, and
authenticated links across shared or public networks. VPN connections can provide
remote access and routed connections to private networks over the Internet.
VLAN See Virtual Local Area Network
Voice over IP An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice
information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form
in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the
public switched telephone network (PSTN).
VoIP See Voice over IP
VPN See Virtual Private Network
W
Wait to Restore Time A period of time that must elapse before a - from a fault recovered - trail/connection can
be used again to transport the normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal traffic
signal from.
A-17
WAN See Wide Area Network
Web LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NE
management layer of the transport network
Wide Area Network A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are
physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a
province, a state or even a country.
WRR Weighted Round Robin
WTR See Wait to Restore Time
X
XPD Cross-Polarization Discrimination
XPIC See cross polarization interference cancellation
A Glossary
Issue 06 (2010-05-25)

IDU 610620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) - (V100R003 - 06)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IDU 610620 Configuration Guide (Web LCT) - (V100R003 - 06)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX RTN 600 Radio Transmission System

Configuring the IF 1+1

You might also like